Quarterlytics / TheWorks.co.uk

TheWorks.co.uk

wrks · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker wrks
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2023 Annual Report · TheWorks.co.uk
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Inspiring reading,  
learning, creativity  
and play 

Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Our ambition: to become one 
of the most loved retailers in the 
UK – the go-to place for reading, 
learning, creativity and play.

Contents

Strategic report
Highlights 
Our strategic roadmap 
Our investment case 
At a glance  
Chair’s statement 
Chief Executive’s review 
Our marketplace 
Our business model 
Our strategy and progress 
How we measure performance 
Financial review 
Our stakeholders  
Section 172 statement 
ESG review  
Task Force on Climate-Related 
Financial Disclosures (TCFD) 
Streamlined Energy and Carbon 
Reporting (SECR) 
Risk management and 
principal risks and uncertainties 
Viability statement 
Non-financial and sustainability 
information statement 

01
02
03
04
06
08
12
14
16
18
19
26
28
29

36

47

49
54

57

Corporate governance
58
Chair’s governance introduction  
 60
Board of Directors 
62
Corporate governance report 
66
Audit Committee report 
70
Nomination Committee report 
73
Directors’ remuneration report 
78
Annual report on remuneration 
Directors’ report 
86
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities  89

Financial statements
Independent auditor’s report 
Consolidated income statement 
Consolidated statement  
of comprehensive income 
Consolidated statement  
of financial position 
Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity 
Consolidated cash flow statement 
Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements 
Company statement  
of financial position 
Company statement  
of changes in equity 
Notes to the Company  
financial statements 
Advisers and contacts  

90
98

99

100

101
102

103

133 

134 

135
140

Highlights

Financial highlights

Revenue

£280.1m

FY22: £264.6m

Profit before tax 

£5.0m

Restated FY22: £14.2m

Like-for-like (LFL) sales growth2

Adjusted PBT

+4.2%

FY22: +10.5%

£10.1m

Restated FY22: £16.5m

Non-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA

£9.0m

FY22: £16.6m

Dividend

1.6p

FY22: 2.4p

1  See note 14 to the financial statements.

Basic EPS

8.4p

Restated1 FY22: 22.3p

Adjusted basic EPS

16.5p

Restated1 FY22: 26.0p

2   LFL sales growth has been calculated with reference to the FY22 comparative sales figures. In FY22’s Annual Report, two-year comparatives were used 

because the use of a normal one-year LFL comparative was prevented by the various disruptions to store trading brought about by COVID-19 restrictions 
in the FY21 comparative period. 

Operational highlights
•  Resilient performance delivered in FY23 against challenging 
backdrop. Well-positioned to capitalise on opportunities 
and deliver growth in FY24. 

•  Continued to refine our customer proposition to more closely 

reflect our purpose - to inspire customers to read, learn, create 
and play – making lives more fulfilled. Rolled out evolved brand 
to stores and online to start changing legacy perceptions of The 
Works and more accurately reflect the business today.

•  Refreshed the product offering, launching new own brand 

products such as “PlayWorks” toy range. Increased book market 
share by stocking more front-list titles from best-selling authors 
such as Julia Donaldson and Colleen Hoover.

•  Further enhanced the quality of the store estate with 14 new 
openings (which are trading ahead of expectations), three 
relocations and 13 store closures. Continued to optimise 
the existing estate with an investment of c.£1.4m in 34 refits, 
improving the customer experience by enhancing layouts, 
improving signage and optimising space utilisation.

• 

Invested in operational improvements, the significant benefits of 
which are expected to be fully realised in FY24 and beyond. This 
included restructuring the distribution centre management team, 
implementing a new stock allocation system, and introducing 
a new automated packing machine at our online fulfilment 
provider, iForce. 

•  Launched a review of the business operating model to drive 

effectiveness and efficiencies, improve processes and IT systems, 
particularly in relation to the flow of stock through the business.

•  Restructured management of the online operation to drive improved 

performance. Increased focus on customer experience of the 
website and introduced new tools to support analysis and provide 
insights into how best to improve performance.

• 

 Placed 12th in ‘Best Big Companies to Work For’, up from 13th 
in each of the past two years, and maintained 2* accreditation 
for ‘outstanding’ workplace engagement.

Visit our corporate website
corporate.theworks.co.uk

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

01

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportOur strategic roadmap

Creating a better, 
not just bigger business

Our purpose and strategy aim to bring our well-loved brand to life  
and make The Works ‘better, not just bigger’. 

Our purpose 
To inspire reading, learning, creativity and play –
making lives more fulfilled.

Our ambition
To become one of the most loved retailers 
in the UK.

Our better, not just bigger strategy

Develop our 
brand and 
increase 
customer 
engagement

Enhance 
our online 
proposition

Optimise our 
store estate

Drive  
operational 
improvements

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

Our strategic enablers

Our colleagues

Our systems and data

Our ESG commitments

  Read more about our ESG approach on pages 29 to 35

Underpinned by our values 

  Read more about our culture on page 32

02

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Our investment case

A differentiated offering 
with significant organic 
growth potential in the value 
retail sector

1

2

3

4

5

Unique proposition
Better value than specialists and better choice and customer 
service than discounters.

c.3,500

product lines

Broad demographic appeal
Diverse customer base across four addressable markets creates 
significant growth opportunity.

£16.23bn

addressable market1

 Read more about our marketplace on page 12

Flexible store estate
Small inexpensive shop units in a variety of locations with 
short leases that provide flexibility to respond to local 
market conditions.

526

stores

Simplicity over complexity
Focused on implementing best retail practice, as opposed 
to costly, high-risk concepts.

Real opportunity for growth
Previous under-potentialisation creates real opportunity for sales 
and profit growth.

+5.8%

FY23 revenue growth

 Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

1   The value of the UK craft, books, stationery, toys and games markets based on Craft Intelligence, Nielsen, IRI and Statista data.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

03

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportAt a glance

A leading family friendly 
value retailer 

We make reading, learning, creativity and play accessible to everyone. Great value, 
fantastic ranges and excellent customer service are at the heart of our offering.

Store estate

Multi-channel

Colleagues

•  Diverse locations including 

•  Fully transactional online store.

•  Exclusive online product offerings.

•  Convenient click & collect service.

41 million  

website visits during FY23

high streets, shopping centres, 
retail parks, factory outlets and 
garden centres.

•  Serve local communities and 

play a key role supporting local 
fundraising activities.

526 

stores in the UK and Ireland

14 

new store openings during FY23

•  Loyal, dedicated and highly 
engaged colleagues are key 
to our success.

•  Ranked 12th in Best Big Company 
to Work for national list, up from 
13th last year. Consistently ranked 
in the top 25 for the past five years.

Awarded second  
highest two star-rating 
Best Big Company to Work for

c.4,000

colleagues

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Our loyalty scheme
During the year, following its relaunch, our ‘Together’ loyalty scheme has 
continued to grow and it now has c.1.7m active members. Giving 5 pence back 
for every £1 spent, the scheme offers customers a simple loyalty proposition and 
real savings. The growth in the scheme’s membership was driven by a number 
of factors including double points promotions which also increased the number 
of transactions and average spend. As our Together scheme enters its tenth 
year we continue to see members consistently spend more money more often. 
As membership continues to grow, the scheme will provide us with invaluable 
data and insights about what our customers want.

04

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

c.1.7m

loyalty members

  
Our product offering is designed to appeal to all the family and focuses on supporting 
reading, learning, creativity and play in the categories detailed below. It includes our own 
brand ranges, which support our value offering and enable us to offer exclusive products 
to our customers, plus the most in-demand branded products across our categories.

Our products and brands

Our brands

Books
•  A destination for children’s books 

that includes bright board books for 
babies, amazing activity books and 
fascinating fiction for all ages including 
teenagers, authoritative non-fiction 
and educational workbooks to 
inspire children. 

•  Great value offered through our 10 

for £10 picture book range and our 3 
for £6 adult fiction selection. 

•  A curated range of the very latest 

trending adult books – both fiction 
and non-fiction.

•  A collection of kids’ exclusive own brand 
value kits, ready mix paints, colour-your-
own range and bumper bags of essential 
accessories to inspire young budding 
artists and crafters. 

Arts & Crafts
•  Our exclusive range of Crawford 
& Black art essentials: canvases, 
sketchbooks, paints, brushes and art 
sets for beginners to artisans to create 
their own masterpieces. 

•  Our essential range of ‘craft blanks’ to 

personalise, craft kits and wooden items 
to transform and embellish with our own 
brand of Make & Create accessories. 

Toys & Games
•  Wide range of toys including our new 

own brand ‘PlayWorks’ range, designed 
to ignite imaginations and encourage 
cognitive development.

•  £10 and under pocket money toys, 
perfect for kids’ own purchases 
and gifting. 

•  Great value summer toys range 

promoting fun in the sun and aimed 
at getting kids outside.

i m a gine • learn • grow

Stationery
•  Our own brand new ‘Works Essentials’ 

range and big key brands stationery to 
meet all home, office and school needs. 

•  A curated range of stationery and 
accessories to fill ‘Back to School’ 
bags and pencil cases.

Seasonal
•  Great value ranges to make seasonal 
events including Christmas, Easter 
and Halloween extra special.

•  A great range of partyware bringing 
communities and families together to 
celebrate national events such as the 
Jubilee and Coronation.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

05

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportChair’s statement

Good strategic progress

Introduction
Last year I wrote about the positive effect that the Group’s new 
purpose - to inspire reading, learning, creativity and play - making 
lives more fulfilled – was having on the business soon after it was 
introduced. This year we embedded the purpose further across 
the business, informing the implementation of our ‘better, not 
just bigger’ strategy, inspiring the creation of our ESG plan and 
providing clarity about the future direction of the business. 

The purpose has also helped to guide colleagues as they served 
customers and reinforced the incredible culture at The Works, one 
of the enduring strengths and unique attributes of the business. 
And whilst the economic environment has been extremely 
challenging, colleagues at The Works have responded thoughtfully 
to this backdrop, using it as an opportunity to inspire customers 
to enjoy reading, learning, creativity and play on a budget, whilst 
also supporting local communities and our charitable causes. 
I am proud to chair such a creative and purpose-led business 
and would like to thank everyone at The Works for their efforts. 

Performance
I have long been impressed by the resilience of The Works, its ability 
to adapt to unforeseen circumstances and manage challenging 
trading conditions. In FY23 these traits were seen again as The 
Works delivered a resilient performance, with revenue increasing 
by 5.8% to £280.1m. This growth was delivered despite the business 
still recovering from a cyber security incident late in the previous 
financial year and an uncertain macroeconomic backdrop. Thanks 
to Gavin’s steady leadership and the action taken to protect the 
business, the resonance of our value customer proposition and 
the patience and flexibility of our colleagues, we ended the year 
on a more positive sales trajectory. Going into FY24, we can now 
confidently say that The Works is a more operationally robust 
business, with greatly strengthened cyber security, and remains 
financially strong.

The inflationary environment did impact our profit performance, 
particularly in the first half of the year given rising freight, energy 
and other business costs. However, as a result of these cost 
pressures easing and an improvement in store sales growth 
in the second half, we ended the year in line with our revised 
profit expectations. Although this is not where we expected to 
be at the start of the year, it is a creditable performance given 
the challenges the business faced and we ended the year in 
a financially secure position. 

Strategy
The Works announced its ‘better, not just bigger’ strategy in 
July 2021, committing to a greater focus on the customer and to 
strengthening the fundamentals of the business. This strategy not 
only made The Works more resilient during the COVID pandemic 
and challenging economic environment that followed, it has also 
aligned business decisions more closely with our purpose, and 
ultimately the customer. 

Strategic progress was slower in the first half of FY23 as the business 
was primarily focused on recovering from the cyber security incident 
and the external environment saw retailers facing great uncertainty. 
However, more progress was made in the second half of the year and 

Some good strategic 
progress was made 
despite challenging trading 
conditions, and the underlying 
appeal and relevance of The 
Works’ proposition continues 
to resonate with customers.  

06

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

the foundations have now been laid for significant improvements in 
the year ahead. 

The evolved brand has been rolled out across the business and 
we are now building on this to demonstrate to customers why 
The Works is the best value destination for reading, learning, 
creativity and play. This will attract more customers to shop with 
us and through our relaunched ‘Together’ loyalty scheme we now 
have an opportunity to engage more with our growing and loyal 
customer community. 

Our active portfolio management continues. Our 14 new stores and 
3 relocated stores opened during the year are performing ahead of 
expectations and, along with our 34 store refits undertaken in the 
year, continue to improve the overall quality of our store estate.

Our online performance has been disappointing, partly reflecting 
a normalisation of store/online sales mix post-COVID. Following a 
review of our website and online operations we now have the right 
resource and plans in place to improve the customer experience 
and profitability of this channel. During the year we implemented 
a number of structural changes to enable improvements in our 
stock allocation and distribution processes, which will help drive 
significant operational efficiencies across the business. 

Together, these initiatives create a real opportunity for further 
strategic progress and a step-change in sales growth and 
improved profitability over the medium-term. We are excited by 
this potential and remain confident that our ‘better, not just bigger’ 
strategy is the right direction for the business. 

Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG)
The Board has continued to oversee development of the Group’s 
Environmental, Social and Governance plan and to monitor 
progress. Whilst we have put more structure around the ESG 
strategy in FY23 and made progress in key areas, the Board 
recognises that there is still much more to be done. 

Progress on ESG was mostly made in the second half of the year, 
namely the new initiatives to support colleague engagement, 
wellbeing and career development, as well as the creation of 
new climate targets and an improved system of monitoring our 
environmental impact.

We have now set a target to be net-zero by 2045, with an ambition 
to do so by 2040 (in line with the British Retail Consortium), and we 
are now fully compliant with the TCFD disclosure recommendations, 
including the reporting of Scope 3 emissions. We still have a long 
way to go to reduce our environmental impact but now have both 
the strategy in place and the mechanisms to track progress, which 
will guide our decision making in the years ahead. 

Although I believe that The Works is already a diverse, inclusive 
and supportive business, Diversity & Inclusion (D&I) is an area that 
I feel very strongly about and there is scope for us to do more. This 
year we conducted a full review of D&I at The Works and undertook 
a survey to understand colleague perceptions and experiences. 
Based on these insights we have now developed a strategy through 
which we can make significant progress to improve our diversity and 
inclusion in the years ahead. This will inspire colleagues to be even 
more supportive and embracing of differences, encourage new 
talent to join The Works and strengthen our special, collaborative 
and supportive company culture. 

CFO Succession
As announced alongside our FY23 results, Steve Alldridge has 
advised the Board of his intention to step down from his role as 
CFO by the end of 2023. In line with our succession plans, we are 
delighted that Rosie Fordham our current Head of Finance, will be 
appointed as CFO when Steve steps down.

Dividend and outlook
Despite delivering a resilient performance in FY23 and ending the 
year in a strong financial position, the Board hopes that FY23’s 
EBITDA was a low point and that it will increase progressively in 
future. Some good strategic progress was made despite challenging 
trading conditions, and the underlying appeal and relevance of The 
Works’ proposition continues to resonate with customers. 

During the period in which the business works to rebuild its levels of 
profit, a compromise is sought, between maintaining a reasonable 
dividend for shareholders, whilst ensuring that the Group continues 
to maintain its cash reserves. Taking this into consideration, along 
with the Company’s resilient FY23 performance, and its confidence 
in the Group’s prospects, the Board proposes a final dividend of 
1.6 pence per share in respect of FY23 and outlines its policy in 
relation to capital distributions, which is included at the end of the 
financial review. 

The Board believes that the business is well positioned to take full 
advantage of the opportunities ahead, make further strategic 
progress and grow sales profitably, and we remain confident in the 
Group’s future prospects

Carolyn Bradley
Chair
30 August 2023

Our culture
The Works has a one-of-a-kind culture, shaped by strong values 
that underpin everything we do. In the past 12 months I have 
visited many stores and had the opportunity to meet colleagues 
who serve our customers every day. I have also been able to 
observe our culture ‘in action’ and I am pleased to report that 
I have seen many examples of the caring and can-do values 
we aim to embed across the Group. Above all, our people are 
passionate about what they do and committed to our purpose. 

Recognising the many benefits that diversity of experiences, 
cultures and perspectives bring, during the year we have further 
progressed our diversity and inclusion strategy to ensure we 
foster an inclusive environment where everyone belongs and 
can thrive (see pages 32 to 34).

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

07

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportChief Executive’s review

Demonstrating resilience

Introduction
The Works delivered a resilient  performance in FY23, with sales 
growth driven by our fantastic network of stores and team of 
talented colleagues. The economic backdrop was challenging, 
characterised by high inflation and dampened consumer 
confidence. This, combined with the residual impact of the cyber 
security incident at the start of the year, meant that the end result 
was lower than we had anticipated heading into the year. However, 
by continuing to focus on our purpose and offering exceptional 
value for our customers, we have enabled them to continue 
reading, learning, creating and playing – demonstrating that 
our value proposition has enduring relevance. 

Over the past few years we have dealt with a host of external 
challenges, such as the COVID-19 lockdowns and global supply 
chain disruption, as well as internal ones like the cyber security 
incident. This has meant that our focus has been primarily on 
protecting and rebuilding the business and supporting our 
dedicated colleagues. Having established a clearer runway, our 
strategic progress accelerated in the second half of FY23 and we 
expect to make even more significant improvements in FY24. We 
remain confident in our ability to become an even ‘better, not just 
bigger’ business, driving a step-change in sales and profitability 
over the medium term. 

Trading performance and financial results
The Works has always been a business that demonstrates its 
resilience when confronted with difficult trading conditions and the 
same can be said for FY23. The Group delivered a 5.8% increase 
in revenue to £280.1m and LFL sales growth of 4.2%, with store LFL 
sales increasing 7.5% and online sales declining by 15.0%. Outlined 
below are the main factors that contributed to this performance:

•  The first quarter was particularly challenging given the residual 
impact of the cyber security incident, which occurred in March 
2022. The action taken to protect the business and rebuild our 
systems slowed down sales in May and June 2022. However, 
as a result of this one-off event we have now accelerated the 
implementation of IT upgrades and have even more robust 
defences in place. Momentum built following our recovery with 
an improving store LFL sales performance in the second half of 
the year. 

•  Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and political turmoil in the UK 

resulted in rising inflation and declining consumer confidence 
over the course of the year. Families have seen incomes and 
discretionary spending impacted. For value retailers like The 
Works we believe that sales have been impacted by cost-
constrained consumers reigning in their spending, but that this 
has been balanced, to an extent, by shoppers seeking out the 
best value. This was particularly the case at Christmas, resulting 
in strong store trading during peak season and into the new 
calendar year. 

•  Retailers have witnessed a shift in consumer behaviour post-
COVID, with shoppers increasingly returning to shop in-store 
and less so online. Stores have always been the lifeblood of the 
business and it has therefore resulted in a net gain for The Works 
given that stores represent c.90% of sales. 

The Works delivered a 
resilient performance in FY23, 
with sales growth driven 
by our fantastic network of 
stores and team of talented 
colleagues. 

08

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Profitability was constrained, particularly in the first half of FY23 
given the lower than anticipated sales growth, high energy and 
freight costs and the absence of COVID-related business rates 
support, which had provided a boost in FY22. We revised our 
profit expectations for the year in August 2022 and have achieved 
a result in line with our rebased expectations, delivering a Pre-
IFRS16 Adjusted EBITDA of £9.0m and Adjusted profit before tax of 
£10.1m. The statutory profit before tax was £5.0m, after impairment 
charges of £5.1m. We believe this level of EBITDA is the low point 
that we will build from in the years ahead, supported by greater 
strategic progress that we are now set up to deliver.

Strategy 
Our ‘better, not just bigger’ strategy was announced in July 2021 to 
build on the existing strengths of the business – our loyal customer 
base, strong culture and fantastic store network. The strategy aims 
to provide The Works with a clearer purpose and a more focused 
brand identity and customer proposition that will help to drive a 
step-change in sales growth, as well as enabling us to improve the 
operations of the business, making The Works a more customer-
focused and efficient retailer. 

Since launching the strategy we have made decent progress in 
some areas, but the reality of the internal and external challenges 
noted above has meant more of our attention than we anticipated 
has been focused on protecting the business and not on growth. 
Strategic progress has been slower than we would have liked; 
however, the business is now well-placed to deliver progress in 
FY24 and beyond, which we expect will drive the step change 
growth in sales and profitability that we want to achieve over 
the medium term. 

Below is a summary of the strategic progress made in FY23 
and the plans we have to accelerate this in the year ahead. 

Develop our brand and increase our customer engagement: 
We are working hard to ensure that our customer proposition 
and brand are consistent with our purpose, which will help to 
change legacy perceptions of The Works as a ‘pile it high, sell it 
cheap’ discounter, encourage new customers to shop with us and 
increase the spend of existing customers. 

In FY23 we rolled out our evolved brand to our stores and website 
to ensure that the visual representation of The Works accurately 
reflects our purpose and the modern, fun and engaging business 
that The Works is today. We have completed the first phase of 
this work and will now begin to more actively communicate this to 
customers by developing and executing a marketing strategy to 
bring our purpose and evolved brand to life, particularly through 
our social channels. 

We began to refresh our product offering to be better aligned with 
our purpose, whilst maintaining our commitment to low prices. This 
included the launch of new own brand ranges such as our children’s 
toys ‘PlayWorks’ brand and a significantly extended range of front-
list books, including titles by authors such as Colleen Hoover and 
Julia Donaldson, which helped to increase our book market share 
in terms of value by 0.7% and volume by 1.3% (to 3.9% and 10.3% 
respectively). There remains an opportunity to further increase 
market share in all categories and in the year ahead we will 
conduct an extensive refresh of our core art, craft, and stationery 
ranges and launch new kids’ pocket money toys ranges. 

We relaunched our ‘Together’ loyalty scheme this year and re-
engaged store colleagues to promote sign-ups. We welcomed 
over 700,000 new members in FY23, with over 1.7m active members 
of the scheme at the end of the year. 

Our loyalty customers typically spend 30% more than non-loyalty 
customers and shop more regularly. We will now focus on improving 
the insight we obtain from the loyalty scheme data through new 
software that will shortly be available, to support more effective 
CRM and loyalty activity. 

Driving operational 
improvements

Making our business better
During the year we launched a review of our current operating 
model to identify opportunities to improve our processes 
and systems including product planning and product life 
cycle management. 

While this review is ongoing, based on early findings, we 
have already started to introduce some changes including 
strengthening our merchandise planning function, which 
now includes a team of 25 people.

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

09

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportChief Executive’s review continued

Strategy continued
Enhance our online proposition: Our customers and store 
colleagues want the experience of using our shopping channels 
to be more consistent and integrated, with the website acting as 
a shop window for our stores (and vice versa); however, to-date 
the website has operated too independently. This, combined with 
the fact that strategic progress in this area has been slower than 
planned, means that as online sales have declined and costs 
have risen, the website is not currently profitable. 

We restructured the management of the online operation at 
the beginning of the calendar year to facilitate an increased 
rate of progress. We have also recently undertaken a series 
of website usability studies to inform areas of opportunity to 
improve the site, as well as introducing new tools to support 
performance analysis and provide insights into how best to 
improve the customer experience. To improve online profitability, 
we increased delivery charges to be more in line with peers, 
scaled back some online promotions and reduced fixed costs by 
reducing the space utilised at our third-party fulfilment centre.                                                            
Plans are in place to enhance the online customer experience and 
to trial using the new EPOS solution to enable customers to order 
products from our website whilst in our stores, providing more 
convenient access to online range extensions. We also expect 
online sales and profitability to improve as we derive benefit from 
the new analytical tools introduced in late FY23. There is much more 
work to be done to improve this channel which we hope will return 
to sales growth and profitability, in due course.

Plans are in place to enhance the online customer experience and 
to trial using the new EPOS solution to enable customers to order 
products from our website whilst in our stores, providing more 
convenient access to online range extensions. We also expect 
online sales and profitability to improve as we derive benefit from 
the new analytical tools introduced in late FY23. There is much more 
work to be done to improve this channel which we hope will return 
to sales growth and profitability, in due course.

Optimise our store estate: We believe that a major strength of The 
Works is our large network of stores in communities across the UK 
and Ireland, which have been and always will be the main driver 
of sales. 

This year we continued to optimise our store estate with 14 new 
store openings in great locations and are pleased that these new 
stores are trading ahead of expectations. We closed 13 stores and 
relocated a further three, trading from 526 stores at the end of the 
period. We also invested c.£1.4m in 34 store refits and continued to 
improve the store experience for customers by enhancing layouts, 
optimising the space utilisation across categories, and introducing 
clearer navigation and signage, supported by the evolved brand.

Sales densities in our stores remain relatively low and we believe 
there is a significant opportunity to increase this through winning 
new customers, better ranging and customer experience, space 
optimisation and improved product availability, all supported by 
a new labour structure put in place at the start of FY24. Whilst the 
priority in the short to medium term is to improve the existing store 
estate to realise its potential, in due course we will also consider 
whether to reintroduce a measured roll out programme, as we 
believe there is scope for the brand to trade successfully from 
at least 600 stores in the UK. 

10

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Drive operational improvements: Improving the operating 
effectiveness of the business is pivotal to our success. Although we 
will always maintain a lean operation, some areas of the business 
were previously inadequately resourced. This year we continued to 
invest ahead of time to ensure that we’re capable of realising the 
sales potential we believe The Works can reach.

In FY23 we restructured the distribution centre management team. 
The new team made an immediate impact, reviewing the operation 
and proposing a series of improvements in the way we pick and 
fulfil store deliveries for implementation in FY24. We expect to see 
significant cost savings and improved product availability in-store 
as a result of these changes. 

We implemented a new stock allocation system, Slimstock, to 
improve the quality of stock allocation decisions, which should 
improve store stock availability and therefore sales. At the start 
of the current calendar year we also significantly strengthened 
our merchandise planning function, and have been delighted to 
welcome some excellent new colleagues from respected retailers, 
which will drive a step change in our capability in this area. Allowing 
time for the new stock allocation system’s algorithms to ‘learn’ The 
Works’ data and for our new merchandising team to get fully up to 
speed with it, we expect to see further benefits in FY24 and beyond. 

Towards the end of FY23 we successfully launched the pilot of our 
new EPOS software in stores. Plans are in place to roll this new 
software out across the store estate by the end of FY24.

A new automated packing machine and robotics were introduced 
to the online fulfilment operation during the year (operated by 
a third-party provider, iForce). We continue to work with iForce 
to further improve the fulfilment cost per order, and reduce our 
consumption of packaging.

Late in the financial year, we launched a planned review of the 
business operating model. The first phase of this project entails 
documenting our current ways of operating, confirming the 
desired future ways of working and mapping the plan to migrate 
to the improved model. There will be significant changes to 
processes and IT systems over the next two to three years, which 
will fundamentally improve the way our business buys, moves and 
allocates stock, driving cost efficiencies and improved product 
availability for our customers.

Colleagues 
In an unpredictable and challenging year, our colleagues have 
remained steadfast in their dedication to helping customers to 
read, learn, create and play. We have worked hard to build and 
maintain our unique culture, underpinned by our values and a 
team of committed and enthusiastic colleagues. I am proud that 
10% of colleagues were promoted in the year and was delighted 
that we moved up one place to 12th in the ‘Best Big Companies to 
Work For’ national list, from 13th in each of the past two years. We 
also maintained our 2* accreditation for “outstanding” workplace 
engagement (3* being the highest possible accreditation). 

To continue to support the engagement, development 
and wellbeing of our colleagues, we launched ‘MyWorks’, a 
communications and engagement platform to keep colleagues 
informed about company news and benefits, and to enable access 
to resources on physical, mental and financial wellbeing. We also 
introduced the ‘Can Do Academy’, a system to support colleagues’ 
learning and development, and in response to the challenges 
created by the cost-of-living crisis we launched Wagestream, an app 
that offers a range of financial wellbeing tools.

Looking ahead to FY24, we will continue to invest in our colleagues, 
including launching a new Reward and Recognition programme 
to positively reinforce our values, celebrate success and provide 
financial incentives linked to our purpose and values. 

Developing our 
brand and increasing 
customer engagement

Creating Dex the dinosaur
To increase our visibility and customer engagement, in 
June 2022 we created Dex the dinosaur, a very recognisable 
character to enable customers to build a tangible connection 
with our business and our products. Aligning with our key 
values of play, learning and fun, dinosaurs appeal to all 
genders and generations. 

During the year, Dex, who is already becoming synonymous 
with our brand, visited many of our stores, including all our 
new store openings, adding fun to everyone’s shopping 
day. Our Dex branded product offering has also been 
very successful and the Dex shopper has become our 
best-selling bag. 

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG)
This time last year we were at the fledgling stages of the 
environmental part of our ESG journey and I am pleased that we 
have made significant further progress since then. The business 
is now fully aligned around our mission of ‘Doing Business Better’, 
which is about making positive and sustainable changes. 

A key development was the appointment of a Sustainability 
Manager in January 2023. The business has also adopted a 
more structured and rigorous approach to the environment, for 
example, to set longer-term ambitions to reduce the impact of our 
products, packaging and waste. We are also continuing to work 
with a specialist third-party ESG consultancy and during the year 
we set carbon reduction targets for Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions 
and developed roadmaps to achieve them. Our Scope 1 and 
Scope 2 targets, together with our ambition to achieve net zero by 
2040, fully align with the British Retail Consortium’s climate action 
roadmap and we became fully compliant with the Task Force on 
Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) in FY23. 

We are committed to creating an inclusive environment at The Works 
where everyone feels they belong and where different experiences, 
cultures and perspectives are embraced. We completed a review 
of our existing Diversity and Inclusion (D&I) policies and practices 
and have now developed a D&I strategy. Implementation of this 
will increase our collective understanding of D&I, improve training, 
enhance practical awareness and accountability at all levels and 
ensure that barriers to inclusion are removed. 

‘Giving back’ is part of our psyche and I am hugely grateful to our 
colleagues and customers for their generosity in supporting our 
charity initiatives. We are pleased to be developing a new charity 
partnership with the National Literacy Trust this year, which is 
closely aligned to our purpose of inspiring people to read, learn, 
create and play. 

Outlook
I am proud of the way everyone at The Works navigated a 
challenging year. We expect FY23 to be the low point in The Works’ 
profitability post-COVID given that cost headwinds have now 
eased, the financial performance improved throughout the second 
half of the year and we have started to make more meaningful 
strategic progress, the benefits of which are expected to be 
realised in FY24 and beyond. 

The macroeconomic outlook remains uncertain and we have 
entered the new financial year with a degree of caution, however, 
I am encouraged by the enduring appeal of The Works’ value 
proposition and excited by the opportunities presented in the year 
ahead, which the business is now better equipped to capitalise 
on. The Board and I are comfortable with the Company compiled 
estimate of the market’s forecast, an EBITDA of £10m for FY24, and 
remain confident in our ability to deliver profitable growth in the 
medium term.

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
30 August 2023

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

11

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report Our marketplace

We are uniquely positioned  
in the value retail sector

Our purpose, which is inspiring our customers to read, learn, create and play, sets us apart. We offer 
lower prices than the specialists and more choice and better customer service than the discounters.

e
c
i
r
p

l
l

u
f
/
m
u
m
e
r
P

i

l

e
u
a
v
/
t
n
u
o
c
s
i
D

Books

Crafts

Stationery

Toys

Generals/variety

Specialist

A number of market trends are affecting our business and shaping  
our business model and strategy including:

Spending trends 
In the current economic environment consumers are spending 
less and they are seeking out good value quality products. Our 
price proposition and overall offering position us well. In addition 
our ‘Together’ loyalty scheme, which now has c.1.7 million active 
members, offers customers real savings. 

Evolving shopping habits
Despite an uncertain macroeconomic backdrop and consumers 
being more cost conscious than ever, demand for convenient and 
enjoyable shopping experiences continues to grow. In response, 
our strategy is focused on making the overall shopping experience 
as straightforward as possible for customers shopping in store 
and online.

During the year we continued to optimise our store estate opening 
14 new stores, closing 13 stores, relocating 3 others and completing 
refits of 34 existing stores (see following page). Our aim is to provide 
better in-store experiences through improved space planning, 
making our stores easier to shop in (e.g. by reducing the number 
of fixtures and amount of stock on the shop floor) and enhancing 
our click & collect channel. 

Located on the high street, and in shopping centres, retail parks and 
garden centres, our stores are well positioned to benefit from the shift 
to more localised shopping which has continued post-pandemic. 
They also have a noticeable presence and are often actively involved 
in community activities including local charity fundraising.

12

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

To ensure we capitalise on the online growth opportunity we 
have reviewed our ecommerce operation and we are now 
enhancing our online proposition in a number of areas to improve 
the overall customer experience. In FY24, we will test using our new 
in-store till software for customers to order from our website while 
in-store, which will further integrate our channels and enhance 
customer convenience.

Consistent growth in our core markets 
The games, toy, art & craft, book and stationery markets have 
grown consistently over the last two decades. Our product offering 
is focused on these key specialist areas which appeal to a large 
and diverse customer base. 

According to a survey of the sector by Retail Week, published in 
May 2023, we were ranked the UK’s fastest-growing value retailer.

Responsible consumption 
Consumers are becoming more aware of the environmental 
impact of the things they buy and are seeking out more sustainable 
options. While the extent to which consumers are willing to 
pay higher prices to reduce their environmental footprint is less 
clear, we have a responsibility to do what we can to reduce our 
environmental impact. Information about the steps we are taking 
to do this is included on pages 30 to 31.

 
Enhancing the 
shopping experience

Optimising our 
store estate

New stores and refits
To create store environments that inspire our customers 
and reflect the communities we serve we have continued 
to enhance our store estate. 

During the year we opened 14 new stores, completed 34 
existing store refits, closed 13 stores and relocated 3 others. 
Eight of our new stores are located in shopping centres 
including Westfield London and Cribbs Causeway in 
Guildford. Six others are in high street locations in Paignton, 
Loughton, Minehead, Plymouth, Bude and Ringwood. 

Our new and refitted stores offer our customers an improved 
shopping experience and enable us to make better use of 
space and deploy more effective merchandising. 

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

14

new store openings

13

store closures

34

refits

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

13

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportOur business model

Building on our core strengths

Our core strengths and competitive advantage create a compelling proposition 
capable of delivering long-term value for all stakeholders.

Key inputs

Our proposition and how we create value

Colleagues
•  Approximately 4,000 colleagues who are 

key to the success of our business.

•  Loyal and dedicated.

•  Highly engaged.

Brand value
•  Exclusive own brands developed in house.

•  Clear purpose, focused on inspiring reading, 

learning, creativity and play.

Suppliers
•  Over 400 supplier relationships.

•  Located in the UK, Europe and Asia.

•  Close collaboration.

Infrastructure
•  Store network.

•  Online store.

•  Centrally located Support and 

Distribution Centres.

• 

IT infrastructure – investing to ensure scale, 
efficiency and security.

  Read more about 
our colleagues 
on pages 32 to 34

Our competitive advantage

Affordable
Customer focused
Family friendly
Convenient
Multi-channel 
Empowering

Design and innovate
• 

 Identify and bring desirable and  
on-trend products to the UK market.

• 

 Unique own brand products developed  
by in-house design studio in conjunction 
with suppliers.

•  New product lines launched  

throughout the year.

•  Five clear product zones: Books; Arts 
& Crafts; Toys & Games; Stationery; 
and Seasonal.

12

own brands

8

sub brands

c.10,000

new product lines  
introduced in FY23

Evolving and growing our business 
to make it better, not just bigger

Develop our brand 
and increase customer 
engagement

Enhance our online proposition

14

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Our proposition and how we create value

c.400

stock suppliers

157,000

sq ft warehousing and 
distribution facility

Source and distribute
• 

 Experienced buying team sources 
and curates product ranges, including 
popular brands to complement own 
brand offer.

•  Relationships with over 400 suppliers.

•  Work closely with suppliers to ensure 
product safety and quality control.

•  Warehousing and store distribution 

undertaken from 157,000 sq ft facility  
in Coleshill, Birmingham.

•  Online orders fulfilled by third party  

or picked in store.

•  Leading customer delivery proposition.

Sell to customers through  
convenient channels
•  Stores across the UK and Ireland.

•  Website – 24/7 trading with exclusive  

and extended ranges.

• 

 Marketplaces (e.g. Amazon, eBay).

•  Click & collect – linking  

stores and online.

526

stores

‘Together’ loyalty scheme 
increases customer 
engagement and provides 
valuable customer insights.

Evolving and growing our business 

to make it better, not just bigger

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

The value we create

Our people
Employment and a rewarding career 
for c.4,000 colleagues. 

12th 

Best Big Company to Work for

Our customers
Offer affordable, accessible, good quality 
products to inspire reading, learning, 
creativity and play.

Our suppliers
Indirectly support employment across  
our extensive supplier network.

Our community

£266k

fundraising in FY23 for Cancer Research UK, Mind, 
SAMH and Inspire. Many other local charities 
supported at store level.

Our shareholders

£1.0m 

final dividend proposed for the year 
ended 30 April 2023.

Optimise our store estate

Drive operational 
improvements

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

15

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportOur strategy and progress

We are improving and 
developing our business 
to be better, not just bigger

Since the launch of our ‘better, not just bigger strategy’ we have made good progress in some 
areas, however in others we still have work to do (see page 17). The business is well-placed to 
make more meaningful progress in FY24. 

Our strategic pillars

Develop our 
brand and increase 
customer engagement 
Through our brand and customer offer 
we want to reach more customers and 
improve the external view of The Works.

Enhance our 
online proposition 
We want to increase awareness of 
our website and make it an inspiring 
destination for customers by improving 
our customer journey and making it 
easy to use, inspiring and engaging.

Optimise our 
store estate 
Our aim is to create a store environment 
that can inspire our customers and 
reflects the communities we serve.

Drive operational 
improvements 
We aspire to improve our ways of 
working to become a better and more 
modern retailer. We want to ensure 
we operate efficiently and in a cost- 
effective way.

1616

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Progress to date and priorities for FY24

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Enhance our online proposition

Progress 
•  Rolled out our evolved brand to our stores and website to ensure 
that the visual representation of The Works accurately reflects 
our purpose and the modern, fun and engaging business that 
The Works is today.

•  Refreshed our product offering to be better aligned with our 
purpose, whilst maintaining our commitment to low prices 
(see page 9).

•  Relaunched our ‘Together’ loyalty scheme.

Progress
•  Restructured management of the online operation.

•  Undertaken a series of website usability studies to inform areas 
of opportunity to improve the site, as well as introducing new 
tools to support performance analysis and provide insights into 
how best to improve the customer experience (see page 10).

Priorities for FY24
•  Enhance the customer experience including enabling customers 

to order from our website whilst in store (see page 10).

Priorities for FY24
•  Develop and execute a marketing strategy to bring our 
purpose and evolved brand to life, particularly through 
our social channels.

•  Conduct an extensive refresh of our core art & craft, stationery 

and kids’ pocket money toys ranges.

Link to KPIs

Link to risks

Link to KPIs

Link to risks

A

B

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

A

B

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

10

11

Optimise our store estate

Drive operational improvements

Progress
•  Opened 14 new stores, closed 13 stores, relocated 3 others 

and refitted 34 existing stores (see page 10).

Progress
•  Restructured distribution centre management team 
and strengthened merchandise planning function.

•  Continued to improve the store experience for customers by 
enhancing layouts, optimising the space utilisation across 
categories, and introducing clearer navigation and signage, 
supported by the evolved brand.

Priorities for FY24
• 

Increase in-store sales densities.

•  Continue improving the existing estate with refits and relocations. 

•  Embed new labour structure.

• 

• 

Implemented new stock allocation system (see page 20).

Introduced new automated packing machine and robotics in 
third-party operated online fulfilment operation (see page 10). 

•  Launched the pilot of  our new EPOS software in stores. 

•  Launched a planned review of business operating model 

(see page 10).

Priorities for FY24
•  Begin implementation of changes to processes and IT systems 

identified by business operating model review. 

Link to KPIs

Link to risks

Link to KPIs

Link to risks

A

B

C

1

2

7

10

11

C

D

E

1

2

7

10

11

  Our KPIs are set out on page 18

  Our principal risks are set out on pages 49 to 53

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

17

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportHow we measure performance

We use five KPIs to monitor  
performance and strategic progress

These KPIs, together with our performance against them, are detailed below. All of the non-GAAP 
financial measures detailed can be calculated from the GAAP measures included in the financial 
statements, as outlined in the notes to the financial statements. Commentary on these KPIs is 
included in the Financial review.

A  Revenue growth 

B  Like-for-like sales growth

C  Adjusted profit before tax 

+5.8%

FY23

FY22

FY21

+4.2%

£10.1m

£280.1m

FY23

+4.2%

FY23

£10.1m

£264.6m

FY22

FY21

£180.7m

 +10.5%

FY22

£16.5m

Stores +6.0%

 Online +120.9%

FY21

£3.4m

Definition
The FY23 like-for-like (LFL) sales increase has 
been calculated with reference to the FY22 
comparative sales figures. In FY22, two-year 
comparatives were used because the use of a 
normal one-year LFL comparative was prevented 
by the various disruptions to store trading 
brought about by COVID-19 restrictions in the 
FY21 comparative period.  LFL sales are defined 
by the Group as the year-on-year growth in 
gross sales from stores which have been trading 
for a full financial year prior to the current year 
and have been trading throughout the current 
financial period being reported on, and from the 
Company’s online store, calculated on a calendar 
week basis.

Definition
The percentage year-on-year change in Group 
total sales which excludes VAT and is stated 
after deducting the cost of loyalty points. A 
reconciliation between total sales and statutory 
revenue is included on page 21.

D  Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA 

£9.0m

FY23

FY22

FY21

£4.3m

£9.0m

£16.6m

Definition
Represents profit for the period before IFRS 16, 
net finance costs, taxation, depreciation and 
amortisation, loss on disposals of property, 
plant and equipment and Adjusting items. 

Definition
Represents profit for the period before taxation 
and adjusting items. Adjusting items are gains 
or losses incurred in a period which are not 
expected to be recurring (Adjusting items).

Restatement of prior years

FY22 and FY21 figures are restated. Information 
regarding the restatements is included in note 14 
of the financial statements.

E  Adjusted diluted earnings per share

16.4p

FY23

FY22

FY21

4.1p

16.4p

25.6p

Definition
Calculated by dividing the adjusted profit for the 
period attributable to ordinary shareholders by 
the weighted average number of ordinary shares 
in issue during the period (including dilutive share 
options). Adjusted profit is before the impact of 
Adjusting items. 

Restatement of prior years
FY22 and FY21 figures are restated. Information 
regarding the restatements is included in note 14 
of the financial statements.

18

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Financial review

A resilient performance

The Pre IFRS16 Adjusted EBITDA for the Period was £9.0m (FY22: £16.6m). 
The FY23 Adjusted PBT is greater than the EBITDA because of the 
effect of IFRS 16. We would normally expect the Adjusted PBT to 
be less than the EBITDA. Please refer to note 5 of the financial 
statements for further information.

The FY23 results have been published later than originally intended. 
The delay was due to significant additional work being undertaken, 
principally in relation to asset impairment charges and related 
impacts on IFRS 16 calculations. As well as affecting the FY23 result, 
this also entailed the restatement of comparative figures for prior 
periods. Whilst the delay has been frustrating, we highlight that 
the issues in question have not affected the Board’s assessment 
of the underlying performance of the business (for example, 
as represented by the EBITDA) and had no direct cash impact. 
Information regarding the restatements is included in note 14 of the 
financial statements.

Overview
The result for FY23 was in line with the revised forecast we referred 
to in August 2022. During the Period:

•  Revenue increased by £15.5m, driven by 7.5% growth in store LFL 
sales and sales from new stores exceeding sales forgone from 
closed stores (through optimisation of the store estate). Online 
sales declined by 15%.

•  The product gross margin percentage declined due to the 
planned increase in the mix of sales of lower margin books, 
and increased costs of stock, principally freight. These negative 
effects were partly offset by supplier rebates which were 
collected (£0.6m of which related to periods prior to FY23).

•  Costs increased due to:

•  The cessation of COVID-19 business rates relief.

•  The increase in the National Living Wage by 6.6% in April 2022. 

•  Electricity price inflation. 

•  There was a net increase in EBITDA of approximately £0.6m due 
to the opening and closure of stores during the year. Although 
the number of stores trading had only increased by one at the 
year end, we benefitted from being able to time the openings 
and closures such that we had a net six more stores trading 
during the peak Christmas period. In addition, the average sales 
levels from the new stores were greater than for the stores which 
were closed.

•  The Group experienced a cyber security incident in March 2022. 

We believe the residual effects of this adversely affected 
FY23’s result due to the Group taking a measured and cautious 
approach to reinstating systems whilst simultaneously accelerating 
the implementation of strengthened IT security. Due to the 
impossibility of accurately estimating the financial effect, it 
has been absorbed within the EBITDA result and not identified 
separately as an Adjusting item.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

19

The FY23 accounting Period relates to the 52 weeks ended 30 April 
2023 (also referred to as the period) and the comparative FY22 
accounting period relates to the 52 weeks ended 1 May 2022.

The Group refers to alternative performance measures (APMs) as it 
believes these provide management and other stakeholders with 
additional information which may be helpful. These measures are 
routinely used by management in running the business, and include 
pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA (EBITDA) and like-for-like (LFL) sales. 
Accordingly, reference is made to these measures in this report. 

The Group made a profit before tax of £5.0m (restated FY22: 
£14.2m). This result includes a £5.1m impairment charge, most of 
which relates to the notional right of use asset created as a result 
of following the requirements of the IFRS 16 accounting standard. 
As in previous periods, impairments have been treated as Adjusting 
items. The Adjusted profit before tax excluding impairment charges 
was £10.1m (restated FY22: £16.5m).

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportFinancial review continued

Overview continued
EBITDA bridge between FY22 and FY23
FY22 EBITDA

LFL stores and online

Increased gross margin due to increase in sales in 
LFL stores/decline online

Lower gross product margin % (including impact of 
higher freight costs) 

Cessation of COVID-19 business rates relief (LFL 
stores)

Increased payroll costs due to National Living Wage 
inflation 

Energy price inflation 

Other 

Non – LFL Stores

Profit impact; including, timing benefit of trading 
more stores through peak

Cessation of COVID-19 business rates relief

FY23 EBITDA

£m

16.6 

 5.9 

 (4.5)

 (5.6)

 (2.5)

 (1.0)

(0.3)

(8.0)

0.6

 (0.2)

9.0 

Driving operational 
improvements

Improving our stock allocation process
In September 2022 we introduced a new forecasting and 
stock allocation system to improve our stock turn and ensure 
that we offer customers the best product availability. By 
analysing individual product and store sale combinations the 
system enables us to forecast effectively to ensure we make 
the right stock available to the right store locations. 

The new system is already having a positive impact and 
has enabled us to increase in store availability of our 
core products.

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

20

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

We noted in the FY22 Annual Report that the net cash balance on 
1 May 2022 was higher than normal as it included the benefit of 
increased creditor balances. These mostly related to the continuing 
effect of events connected with COVID-19 (such as rent deferrals) 
and, as expected, unwound finally during FY23. Therefore, although 
the FY23 net cash balance of £10.2m is lower than the prior year’s 
£16.3m, it represents a more typical Period-end level, and has 
grown progressively compared with the £0.8m net cash balance at 
the end of FY21 and £7.1m of net debt at the end of FY20.

It has been reassuring, particularly during the periods of heightened 
uncertainty in recent years, to have the benefit of a large (£30.0m 
at the Period end) revolving credit bank facility, however, there is 
a cost associated with maintaining such a facility. Our forecasts 
indicate that even under a sensitised downside scenario, it is 
unlikely that we would ever use the entire facility. With this in mind, 
we have recently reduced the size of the facility to £20.0m, which 
will save approximately £0.15m in annual facility maintenance 
fees and, at the same time, extended the term of the facility 
so that it terminates at the end of November 2026 rather than 
November 2025. 

The Board’ will be recommending to shareholders at the AGM a 
final dividend of 1.6 pence per share in respect of FY23. Updated 
information regarding the Group’s policy on dividends and capital 
distributions is included at the end of this report.

Due to rounding, numbers presented throughout this document 
may not add up precisely to the totals provided and percentages 
may not precisely reflect the absolute figures.

Revenue analysis
Total revenue increased by 5.8% to £280.1 million (FY22: £264.6 million). 

Total gross sales (1) increased by 6.1% compared to FY22. Two thirds 
of the total sales increase was from LFL sales (2) which grew by 
4.2%, with positive growth in stores but a decline in online sales. The 
remaining sales growth was from the continued optimisation of the 
store estate (see table and narrative on the following page).

The quarterly LFL sales summary in the table below and the 
narrative which follows shows how store LFLs strengthened 
progressively during FY23 but that we were unable to achieve 
positive sales growth online, due to a combination of internal 
and external factors.

LFL sales growth

Q1

Q2

H1

Q3

Q4

H2

Full year

Stores

1.6%

5.1%

3.6%

9.9%

12.0%

10.7%

7.5%

Online

(28.6%)

(8.9%)

(16.9%)

(14.2%)

(11.7%)

(13.5%)

(15.0%)

Total

(2.4%)

3.0%

0.6%

5.9%

9.4%

7.1%

4.2%

Definitions of gross sales and LFL are included on the following page.

Q1 highlights
•  Sales in Q1 FY23 were constrained, particularly online, a 

significant cause of which was the residual impact of the 
March 2022 cyber security incident.

•  We also annualised against strong FY22 comparatives, which 

were the result of pent up demand following the end of the final 
COVID-19 lockdown in April 2021. The strong demand in early FY22 
was also driven by a larger than usual post lockdown sale, which 
included stock that would normally have been sold in January/
February 2021, and strong sales of ‘fidget frenzy’ toys. 

Q2 highlights
•  The Works had a good summer 2022. The newly refreshed 

outdoor play range performed well and the ‘Back to School’ 
season sales were very good. 

•  The LFL sales growth rate softened slightly in the latter part of Q2 
due to losing a full trading day for the additional bank holiday in 
late September, as well as the comparatives in September and 
October 2021 being strong, when we believe Christmas shopping 
was brought forward due to consumers’ concern about possible 
further lockdowns affecting Christmas shopping in 2021. 

Q3 highlights
• 

In contrast, Q3 comparatives with the prior year weakened 
due to concerns in late 2021 about the potential effects of the 
emerging Omicron COVID-19 variant, supply chain disruption 
and the FY22 January sale being low key. 

•  Sales strengthened sharply just before Christmas, suggesting 

that consumers shopped much later than in 2021. We delivered 
strong store sales over Christmas, which continued in the 
January sale. 

•  Online sales were disappointing, impacted by reduced consumer 
confidence in fulfilment (due to postal strikes in late 2022) as well 
as the normalisation of shopping behaviour away from online, 
as seen across the retail industry.

Q4 highlights
•  Trading was steady following the January sale, with store sales 

continuing to grow positively, and online sales continuing to be in 
decline. The rate of overall sales growth increased slightly during 
this quarter as the prior year comparatives weakened due to the 
aftermath of the March 2022 cyber security incident. 

The table below shows the reconciliation of LFL sales used for  
year-on-year comparisons, with statutory revenue.

FY23
£m

FY22
£m

Variance
£m

Variance
%

297.0 

285.0 

12.0

4.2% 

year increase in sales, and due to the additional focus placed by 
the business on signing up new members and encouraging existing 
members to re-engage with the loyalty scheme. 

Store numbers

Stores at beginning of period

Opened in the period

Closed in the period

Relocated (excluded from opened/
closed above, NIL net effect on store 
numbers)

Stores at end of period

FY23

525

14

(13)

3

526

FY22

527

5

(7)

6

525

The number of stores trading increased by one during the period, 
from 525 to 526. Despite this small change between the beginning 
and end of year numbers, the additional sales from new/closed 
stores in the table above shows a notable increase compared 
with the prior year. This was principally because we benefitted 
from being able to time the openings and closures such that 
a net six more stores were trading during the peak Christmas 
period, and secondarily because the new stores individually also 
generated more sales than the stores that were closed. The new 
stores are trading with sales levels at or above their financial 
appraisal targets.

Product gross margin and gross profit
FY22
(Restated1)

FY23

% of
£m revenue

£m  revenue

% of Variance Variance
%
£m

280.1 

118.8 

264.6 

107.7 

15.5 

5.8 

11.1 

10.3

161.3 

57.6 

157.0 

59.3 

4.4 

(1.7)

Revenue

Less: cost of 
goods sold 

Product gross 
margin

Other costs 
included in 
statutory cost 
of sales

46.9% 

Store payroll

46.8 

16.7 

43.6 

16.5 

(3.3)

(7.5)

19.6 

316.6

(35.1)

13.4 

298.4 

(33.5)

6.3 

18.3

(1.7)

6.1% 

5.0% 

Store property 
and establishment 
costs

(1.4)

(0.3)

(1.1)

404.6% 

280.1

264.6 

15.5

5.8% 

(0.5%)

(11.1%)

(0.1%)

(11.2%)

Store PoS and 
transaction fees

Store 
depreciation

Online variable 
costs 

Adjusting items 
-impairment 
charges

51.8 

18.5 

43.7 

16.5 

(8.1)

(18.5)

2.3 

0.8 

2.1 

0.8 

(0.2)

(10.1)

3.7 

1.3 

3.4 

1.3 

(0.2) 

(6.7) 

18.4 

6.6 

18.7 

7.1 

0.3 

1.5 

Total LFL sales 
for Period2

Sales from new/
closed stores 
(optimisation of 
store estate)

Total gross sales1

VAT

Loyalty scheme costs 
- points redeemed by 
customers

Revenue (per 
statutory accounts)

Loyalty points as 
% sales

VAT as % of sales

1 

 ‘Total gross sales’ include VAT and are stated prior to deducting the 
cost of loyalty points which are adjusted out of the sales figure in the 
calculation of statutory revenue.

2   LFL sales growth has been calculated with reference to the FY22 
comparative sales figures. In FY22’s Annual Report, two-year 
comparatives were used because the use of a normal one-year LFL 
comparative was prevented by the various disruptions to store trading 
brought about by COVID-19 restrictions in the FY21 comparative period.

The year on year increase in the cost of loyalty points shown in the 
table above is larger than normal because the FY22 comparative 
was unusually low (as reported last year) due to the write back of 
expired points previously issued and accounted for. The underlying 
cost of loyalty points redeemed by customers during the year 
increased in the way we expected, both as a result of the year on 

IFRS 16 impact 

(10.7)

(3.8)

5.1

1.8

2.3

(9.6)

0.9

(3.6)

(2.8)

(100.0)

1.1

(11.2) 

Total non-product 
related cost of sales 117.4 

41.9 

104.2 

39.4 

(13.2)

(12.7)

Gross profit per 
financial 
statements

43.9

15.7

52.8 

19.9 

(8.9)

(16.8)

1  See note 14 to the financial statements.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

21

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
Financial review continued

Product gross margin and gross profit continued
The product gross margin rate decreased by 170bps to 57.6% 
(FY22: 59.3%) The most significant factors in the year on year 
movement were:

•  An increase in the sales mix of front-list, lower margin books 

(as has been described previously) which reduced the margin 
percentage by approximately 100bps. We believe this generated 
incremental cash margin due to selling higher volumes of items 
which were higher priced. 

•  Higher freight costs, which remained high on a spot basis during 

H1 before falling significantly in H2. The interval between incurring 
the freight cost and selling the goods is such that the higher 
rates continued to affect FY23’s margin for some time after 
the spot rates had fallen; this timing factor makes it difficult 
to estimate the precise impact on the margin rate, our best 
estimate of which is approximately 100bps.

•  There was a small year on year margin rate increase due to other 
factors including stock provision movements, supplier rebates/
retrospective discounts and pricing changes. Towards the end 
of FY23, prices of some lines were increased to reflect the rise in 
inflation generally experienced during the year, to ensure that 
the business achieves an acceptable balance between offering 
value to customers and a reasonable margin. 

Store payroll costs increased by £3.3m. 

•  The annual rise in the National Living Wage (NLW) accounted 
for £2.1m or 64% of the year-on-year increase, including the 
additional cost of maintaining sensible differentials between 
pay grades for colleagues paid more than the NLW, in light of the 
increased base wage level.

•  The optimisation of the store estate, entailing the opening of 14 
stores, the closure of 13, and the relocation of 3 stores, created 
an additional £0.7m of store payroll costs. This increase appears 
disproportionately high given that only one more store had been 
added by the year end; however, the timing of the openings and 
closures which benefitted the sales line (i.e. having more stores 
trading during the Christmas peak) also incurred corresponding 
additional costs.

Store property and establishment costs increased by £8.1m: 

•  The largest component of the increase was £5.8m of business 

rates charges. These costs had been comparatively lower in FY22 
due to COVID-19 relief, but payments resumed in full during FY23.

•  Electricity costs increased by £1.0m due to inflation. 

•  Despite a year-on-year reduction in like for like rents, total rent 

charges increased by £1.0m:

•  The ongoing process of renegotiating and renewing expiring 
leases resulted in a reduction of £0.6m in rents in the LFL store 
estate, including the release of accruals established in some 
situations where the effective date of the decrease was 
backdated to a prior period, due to the protracted nature of 
the rent negotiations (in these situations, we continue to accrue 
for the higher rent level until the reduction is confirmed in writing).

•  The timing of opening and closing stores referred to above, 

plus the full year cost of stores opened part way through FY22, 
resulted in additional rent costs of £0.7m (i.e. effectively a 
‘volume’ related increase).

•  During COVID-19 rent negotiations with landlords (for example, 
where we were seeking rent concessions in respect of enforced 
store closures), concessions were sometimes informally agreed 
via a credit note, to be formalised subsequently. A provision is 
maintained for credit notes relating to amounts that have not 
been recovered after two years (although we still pursue and 
expect to recover most of the amount provided for), and this 
provision increased by £0.5m during FY23.

22

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

•  Turnover rents increased by £0.4m due to sales increases in 

the 129 stores where the rent is based wholly or partially on a 
percentage of turnover. Turnover rent mechanisms typically look 
back to earlier periods to calculate the applicable rent and, in 
FY22, the look back periods often included periods during FY21 
when stores were closed due to COVID-19 restrictions and thus 
created a lower turnover. There have also been sales increases 
in some stores (overall store LFL sales growth was 4.2%) which 
have triggered the payment of, or increased, turnover rents.

•  Service charges increased by £0.3m due to the new/closed 
store timing effect described above and service charge 
inflation in the existing store estate.

Online variable costs decreased by £0.3m:

•  The decrease was due to the year-on-year decrease in sales 

and the consequential reduction in marketing, fulfilment, 
transaction and other variable costs which were £1.3m lower 
than in FY22. 

•  These savings were partially offset by higher costs at the iForce 
fulfilment facility (third party operated) and higher packaging 
costs. The efficiency of the operation has been reviewed with 
iForce, and changes have been implemented for FY24 which 
are expected to reduce the fulfilment cost per unit, including a 
reduction in the space allocated in the facility.

Adjusting items and prior year adjustment:

•  Adjusting items were £5.1m in FY23, (restated FY22 £2.3m), and 
comprised impairment charges. The prior period comparatives 
have been restated to reflect the allocation of central overheads 
to individual stores, which resulted in a higher impairment charge 
being required in respect of FY22 and prior periods. This is 
described in note 14 of the financial statements.

•  70% or £3.6m of the £5.1m FY23 impairment charge relates to the 
notional “right of use” asset which arises through the operation 
of IFRS 16.

•  Consistent with the approach the Group has taken previously, 

impairment charges (and reversals) are treated as Adjusting items. 
As well as being consistent, this is appropriate due to the size of the 
total impairment charge, which is more reflective of the broader 
UK macroeconomic environment impacting many retail businesses 
than of the underlying performance of individual stores.

IFRS 16 impact:

• 

IFRS 16 has had the effect of significantly increasing the Adjusted 
profit before tax in FY23, by £7.0m compared with the non IFRS 16 
figure (see note 5 of the financial statements). This £7.0m broadly 
comprises £10.7m included within cost of sales per the table 
above and £0.4m included within administrative costs, less £4.1m 
of IFRS 16 interest charges.

•  Due to the restatement of impairment charges in relation to 

prior periods there is a significantly greater IFRS 16 impact than 
reported in previous years, particularly on Adjusted profit. The 
additional impairment charges reduced the net book value of 
the IFRS 16 “right of use” asset, as a result of which, the IFRS 16 
depreciation charges were reduced. Meanwhile, the actual rents 
paid were unaffected, resulting in a greater disparity between 
the rents and the IFRS 16 P&L charges. Please refer to note 5 of 
the financial statements for a detailed analysis of the impact of 
IFRS 16 on the profit before tax.

Distribution costs to stores

FY23

FY22

% of
£m  revenue

£m  revenue

% of  Variance Variance
%
£m

 10.2 

 0.1 

3.6

—

 9.0 

 0.1 

3.4

—

(1.2)

(12.9)

—

3.1

10.3 

3.7 

9.1 

3.4 

(1.2)

(12.7)

Adjusted 
distribution costs

Depreciation

Distribution costs 
per statutory 
accounts

The costs of picking stock and delivering it to stores increased 
by £1.2m compared with FY22:

•  Distribution labour costs increased by £0.5m, due to wage 

rate inflation from the increase in the NLW,, and an increase 
in the volume of items picked. Approximately half of the cost 
increase was due to inflation, and the remainder to the increase 
in volumes. 

•  The costs of delivering pallets from the DC to stores increased by 
£0.4m. Higher volumes accounted for £0.15m with the remainder 
due to inflation passed on by the pallet delivery company to 
which we outsource this task.

•  Storage costs of £0.15m were incurred to accommodate 

additional stock prior to the Christmas sales peak. This was 
a precaution taken to mitigate against the risk of a repetition 
of the disruption experienced the prior year.

Administration costs
Administration costs (before depreciation and IFRS 16) decreased 
by £0.3m compared with FY22. The largest change was a 
£2.3m decrease in bonus costs, as no bonus will be paid in 
respect of FY23, 

Head office salary and related costs (NI, pension etc.) increased 
by £1.3m due to the planned growth in headcount as well as wage 
rate inflation. Average salary rates for head office staff (including 
management) increased by 3.0%, a significantly lower rate than 
the 6.6% increase in the National Living Wage. 

There was a net increase of £0.7m in other administration costs, 
due principally to IT software licence and maintenance costs, 
higher audit fees and stock taking costs.

FY23

FY22

% of
£m  revenue

£m  revenue

% of  Variance Variance
%
£m

Pre-IFRS 16, 
Adjusted 
administration 
costs 

Depreciation

 22.9 

 1.8 

 8.2 

 0.6 

IFRS 16 impact 

 (0.4)

 (0.2)

 23.2 

 1.3 

 (0.4)

 8.8 

 0.5 

 0.3

1.4

 (0.5) 

 (34.7) 

 (0.1)

 0.1

 13.8 

Administration 
costs per 
statutory 
accounts

24.2

8.6 

24.1 

9.1 

(0.1)

(0.3)

Net financing expense 
Net financing costs in the period were £4.4m (FY22: £5.2m), mostly 
relating to IFRS 16 notional interest. 

Gross cash interest payable was £0.3m, in relation to facility 
availability charges (FY22: £0.4m). £0.2m of interest was received 
in FY23 (FY22: £Nil).

Bank interest receivable

Bank interest payable 
(including non-utilisation costs)

Other interest payable 
(amortisation of facility set-up costs)

IFRS 16 notional interest on 
lease liabilities

Net financing expense

Tax

Current tax (credit)/expense

Deferred tax expense/ (credit)

Total tax expense

FY23
£m

(0.2)

0.3 

0.2 

4.1 

4.4 

FY23
£m

(0.4)

0.1

(0.3)

FY22
£m

—

0.4 

0.3 

4.5 

5.2 

FY22

(Restated 1)

£m

1.3 

(1.0)

0.3 

1  See note 14 to the financial statements.

The impairment charges noted above, by reducing the taxable 
profits of prior periods, created available brought forward tax 
losses, which significantly reduced the effective tax rate and 
overall tax charge for FY23. As a result, there was a net tax credit of 
£0.3m (restated FY22: £0.3m expense) consisting of a £0.4m current 
tax credit and a £0.1m deferred tax charge. The £0.3m overall tax 
credit equated to an effective tax rate of (5.3%) (restated FY22: 1.9%). 

The average headline corporation tax rate for FY23 was 19.5%, as 
the rate changed from 19% to 25% 11 months into the financial year 
(FY22: 19.0%). 

Deferred tax has been calculated at a rate of 25.0% in both periods.

Earnings per share 
The Adjusted basic EPS for the year was 16.5 pence (restated 
FY22: 26.0 pence). 

The Adjusted diluted EPS was 16.4 pence (restated 
FY22: 25.6 pence).

The difference between the Adjusted basic and Adjusted diluted 
EPS figures is due to the exclusion from the diluted EPS calculation 
of outstanding potentially dilutive share options. 

Capital expenditure

New stores and 
relocations (net of landlord 
contributions to 
investment)

Store refits, maintenance 
and lease renewal costs

IT hardware and software

Other

Total capital expenditure 

FY23
£m

FY22
£m

Variance
£m

 1.1 

 0.5 

 (0.6)

3.0 

2.4

0.2 

6.7 

0.9 

1.4 

0.2 

3.0 

(2.1) 

(1.0) 

— 

(3.7)

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

23

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
Financial review continued

Capital expenditure continued
Capital expenditure in the Period was £6.7m (FY22: £3.0m): 

•  New stores and relocations – the net investment in new stores 
and relocations increased by £0.6m compared with FY22. 14 
new stores were opened and 3 stores relocated to new units 
(FY22: 5 new stores, 6 relocations). In FY23, approximately 50% of 
the capital costs of opening the stores was funded by landlord 
contributions, a lower proportion than in FY22 when most of the 
investment was landlord funded. 

•  Store refits, maintenance and lease renewal costs – 34 stores 
were refitted in FY23 at a cost of £1.4m (FY22: 16 refits costing 
£0.4m). Maintenance capex was £1.2m (FY22: £0.4m) and lease 
renewal costs were £0.4m (FY22: £0.2m). 

•  IT hardware and software – the largest item of expenditure was 
the cost of configuring and testing the new store EPOS software 
prior to its implementation in stores during FY24.

FY24 capex is expected to be approximately £7.0m.

Inventory
Stock levels were £33.4m at the end of FY23 (FY22: 29.4m). 

Provisions as % 
of gross stock

FY23
£m

31.3

FY22
£m

29.8 

Variance Variance
%

£m

FY23
%

FY22
%

(1.5)

(5.0)

(0.4)

(1.9)

(1.5)

(78.9)

1.3

6.4 

Gross stock

Unrecognised 
shrinkage 
provision

Obsolescence 
provision

Total provisions

(0.6)

(1.0)

(1.3)

(3.3)

26.6 

2.8 

(0.7)

(2.3)

(3.7)

(0.4)

(53.8)

(69.7)

(13.5)

(14.3)

1.9

3.2

4.4 

10.7 

Net stock on hand 30.2

Stock in transit

3.2

Stock per 
balance sheet

33.4

29.4 

(4.1)

(13.6)

Gross stock, £31.3m, increased by 5% compared with FY22. This is a 
lower percentage increase than the corresponding year-on-year 
increase in the cost of sales (10%) and it is due to an increase in the 
average cost per unit of stock (due to mix as well as an increase 
in overall cost prices), as the number of units in stock at the Period 
end declined year on year. 

Stock provisions decreased significantly, due to both volume 
and rate effects. 

•  The provision for unrecognised shrinkage decreased due to 

the introduction of full ‘4-wall’ stock counts in all stores between 
Christmas and the year end. As a result, the time elapsed 
between the date of the most recent store stock count and 
the year end, which is one of the key variables affecting the 
calculation, was significantly less than in the prior year, resulting 
in a lower provision. The other key variable, the underlying 
weekly rate of store stock loss, was not materially different 
to the rate in FY22. 

•  There was a further reduction in the stock obsolescence provision 
(it was £1.8m at the end of FY21), due to continued improvements 
in the management of terminal and slow moving stocks.

24

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Cash flow
The table shows a summarised non-IFRS 16 presentation cash flow; 
The net cash outflow for the year was £6.1m (FY22: inflow of £15.5m). 

Cash flow pre-working 
capital movements

Net movement in 
working capital

Net cash from investing 
activities

Tax paid

Interest and 
financing costs

Dividends

Purchase of 
treasury shares

Cash flow before 
loan movements

Repayment of 
bank borrowings

Drawdown of 
bank borrowings

Exchange rate 
movements

Net increase in cash 
and cash equivalents

Opening net cash 
balance excluding 
IAS 17 leases

Closing net cash balance 
excluding IAS 17 leases

FY23
£m

6.7

(2.8) 

(6.5) 

(1.5) 

(0.7) 

(1.5) 

(0.5) 

(6.7) 

 (4.0) 

4.0 

0.6 

(6.1)

16.3

10.2

FY22
£m

Variance
£m

19.1 

(12.4)

7.3 

(2.9) 

(0.2) 

(0.2) 

— 

—

23.1 

(7.5)

—

(0.1) 

(10.1) 

(3.6) 

(1.3) 

(0.5) 

 (1.5) 

 (0.5)

(29.8) 

3.5

4.0

0.7 

15.5 

(21.6) 

0.8 

16.3 

As noted at the end of FY22, the cash balance at that time 
included favourable working capital timing differences which have 
unwound in FY23 and resulted in a negative movement in working 
capital during the Period. In most years, there would be expected 
to be a broadly neutral or slightly positive movement in working 
capital. The other main year-on-year variable which affected the 
cash flow was the reduction in profit level compared with FY22. 

Bank facilities and financial position
The Group ended the Period in a strong financial position, with net 
positive bank balances of £10.2m (FY22: £16.3m). At the Period end 
the Group had liquidity availability of £40.0m, including its undrawn 
£30.0m bank facility. 

Since the Period end, the Group has implemented a reduction 
in the size of the facility, which was undrawn throughout most of 
FY23, to £20.0m, and simultaneously extended its term such that 
it now expires on 30 November 2026 rather than 30 November 
2025. The reduction in the facility will save approximately £0.15m 
in annual cash interest costs, and the smaller facility continues to 
provide liquidity availability significantly in excess of the actual 
anticipated requirement.

 
Indicative outlook for FY24 dividend
As previously noted, the Company compiled estimate of the 
market’s forecast for FY24 is an EBITDA of approximately £10.0m. If 
the actual result for FY24 transpires to be in line with this forecast, 
it is anticipated that the total dividend for FY24 would grow 
approximately in proportion with the EBITDA. Assuming that the 
effects of non-cash accounting variables such as IFRS 16, and tax, 
are more neutral in FY24, we would expect that the resulting cover 
from this approach would be more in line with the 2.5x objective 
outlined above.

Other forms of distribution 
It is anticipated that distributions will be made solely via ordinary 
dividends for the foreseeable future.

In the event that performance improves at a faster rate than 
anticipated, and that this is sustained, or that for some other 
reason the Group accumulates cash reserves which it deems 
surplus to requirements for operation and investment purposes, 
and for which it can envisage no requirement to maintain on 
the balance sheet, other forms of distribution will be considered, 
such as share buy backs. 

Decisions as to the quantum and frequency of such 
alternative distributions would be made at the time, in light of 
the specific circumstances. 

Share buybacks for the purposes of share schemes 
To avoid dilution of existing shareholder interests, the Board’s 
intention is for the Group to purchase shares in the market for 
re-issue under employee share schemes.

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer
30 August 2023

Basis of preparation of the financial statements
The Directors believe that it is appropriate to prepare the financial 
statements on a going concern basis. We note for completeness 
that, despite the Directors’ confidence in the Group’s financial 
position and prospects, note 1 (b) of the financial statements 
includes reference to a “material uncertainty“ in relation to the 
adoption of the going concern basis of preparation of the financial 
statements. The reasons for this are explained in the note. 

Capital distributions and FY23 final 
dividend recommendation
Following a strong performance in FY22, the Group paid a 
final dividend of 2.4 pence per share in respect of that year, 
in November 2022. The FY22 Annual Report stated that future 
payment levels will be reviewed based on conditions at the time, 
with the Group confirming its intention to resume a progressive 
dividend policy in due course once conditions stabilise.

The business has an ongoing capex requirement (including 
discretionary capex) approximately in line with its non-IFRS 16 
depreciation charge and generates strong cash flows. However, 
in setting the capital distribution policy, the Board is mindful of the 
principal risks that the Group faces, as outlined within this Annual 
Report. At present, two of these risks, in relation to macroeconomic 
conditions and the execution of the Group’s strategy, are at 
increased levels. In these circumstances, we will operate with a 
capital structure and capital distribution approach that ensures 
the business remains financially resilient, whilst making appropriate 
returns to shareholders.

Our objective is to ensure that, under normal circumstances, 
ordinary dividends (in pence per share) are 2.5x covered by 
Adjusted EPS. We do not believe that normal circumstances apply 
in the context of setting the FY23 dividend, as outlined below.

FY23 dividend
As noted previously in the report, the Board hopes that FY23’s 
EBITDA was a low point and that it will increase progressively in 
future. During the period in which the business works to rebuild 
its levels of profit, a compromise is sought, between maintaining 
a reasonable dividend for shareholders, whilst ensuring that the 
Group continues to maintain its cash reserves. 

We believe that in FY23, the effects of:

• 

 impairment charges (including the effect of prior year 
adjustments on earlier periods);

• 

IFRS 16; and

•  an unusually low tax charge, 

have resulted in an Adjusted EPS which is inconsistent with our 
perception of the underlying profitability as represented by the 
Adjusted pre IFRS 16 EBITDA. Using EBITDA as an alternative 
reference point for illustration, if the FY23 dividend was set by pro 
rating using the ratio of the FY23 EBITDA (£9.0m) to the FY22 EBITDA 
(£16.6m), it would be 1.3 pence per share. 

Taking into account the foregoing and, in seeking to achieve a 
reasonable compromise between returns to shareholders and 
prudence, the Board will propose at the forthcoming AGM a final 
dividend for FY23 of 1.6 pence per share (amounting to a £1.0m 
total payment).

Although this is a smaller dividend than was paid in relation to 
FY22, we believe that it is in keeping with FY23’s performance (for 
example, the EBITDA did not meet the threshold for payment of 
executive bonuses). However, it does not reflect a reduction in the 
Board’s belief in the future prospects of the business, in which it 
remains confident. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

25

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportOur stakeholders

To succeed it is essential 
that we engage with 
our stakeholders

Our stakeholders and how 
we engage with them are 
detailed on this and the 
adjacent page. To succeed 
it is essential that we 
understand what matters 
to them and consider this 
information as part of our 
decision-making process.

Our Section 172 Companies 
Act statement is set out 
over the page.

Our people
Enable us to fulfil our purpose 
and deliver our strategy.

What matters to them

Our customers
Buy our products.

Our suppliers

Support our sourcing and 

distribution activities.

Communities 

Shareholders

Impacted by our activities.

Seek returns on their investment.

•  Safe, healthy and good working environment.

•  Wide variety of great products.

•  Long-term relationships.

•  Employment opportunities.

•  Competent execution of strategy.

•  Fair rewards.

•  Enjoyable work.

•  Good value and quality.

•  Customer experience.

•  Being part of a company that has a clear 

•  Reliable and convenient service.

purpose and values that resonate.

•  Engagement and support.

•  Development opportunities.

Group-wide engagement

• 

Interaction through various channels 
including the recently launched MyWorks 
communications and engagement platform 
(see page 32) and regular briefings.

•  Annual engagement survey to give us an 
independent view of what we are doing 
well and where we can improve.

•  Local-level engagement including team 

meetings, video calls and briefings.

Board-level engagement

•  Active social media engagement.

• 

‘Together’ loyalty programme.

•  Customer surveys.

•  Day-to-day interactions between 
customers and store colleagues.

•  Regular commercial dialogue.

• 

‘Giving Something Back’ programme 

•  Easily accessible investor information, 

• 

In-person meetings with suppliers, 

(see page 35).

factory visits and attendance at 

•  Local community initiatives (see page 35).

including announcements, results 

and presentations, is available on 

the Company’s website.

trade fairs. 

•  Our quality assurance team works 

closely with suppliers to ensure product 

safety and quality control. 

•  Fair treatment.

•  Positive social impact.

•  Good governance.

•  Payment in accordance with 

•  Sustainable operations.

•  Sustainable and growing returns.

contractual terms.

•  Responsible business practices.

•  Regular clear and understandable 

communications and transparency.

•  ESG performance.

•  Regular Director store visits and meetings with 
senior management and store colleagues.

•  Regular Director store visits including 
direct engagement with customers.

•  Commercial Director, Retail Director 
and Head of Brand regularly provide 
customer feedback to the Board.

•  Presentation to the Board by the People 

Director covering people and talent strategy 
and its linkage to the Group’s purpose, culture 
and strategy.

•  People Director regularly provides updates 

at Board, and Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee meetings.

Outcomes

•  Awarded two-star rating (with three stars 
being the highest rating) in the 2022 Best 
Companies survey for outstanding levels 
of engagement and ranked 12th Best Big 
Company to Work for (see pages 32 and 33).

•  Monitor emerging trends and 

create products that customers 
want and need.

•  Continued growth in LFL sales.

• 

Increased loyalty membership.

•  Commercial Director provides regular 

•  Board oversees development of ESG 

•  Annual General Meeting.

updates to the Board on supplier 

strategy and monitors progress.

•  The Chair and Committee Chairs are 

matters and relationships. 

•  ESG steering group regularly updates 

available to shareholders to discuss specific 

•  The Board and Audit Committee review 

the Board on relevant ESG matters.

matters as they arise.

the Group’s payment practices.

•  Board in-depth review of the Group’s 

•  CEO and CFO participate in meetings 

• 

In October 2022 the Board visited 

community engagement activities.

and calls with investors and analysts 

and provide regular Board updates 

following such engagement.

our ecommerce logistics supplier 

(see page 59).

•  Board review of payment practices 

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given growing 

•  Dividend payment, subject to 

ensures that suppliers are treated fairly.

importance to stakeholders (see pages 

shareholder approval, and progressive 

•  Promote fair and ethical business 

practices through supply chain 

management (see page 35).

29 to 35).

dividend policy.

•  £172k raised in partnership with Cancer 

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given 

Research UK during FY23 (see page 35).

growing importance to stakeholders.

•  Many long-term supplier relationships.

•  £94k raised in partnership with Mind, SAMH 

• 

Increasing collaboration with key publishers.

and Inspire during FY23 (see page 35).

26

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

 Read more on pages 32 and 33

 Read more on page 9

 Read more on page 5

 Read more on page 35

 Read more on page 3

Our people

Enable us to fulfil our purpose 

and deliver our strategy.

What matters to them

Our customers

Buy our products.

•  Fair rewards.

•  Enjoyable work.

•  Good value and quality.

•  Customer experience.

•  Being part of a company that has a clear 

•  Reliable and convenient service.

purpose and values that resonate.

•  Engagement and support.

•  Development opportunities.

Group-wide engagement

including the recently launched MyWorks 

communications and engagement platform 

(see page 32) and regular briefings.

•  Annual engagement survey to give us an 

independent view of what we are doing 

well and where we can improve.

•  Local-level engagement including team 

meetings, video calls and briefings.

Board-level engagement

• 

Interaction through various channels 

•  Active social media engagement.

• 

‘Together’ loyalty programme.

•  Customer surveys.

•  Day-to-day interactions between 

customers and store colleagues.

•  Regular Director store visits and meetings with 

•  Regular Director store visits including 

senior management and store colleagues.

direct engagement with customers.

•  Presentation to the Board by the People 

•  Commercial Director, Retail Director 

Director covering people and talent strategy 

and Head of Brand regularly provide 

and its linkage to the Group’s purpose, culture 

customer feedback to the Board.

and strategy.

•  People Director regularly provides updates 

at Board, and Nomination and Remuneration 

Committee meetings.

Outcomes

•  Awarded two-star rating (with three stars 

•  Monitor emerging trends and 

being the highest rating) in the 2022 Best 

create products that customers 

Companies survey for outstanding levels 

want and need.

of engagement and ranked 12th Best Big 

Company to Work for (see pages 32 and 33).

•  Continued growth in LFL sales.

• 

Increased loyalty membership.

•  Safe, healthy and good working environment.

•  Wide variety of great products.

•  Long-term relationships.

•  Employment opportunities.

•  Competent execution of strategy.

Our suppliers
Support our sourcing and 
distribution activities.

Communities 
Impacted by our activities.

Shareholders
Seek returns on their investment.

•  Fair treatment.

•  Positive social impact.

•  Good governance.

•  Payment in accordance with 

•  Sustainable operations.

•  Sustainable and growing returns.

contractual terms.

•  Responsible business practices.

•  Regular clear and understandable 
communications and transparency.

•  ESG performance.

•  Regular commercial dialogue.

• 

In-person meetings with suppliers, 
factory visits and attendance at 
trade fairs. 

•  Our quality assurance team works 

closely with suppliers to ensure product 
safety and quality control. 

• 

‘Giving Something Back’ programme 
(see page 35).

•  Local community initiatives (see page 35).

•  Easily accessible investor information, 
including announcements, results 
and presentations, is available on 
the Company’s website.

•  Commercial Director provides regular 

•  Board oversees development of ESG 

•  Annual General Meeting.

updates to the Board on supplier 
matters and relationships. 

•  The Board and Audit Committee review 

the Group’s payment practices.

• 

In October 2022 the Board visited 
our ecommerce logistics supplier 
(see page 59).

strategy and monitors progress.

•  The Chair and Committee Chairs are 

•  ESG steering group regularly updates 
the Board on relevant ESG matters.

available to shareholders to discuss specific 
matters as they arise.

•  Board in-depth review of the Group’s 
community engagement activities.

•  CEO and CFO participate in meetings 
and calls with investors and analysts 
and provide regular Board updates 
following such engagement.

•  Board review of payment practices 

ensures that suppliers are treated fairly.

•  Promote fair and ethical business 
practices through supply chain 
management (see page 35).

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given growing 
importance to stakeholders (see pages 
29 to 35).

•  Dividend payment, subject to 

shareholder approval, and progressive 
dividend policy.

•  £172k raised in partnership with Cancer 
Research UK during FY23 (see page 35).

•  Strengthening ESG strategy given 

growing importance to stakeholders.

•  Many long-term supplier relationships.

•  £94k raised in partnership with Mind, SAMH 

• 

Increasing collaboration with key publishers.

and Inspire during FY23 (see page 35).

 Read more on pages 32 and 33

 Read more on page 9

 Read more on page 5

 Read more on page 35

 Read more on page 3

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

27

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportSection 172 statement

Promoting the Company’s 
long-term success

This disclosure forms the Directors’ statement under Section 414CZA 
of the Companies Act 2006. 

The Directors have had regard to the matters set out in 
Section 172(1) (a) to (f) of the Companies Act 2006 in their 
decision-making processes.

Both individually and collectively, the Directors believe that they 
have acted in the way they consider, in good faith, would be most 
likely to promote the success of the Company for the benefit of 
its members as a whole (having regard to the stakeholders and 
matters set out in Section 172(1)(a) to (f) of the Companies Act 2006) 
in all decisions taken by the Board during the 52-week period 
ended 30 April 2023 (FY23).

Under Section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006, a director of a 
company must act in the way he or she considers, in good faith, 
would be most likely to promote the success of the Company 
for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so have 
regard (amongst other matters) to:

•  The likely consequence of any decision in the long term.

•  The interests of the Company’s employees.

•  The need to foster the Company’s business relationships 

with suppliers, customers and others.

•  The impact of the Company’s operations on the community 

and the environment.

•  The desirability of the Company maintaining a reputation 

for high standards of business conduct.

•  The need to act fairly as between members of the Company.

Approval of carbon  
net-zero targets

In April 2023 the Board approved the carbon reduction targets 
detailed on page 46. 

As part of the approval process the Board considered the 
Group’s role and the responsibility it has to contribute to 
a sustainable economy, which in the long term will benefit 
all stakeholders including employees, customers and the 
communities within which it operates. The Board also took 
into account shareholders’ increasing focus on ESG matters 
when making investment decisions and growing demand 
from customers to engage with businesses that operate in 
a responsible way. 

The Board noted that achievement of the Scope 3 target 
was dependent on the Group’s supply chain and suppliers’ 
participation in a sustainability assessment process. While 
recognising that this process may not be welcomed by all 
suppliers, the Board considered that it was in the best  
long-term interests of the Group’s other stakeholders and 
that the environmental benefits outweighed any short-term 
commercial inconvenience.

28

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

ESG review

Creating a sustainable economy and transitioning to 
net zero is the challenge of our times. The responsibility 
rests collectively with governments, businesses and the 
general public. As a retail business we recognise our role 
in this effort, as well as our responsibility to be socially 
conscious and maintain high standards of governance.

We are committed to ‘Doing Business Better’. We are making 
positive and sustainable changes for our people, our communities 
and our planet that will enable us to continue inspiring reading, 
learning, creativity and play – for generations to come.

Our approach
We are continuing to evolve our overall ESG strategy which is 
focused on the areas outlined in the graphic below. 

In 2021 we launched our ESG steering group. Its role is to ensure 
we operate responsibly in line with our purpose and values, and 
to monitor our ESG agenda. It is chaired by our CEO, includes 
members of our Operations Board, and meets on a quarterly basis. 
The ESG steering group and Operations Board provide regular 
updates to the Board on the development and implementation 
of the Group’s sustainability strategy. 

In 2023 we hired a full-time Sustainability Manager and launched 
our ESG ‘action groups’ - cross-functional groups dedicated to the 
implementation and monitoring of work across our ESG strategy. 

In evolving our ESG strategy we are building on well-established 
and effective processes that underpin our social and governance 
responsibilities and obligations. As required we engage specialist 
third-party consultants to support our work in these key areas. 

In relation to the development of our environmental strategy, 
including building roadmaps and setting targets to achieve 
net zero, and to ensure we adhere to all relevant reporting 
requirements including TCFD and SECR (see pages 36 to 48), we are 
continuing to work with a specialist third-party ESG consultancy.

Our ESG pillars

Environment

Social

Governance

• Carbon emissions

• Our people

• Operating responsibly

• Products and packaging

• Health, safety and wellbeing

• Supply chain management

• Waste and recycling

• Diversity and inclusion

• Giving something back

  Read more on pages 30 to 31

  Read more on pages 32 to 34

  Read more on page 35

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

29

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportESG review continued

Environment

Reducing our 
environmental impact

We care about our impact on the planet and we are committed to 
reducing our carbon footprint, minimising waste, and sourcing more 
environmentally friendly materials and products where possible.

Our targets and ambitions
During the year we set the carbon emission reduction targets 
detailed below. Our Scope 1 and Scope 2 targets, together with our 
Scope 3 ambition, align with the British Retail Consortium’s climate 
action roadmap. In developing these targets we completed our 
first Scope 1, 2 and 3 carbon balance sheet using predominantly a 
spend-based approach. Over the next few years we will focus on 
moving towards a supplier-based approach.

Carbon net-zero targets1

Scope 1 – 
Net zero by
2035

Scope 2 – 
Net zero by 
2030

Scope 3 – 
Net zero by
20452

1 

 We aspire to achieve our net-zero targets through a 90% absolute 
reduction in our emissions and by offsetting the remaining 10%. Our 
targets have been established using a market-based methodology and 
our FY22 carbon emissions performance is the baseline against which we 
will measure our absolute reductions.

2   With an ambition to achieve net zero by 2040. 

Longer-term ambitions
•  Minimise our packaging, increase the use 

of recycled materials in our packaging and 
products, and switch to more environmentally 
friendly product materials and packaging 
where possible. 

•  Ensure that 100% of paper in our books, and 

arts and crafts ranges are Forest Stewardship 
Council (FSC) certified.

•  Offer take-back schemes on our key product 

ranges, such as books, toys and games, to help 
our customers minimise their waste and extend 
the life of our products. 

•  Offer recycling services for our products 
and packaging which are not accepted 
by household recycling facilities. 

In addition to our carbon net-zero targets, we have set longer-term 
ambitions (see adjacent panel) to reduce the impact our products, 
packaging and waste have on the environment. 

To assess and monitor the delivery of our longer-term ambitions 
we set annual targets. Our FY24 targets are detailed on the 
following page.

30

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Carbon emission reduction performance 
We have been calculating our Scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions, 
in line with the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) 
initiative, since 2019. During FY23, for the first time, we calculated 
our FY22 Scope 3 carbon emissions (see page 46).

Scope 1 and 2 
Our carbon emissions across Scope 1, 2 and Scope 3 (grey 
fleet) decreased by 3.6%. The majority of this decrease resulted 
from an improved emissions factor as a result of the continued 
decarbonisation of the UK grid. Scope 1 emissions decreased 
slightly due to an improvement in our data collection, resulting in 
some company car emissions transferring from Scope 1 to Scope 
3 (grey fleet). This transference also explains why our Scope 3 
emissions have increased slightly.

Our carbon emission performance during FY23 is detailed 
on page 46.

During the year we have continued to implement changes to 
improve our energy efficiency. In particular, we have continued to 
install LED lighting in our stores and, as at year end, 67% of our store 
estate now operates with LED lighting. We also began undertaking 
Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme site surveys to identify 
energy efficiency opportunities. The findings of these surveys 
have informed our Scope 1 and 2 net-zero roadmaps. 

We are also moving away from plastic packaging, and switching 
to paper alternatives where possible. All our Christmas ribbons 
are now packaged in paper backing card instead of plastic and 
our Christmas gift tags are now packaged in new open window 
paper sleeve packaging, replacing the previously used polybags. 
Our novelty squidgy toys (balls) are now packaged in plastic-free 
boxes and we have introduced paper packaging across all of our 
stationery and outdoor toy ranges.

We are increasing the amount of recycled content in our product 
ranges and packaging. All yarn in our Prima range is now made 
from 100% recycled materials and our best-selling ‘Create Your Own 
Christmas’ bag and stockings are now made from 100% recycled 
bottles. Where polybags and other forms of plastic packaging are 
still required across our craft, paper, stationery, Christmas, Easter, 
toys and PlayWorks ranges, they are predominantly made from 30% 
recycled content.

We are switching to FSC-certified paper packaging across all of 
our product ranges where possible, with many ranges now at 100% 
FSC certified. We are also sourcing strategically to increase the 
amount of responsibly sourced paper in our books, with four of our 
main suppliers using between 92-100% FSC-certified or PREPS 3* 
paper in their manufacturing processes. 100% of the wooden SKUs 
in our Christmas craft ranges are now FSC certified.

In the coming year we will: 

•  Continue to roll out LED lighting across our store estate. 

FY24 product and packaging targets
In the coming year we will: 

•  Establish a new and remodelled store energy efficiency policy.

•  Remove all glitter from our Christmas cards. 

•  Develop an energy efficiency behaviour change programme 
for our colleagues across stores, our Distribution Centre and 
our Support Centre. 

•  Engage with our landlords to identify and implement energy 

efficiency opportunities across our store estate. 

Scope 3
To support the delivery of our Scope 3 net-zero target, in 
the coming year all our suppliers will be asked to complete a 
sustainability self-assessment. As part of this assessment they 
will be asked to provide details of the steps they are taking to 
reduce their environmental footprint and information about the 
targets they have set to measure and monitor progress. This aligns 
with the Supplier Engagement Scope 3 approach adopted by 
many retailers.

Products and packaging
We are committed to reducing our product packaging and we are 
already implementing changes that will help us achieve our longer-
term ambitions detailed above. As we refresh our product lines we 
will also introduce more environmentally friendly products.

We are already making good progress and during the year we:

•  Removed the shrink wrap on our own brand kids’ jigsaw puzzles.

•  Removed the plastic cover on the majority of our diaries 

and calendars.

•  Removed the swing tag on our Christmas gift bags and replaced 

with a small price label instead.

•  Reworked the packaging on our Christmas gift tags, bags 
and roll wrap to reduce the amount of packaging required.

•  Reworked the packaging on our kids’ arts and crafts range 

to reduce the amount of packaging required.

•  Continued to ensure no blister packs are used in our craft ranges.

•  Added a QR code to our Prima range box sets which give 

customers ideas on how to upcycle their packaging.

•  Remove the plastic shrink wrap from our own brand Christmas 

wrapping paper and replace with a paper alternative.

•  Ensure that all our wooden toys are manufactured with 

traceable timber.

•  Continue to reduce packaging size and increase its recycled 
content, with the goal of ensuring the packaging in our own 
brand craft ranges and our Prima range is 100% recycled content.

• 

• 

Increase the amount of books that are FSC certified from 45% 
in FY23 to 60% by the end of FY24.

Introduce a recycled product range within our craft 
embellishments collection.

Waste recycling
We are committed to reducing the level of waste our business 
generates and to maximising the proportion that is recycled. 
Our colleagues share this commitment. 

To reduce waste and increase recycled materials we have 
continued to educate our teams to maximise the level of waste 
that can be recycled, minimise store waste sent to landfill and 
reduce the number of waste collections. We operate recycling 
facilities at all store locations capable of recycling mixed papers, 
cardboard (which constitutes a very large proportion of store 
waste) and mixed plastics including HDPE, PET and PP. Our Support 
and Distribution Centres in Coleshill, Birmingham, also operate 
a recycling programme to ensure all mixed film plastics and 
cardboard materials are baled on site and removed for recycling.

FY24 waste recycling targets
In the year ahead we will work to continue to identify further 
opportunities to increase our recycling rates across our stores, 
Distribution Centre and Support Centre and explore opportunities for 
in-store customer product takeback/donation or recycling schemes.

In particular we will:

•  Provide educational resources to our store, Distribution Centre 
and Support Centre colleagues to help maximise recycling and 
reduce contamination. 

•  Place additional recycling bins in back of house areas and 

behind tills to increase our recycling rates.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

31

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportESG review continued

Social

Making a positive 
social contribution

Our objective is to make a positive contribution to our 
people, our customers and the communities where 
we operate. 

c.4,000

colleagues

Culture and feedback 
Our values, together with our purpose, shape our culture. The sense 
of family that comes from working in our business and the variety 
and fun that a career in retail can provide are what our culture 
is based on. We believe more than ever that we are creating 
something special that our colleagues (and future colleagues) 
want to be part of, despite being in a competitive and ever- 
challenging environment. We stand out, for all the right reasons.

We continuously listen to colleagues across the Group and 
encourage a two-way conversation around how best we can 
improve and support them. The various channels we use are 
described on page 33.

In August 2022 we launched a new communications and 
engagement platform MyWorks (powered by Reward Gateway). 
This interactive platform provides our colleagues with:

•  Company news and business updates.

• 

Information on Company benefits.

•  Updates about new charitable initiatives. 

•  Access to discounts and savings from hundreds of retailers 

and services.

•  Access to resources on physical, mental and financial wellbeing 

through our MyWellbeing Hub.

People
At the end of FY23 we employed 3,968 permanent colleagues. 
During our 2022 Christmas peak trading period we took on nearly 
500 temporary seasonal colleagues and we are delighted that 
we have been able to make over 50% of our temporary colleagues 
permanent members of our team. 

In a challenging and competitive retail environment, our colleagues 
are fundamental to the delivery of great customer experience. 
They are what makes The Works so special. In order to succeed 
we need to attract and retain good people and our culture is 
key to that. 

Our values

Crafty: for us, it’s about our ability to be 
creative and agile; we are able to adapt 
to change and be smart about what we 
do, with the resources we have. It’s what 
makes us unique.

We care about each other as one team. 
We care about our customers and 
communities, our products and every penny 
we spend. Caring about the things we do is 
at the heart of our work ethic. 

Being can-do means focusing on what 
matters and getting it done. Whatever 
the situation, we rise to it because of the 
can-do spirit and resilience we all share. 

32

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

On an annual basis we invite our colleagues to participate in the 
Best Companies ‘Make a Difference’ engagement survey. This 
well-recognised third-party survey covers a number of areas 
including Leadership, My Manager, Personal Growth, Wellbeing, 
Fair Deal and Giving Something Back. Colleagues also have the 
opportunity to leave open comments on what is great about 
working at The Works and what could be better. 76% of our team 
completed the 2022 full survey and we were awarded a two-star 
rating (with three stars being the highest rating) in recognition of 
outstanding workplace engagement.

The survey provided us with valuable insights about our culture 
and the issues that matter to our colleagues. Key findings from 
the survey this year included:

•  82% of colleagues feel a strong sense of family in their team 

and 81% fed back that people in their team go out of their way 
to help them.

•  88% of colleagues believe their team is fun to work with. 

•  79% of colleagues say their manager takes an active interest 
in their wellbeing and 79% recognise that help is available to 
support their mental wellbeing. 

•  85% of colleagues said we encourage charitable activities.

To continue the momentum and address areas where 
improvements are required we are:

•  Launching a Reward & Recognition programme to positively 
reinforce our values, celebrate success and provide financial 
incentives linked to our purpose and values.

•  Evolving our store team structures to reduce levels of hierarchy, 
improve flexibility and upskill colleagues. The new structures will 
also create opportunities for more responsibility and higher pay. 

•  Sharing our progress on our environmental and 

sustainability activity.

•  Continuing to embed our partnership with the Retail Trust and 

upskilling colleagues on wellbeing.

Health and safety 
The health and safety (H&S) of all our colleagues and everyone who 
visits our stores or any of our operations is of paramount importance.

We deploy a number of H&S policies including our main Health and 
Safety Policy, and H&S processes are embedded in our day-to-day 
operations. As part of their induction, all colleagues participate 
in H&S training appropriate to their role and annual refresher H&S 
training is mandatory for all employees. Our H&S Manager and 
People team liaise with line managers in all parts of the business to 
ensure compliance with policies and procedures and ensure that 
all colleagues receive appropriate training.

We operate a dedicated H&S Committee which meets on a 
quarterly basis. Its members include representatives from all parts 
of our operations and our H&S Manager. The overriding objective 
of decisions taken at these meetings is to make our stores and 
all our operations safe places to work and visit. Material issues 
arising from the H&S Committee’s discussions are escalated to 
senior management and the Board receives regular reports on 
H&S matters.

During FY23 there were no fatalities (FY22: nil) and eight reportable 
accidents (FY22: 13). Seven of these accidents occurred in our stores 
and one occurred in our Distribution Centre. All accidents were 
thoroughly investigated.

We take a proactive approach in relation to all H&S matters and 
our aim is to continuously improve our H&S performance. To drive 
continuous improvement we operate a web-based portal and 
online reporting system which allows all stores to immediately 
record accidents, incidents and near misses. This real-time 
data and visibility across our entire store estate helps us better 
understand risks and identify the most effective mitigation. Our 
store managers all use streamlined H&S checklists that focus 
on things they need to monitor daily during regular floor walks, 
including identifying potential hazards and ensuring fire escape 
routes are always kept clear. 

Wellbeing
Supporting our colleagues from a wellbeing perspective is a 
key part of our people strategy and our ESG commitments. We 
recognise the difficulty that financial pressures can have on our 
colleagues’ overall wellbeing and this year, in response to the 
cost-of-living crisis, we launched Wagestream, an app that offers 
a range of financial wellbeing tools, including the ability to draw 
down salary through the month as it is earned rather than waiting 
until pay day and set up savings accounts. MyWorks, our new 
communications and engagement platform (see page 32), also 
provides information on physical, mental and financial wellbeing as 
well as access to discounts and savings.

We also provide an Employee Assistance Programme for 
all colleagues through our partnership with Retail Trust 
(www.retailtrust.org.uk), a long-established charity, whose mission 
is ‘to create hope, health and happiness’ for everyone in the retail 
sector. To date with the support of Retail Trust over 50 of our 
senior leaders have participated in training in relation to mental 
health and wellbeing management and in the coming year we 
are aiming to provide even more line managers with training in this 
important area. In January 2023, via our e-learning platform, we 
also launched three new Retail Trust mental wellbeing modules: 
‘Wellbeing for Everyone’; ‘Supporting Yourself and Others’; and 
‘Mental Health & Wellbeing – A Manager’s Toolkit’. To date over 
900 colleagues have completed these modules.

To further support colleagues we introduced 50 Wellbeing 
Warriors across the business. These colleagues are specifically 
trained to support the mental wellbeing of their peers, act as an 
impartial, confidential, listening ear and provide unbiased support 
to colleagues. In particular, as required, they help colleagues 
build confidence to seek advice from professionals and provide 
information about how to find relevant specialist support.

Diversity and inclusion (D&I)
We value every one of our colleagues for their skills and experience 
and the unique contribution they offer, irrespective of their personal 
characteristics. We are committed to creating an inclusive 
environment where everyone belongs and can thrive and recognise 
the many benefits that diversity of experiences, cultures and 
perspectives bring. 

During FY23 we partnered with an external D&I consultant to 
develop our D&I strategy. Based on the findings of an employee 
survey and a review of our existing policies and practices we have 
developed a roadmap to create an inclusive workplace across all 
levels of our workforce. Our key priorities are to:

•  Further improve our understanding of D&I across our business.

• 

Improve D&I training and enhance awareness.

•  Review our internal processes to ensure barriers to inclusion 

are removed.

•  Ensure everyone at The Works is accountable for their role in 

creating an inclusive workplace.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

33

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report3   Direct reports to senior management (the Operations Board).

4  Senior leadership includes heads of department or equivalent.

5   Other employees includes all other colleagues who are 

permanent employees. 

Development and retention
Our colleagues are the heart of our business and we work hard 
to retain them and provide development opportunities.

In September 2022 we launched the Can-Do Academy, our new 
learning and development system that provides all colleagues with 
online learning covering compliance, management and leadership 
skills training. The Academy has been very well received and every 
colleague across the Group has interacted with the system. Building 
on this platform we will continue to expand our accessible tailored 
training to support our colleagues’ personal growth and development. 

Our retail developmental programme ‘I can be...’ enables colleagues 
to discuss their career aspirations with their line manager and train 
accordingly, making good on our promise to upskill colleagues 
ready for the next step in their career. The programme also helps 
us create and maintain a strong talent pipeline. 

ESG review continued

Social continued

Diversity and inclusion (D&I) continued
To help us deliver our D&I strategy and our wellbeing strategy, 
we are recruiting a Diversity, Inclusion & Wellbeing Manager. 

We are a signatory to the British Retail Consortium Better Jobs 
Diversity and Inclusion Charter, which aims to improve D&I across 
the retail industry and help drive change, and partake in its surveys 
and insights sessions. 

Our 2022 Gender Pay Gap Report is available at https://corporate.
theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/corporate-governance/our-policies. 
As at 5 April 2022, when measured as a median average, male 
colleagues were paid 2.9% more and when measured as a mean 
average the hourly rate of pay for male colleagues was 12.1% higher 
than female colleagues. This is because we have more men than 
women in senior leadership roles, a position we are working to 
address through the implementation of our D&I strategy.

The gender diversity profile across the Group as at 30 April 2023 
is detailed below.

Board1

Operations Board2

Direct reports3

Senior leadership4

Other employees5

Male

3/60%

7/78%

Female

2/40%

2/22%

21/52.5%

19/47.5%

19/58%

14/42%

1,017/26%

2,892/74%

1 

 The Board (see pages 60 and 61) includes three Non-Executive Directors 
and two Executive Directors. 

2   Information about the members of the Operations Board, 
which includes the two Executive Directors, is available at 
https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/our-leadership. As at the 
date of this Annual Report the gender diversity profile of the Operations 
Board was 6/86% male and 1/14% female.

34

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

 
Governance

Operating in 
a responsible way

We must maintain high standards of governance and operate 
in a responsible way. It is the right thing to do. It is also essential 
to maintain our reputation and protect our brand.

Our performance and development framework, which was 
launched in June 2022, continues to support our ambition to grow 
and develop our own talent and during the year we were pleased 
to be able to promote 10% of our colleagues.

Giving something back
Making a difference to society is not only a part of our ESG 
responsibilities, but also part of our culture. We are proud to work 
with national charity partners, and local causes, to give back in 
the communities which we serve.

Following seven years of successful partnership with Cancer Research 
UK (CRUK) we have made the decision to partner with a new charity 
aligned with our purpose. We are delighted to announce the launch 
of our corporate and charity fundraising partnership with the National 
Literacy Trust (NLT), an independent charity working with schools 
and communities to give disadvantaged children the literacy skills to 
succeed in life. We will work closely with the NLT to improve accessibility, 
and awareness of the importance, of literacy for all, helping us fulfil our 
purpose of inspiring reading, learning, creativity and play.

We continue to partner with Mind, SAMH and Inspire and are 
committed to optimising strategic opportunities to make a real 
difference by fundraising and supporting campaigns to raise 
awareness of the importance of wellbeing.

In the coming year we will launch our first complete, commercial 
charity range that will support all of our national partners. We 
will also introduce our ‘local causes programme’, supporting 
local causes is already very popular in our stores, introducing this 
programme will ensure we are providing our colleagues with the 
tools to fundraise for causes they are passionate about.

We continue to offer two schemes that enable colleagues to make 
monthly charitable donations from their net pay. Through Payroll 
Giving in Action colleagues can donate any amount to any charity, 
while the Pennies from Heaven scheme enables colleagues to 
donate the pennies from their payslips to our charity partners.

FY23 impact

To date impact 

National partnership 
Cancer Research UK (CRUK)

National partnership  
Mind, SAMH and Inspire 

£172k

£94k

£1.3m since 
August 2016

£170k since 
May 2021

We care about good ethical business practices and are fully 
committed to conducting business fairly, ethically and with respect 
to fundamental human rights. This includes the prevention of all 
forms of slavery, forced labour or servitude, child labour and human 
trafficking, both in our business and supply chains. Our Modern 
Slavery Statement is available at www.corporate.theworks.co.uk/
who-we-are/corporate-governance/our-policies.

Supply chain management 
We have developed an Ethical Trading Code of Conduct (Code 
of Conduct) for our partners, manufacturers and suppliers, to 
ensure that when our customers buy from us, they can be satisfied 
that the goods have been produced without exploitation and in 
acceptable and sustainable working conditions.

Our Code of Conduct clearly outlines our social and ethical 
requirements, which include but are not limited to: prevention of 
child and forced labour, safety standards, health and hygiene, 
anti-discrimination and coercion, working hours and wages 
and other fundamental human rights.

In order to ensure that our suppliers meet the social and ethical 
standards we expect, we implement the following arrangements:

•  We require all suppliers to sign our Terms and Conditions of 

Purchase which state the supplier has read and understood and 
conforms to our Code of Conduct. These Terms and Conditions 
of Purchase must be signed before we will place orders.

•  We share our supplier manual with our suppliers to educate them 
about our operating requirements. We also give clear points of 
contact to ensure queries reach the appropriate person and 
are dealt with quickly and effectively, with support from relevant 
functions including merchandising, technical and buying.

• 

In partnership with TUV Rheinland, an independent specialist 
in social responsibility auditing, we have developed a bespoke 
supplier factory audit programme. Incorporated within this 
programme are questions covering the prevention of modern 
slavery, forced labour and child labour and other fundamental 
human rights, which are detailed within our Code of Conduct. 
Suppliers are encouraged to declare their business relationships 
with individual factories that produce for us, which provides us 
with a view of how sustainable our supply chain is. Our audit 
programme (which also incorporates a section on supplier 
capability and their QA functions) also provides ethical 
visibility of suppliers and an understanding of their production 
capabilities. 

•  We also conduct independent product testing as part of 

our product surveillance test programme.

If a factory fails to reach an acceptable standard or there is 
any evidence of child labour or forced labour as described in 
the modern slavery legislation, the factory will be delisted and 
all orders will be cancelled.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

35

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportTask Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) 

TCFD statement
We have followed the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) framework and are 
committed to providing information about climate-related risks and opportunities that are relevant to 
our business. 

We are evolving our strategy and governance framework, to take account of these risks and opportunities. We have complied with 
the requirements of LR 9.8.6R by including climate-related financial disclosures consistent with all of the TCFD recommendations and 
disclosures. In aligning with the TCFD we have also complied with the BEIS mandatory climate-related financial disclosure requirements 
under the Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate-related Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022, details of which can be found below.

TCFD recommendation

BEIS disclosure

Governance

a)  Describe the Board’s oversight of climate-related 

risks and opportunities.

(a)  A description of the governance arrangements of the Company 
in relation to assessing and managing climate-related risks 
and opportunities.

Page

37

37

b)  Describe management’s role in assessing and 

managing climate-related risks and opportunities.

Strategy

a)  Describe the climate-related risks and 
opportunities identified over the short, 
medium and long term.

(d) A description of:

37 to 44

(i) T he principal climate-related risks and opportunities arising 

in connection with the operations of the Company.

(ii)  The time periods by reference to which those risks and 

opportunities are assessed.

b)  Describe the impact of climate-related risks 
and opportunities on business, strategy and 
financial planning.

(e)  A description of the actual and potential impacts of 

44

the principal climate-related risks and opportunities on 
the business model and strategy of the Company.

c)  Describe the resilience of the strategy, taking 
into consideration different climate-related 
scenarios, including a 2°C or lower scenario.

(f)  An analysis of the resilience of the business model and 
strategy of the Company, taking into consideration of 
different climate-related scenarios.

44 and 45

Risk management 

a)  Describe the processes for identifying and assessing 

climate-related risks.

(b)  A description of how the Company identifies, assesses, 
and manages climate related risks and opportunities.

b)  Describe the processes for managing  

climate-related risks.

c)  Describe how processes for identifying, assessing, 
and managing climate-related risks are integrated 
into overall risk management.

(c)  A description of how processes for identifying, assessing, 

and managing climate-related risks are integrated into the 
overall risk management process in the Company.

45

45

45

Metrics and targets

a)  Disclose the metrics used to assess  

(h)  The key performance indicators used to assess progress 

45 and 46

climate-related risks and opportunities in line 
with the strategy and risk management process.

b)  Disclose Scope 1, Scope 2, and, if appropriate, 
Scope 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, 
and related risks.

against targets used to manage climate-related risks and 
realise climate-related opportunities and a description of 
the calculations on which those key performance indicators 
are based.

c)  Describe the targets used to manage  

(g)  A description of the targets used by the Company to 

climate-related risks and opportunities and 
performance against targets.

manage climate-related risks and to realise climate-related 
opportunities and of performance against those targets.

46

46

36

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Overview 
Our business activities entail the sourcing, distribution and sale of a 
range of books, toys, arts and crafts and stationery products. The 
environmental impact of these activities is outlined on pages 47 to 
48 and, in the main, relates to product manufacturing, packaging, 
waste recycling and energy consumption. We are committed to 
reducing the impact our activities have on the environment. While 
climate change does not pose a significant direct threat to our 
business, we have identified a number of risks and opportunities 
that could impact the business over the longer term. During the 
year we have assessed the impact of climate-related risks and 
opportunities on our strategy and financial planning. To ensure we 
mitigate risks and capitalise on opportunities we have embedded 
appropriate management processes. This work has been led by our 
Sustainability Manager, who joined the Group in January 2023, and 
has been supported by a specialist third-party ESG consultancy, 
Inspired ESG (INESG). 

Governance
Board oversight of climate-related risks and opportunities
The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s climate-related 
risks and opportunities. 

The Board is responsible for ensuring that appropriate risk 
management processes and controls are in place and has 
delegated responsibility for overseeing risk management 
processes and controls to the Audit Committee. Collectively, 
the Audit Committee and the Board on an annual basis review 
the Group’s risk register and the principal risks facing the Group 
which, since FY22, has included an ‘Environmental (including 
climate change)’ risk. As part of this review process the Audit 
Committee and the Board deliberate and discuss the risk register, 
allocate ratings for each risk, and review and update the Group’s 
register of principal risks and mitigating actions. As part of these 
discussions and review processes, the Board considers the threat 
associated with climate change, as detailed below, and discusses 
and agrees actions to mitigate its impact.

The Board factors climate change considerations into its planning 
and decision-making processes. During the year the Board 
approved a rollout of LED lighting in stores to improve the Group’s 
energy efficiency, and the appointment of a Sustainability 
Manager to lead the development of the Group’s sustainability 
strategy and support its implementation.

The Board receives regular updates from the ESG steering group 
and Operations Board on the development and implementation 
of the Group’s sustainability strategy, including on a formal basis 
annually. To support the Board in making informed decisions in 
relation to the Group’s sustainability strategy, in January 2023 the 
Directors participated in a training session facilitated by INESG. The 
session, which focused on climate change and net-zero, enabled 
the Board to make informed judgements regarding the identification 
and assessment of climate-related risks and opportunities 
associated with the Group’s operations and footprint. In April 2023, 
following an update on the Group’s decarbonisation plan (page 30) 
the Board approved net-zero targets which are a component part 
of the Group’s overall environmental strategy (see page 30).

Management’s role in assessing and managing  
climate-related risks and opportunities
Management of climate-related issues has been embedded 
into the Group’s existing governance structure. Please refer to 
the governance structure included on page 62 of the Corporate 
Governance report. Reporting to the CEO, the Operations Board 
is responsible for managing the day-to-day activities of the Group 
and implementing the strategy agreed by the Board. The Board 
has delegated the management of climate-related risks and 
opportunities to the Operations Board, to ensure climate change 
is integrated across core functions of the business accordingly. 

The ESG steering group supports the Operations Board by ensuring 
climate change is integrated into the planning and execution of 
the Group’s strategy. The ESG steering group is chaired by the 
CEO, and includes two Operations Board members. As noted 
above, to support the Operations Board, a Sustainability Manager 
was appointed in January 2023, to coordinate the management 
of climate-related issues, and to ensure all relevant risks and 
opportunities are identified and assessed at least annually.

We are committed to building capacity internally and equipping our 
senior management with the appropriate knowledge, to deliver on 
our objectives as a business. The Operations Board, ESG steering 
group and Sustainability Manager consider and assess the Group’s 
climate-related risks and opportunities in an annual climate risk-
management workshop facilitated by INESG. The TCFD guidance on 
transition and physical risks and opportunities, and the latest climate 
science structures the climate risk-management workshop. The 
findings from the workshop inform our climate risk and opportunity 
register which will be annually reviewed. The inaugural climate 
risk management workshop was held in August 2022 to develop 
management’s knowledge and understanding of climate change 
and help identify and assess the associated risks and opportunities.

In March 2023 members of the Operations Board also attended 
our net-zero strategy workshop. This session provided an overview 
of net-zero and our FY22 Carbon Balance Sheet, which forms the 
baseline measure of our emissions. The net-zero strategy workshop 
has supported the business in developing carbon reduction targets 
and a decarbonisation plan, bespoke to our operations and 
aligned with how the Company will grow over time. The outcome 
of this session was presented to the Board in April 2023, where 
the Group’s carbon reduction targets were agreed.

Strategy
The climate-related risks and opportunities identified 
over the short, medium and long term
Supported by INESG, we have conducted a detailed climate 
scenario analysis to identify and assess the potential effect of 
direct physical risks (the physical impact of climate change on our 
sites and assets) and transition risks (the impact on our business, 
including our supply chain, associated with the global transition 
to a low-carbon economy). During FY24 we will undertake further 
analysis across our key suppliers and critical supply chain routes to 
identify opportunities to improve the measures we are implementing 
to mitigate potential climate-related risks within the supply chain. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

37

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportTask Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Strategy continued
The climate-related risks and opportunities identified over the short, medium and long term continued
Our climate scenario analysis considered climate-related risks and opportunities under the three warming scenarios detailed below. 
Each scenario refers to differing severities of irreversible climatic shifts, leading to permanent new climate states that could be detrimental 
to society. Several established climate models were used during this exercise, including the ‘Climada natural catastrophe damage model’, 
‘CORDEX regional climate projections’ and ‘Integrated Assessment Models’. 

Scenario warming pathways

Below 2oC scenario:
Organisations follow a co-
ordinated and orderly transition 
to a low-carbon economy, 
aligning closely with the Paris 
Agreement and Science Based 
Targets Initiative.

Harmonious collaboration between governmental bodies and organisations to introduce and 
adhere to policy and legislation associated with emissions reductions. Businesses strive to exhibit 
proactive behaviour in reducing their carbon emissions, with low-carbon technology being readily 
available and widely implemented. Market preferences shift as consumers demand low-carbon 
alternatives for products and services, with businesses responding and adapting their operations. 
As a result, transition risks will be more prevalent due to efforts to decarbonise the economy, but 
many climate tipping points are not reached.

Between 2-3oC scenario:
Policies and legislation are 
introduced with a staggered 
effect with inconsistent levels of 
action being taken, aligning with 
current forecasts.

Uncoordinated approach regarding the introduction of policies and legislation, which leaves 
businesses with little time to become compliant. As a result, investment into low-emissions 
technology is staggered, causing companies to decarbonise in potentially abrupt steps. With 
warming unable to be limited to below 2oC, some climate tipping points will be reached, resulting in 
increased physical risks. Some transition risks will also manifest themselves as efforts are still made 
to transition to a low-carbon economy, even though disjointed and sporadic.

Above 3oC scenario:
Minimal climate action is taken 
and emissions go unchecked, 
resulting in a worst-case 
climate scenario.

‘Business as usual’ approach is followed, with little or no climate action being taken by governments 
or businesses. Few companies set net-zero targets, with emissions continuing to go unchecked 
as low-emissions technology remains untested with little capital investment. As a result, many 
climate tipping points are reached, creating detrimental conditions for society as the physical risks 
posed by climate change materialise. Transition risks are not prevalent here, as there has been no 
movement towards a low-carbon economy.

Transition risks
As the global economy begins to decarbonise, we anticipate 
that the potential impacts from transition risks will increase 
as more efforts are made by governments and businesses to 
reduce emissions. Our analysis suggests that the transition risks 
are most significant in the ‘below 2°C’ scenario and ‘between 
2-3°C’ scenario, as there is more change entailed in adapting to 
increasingly aggressive policies and legislation implemented by 
governments and regulatory authorities.

As we work to decarbonise our business to be net zero in relation 
to Scope 1, 2 and Scope 3 emissions, this will mitigate the risk 
posed by emerging policy and legislation, such as carbon taxing 
and increases to greenhouse gas pricing. We have assumed that 
the benefits from achieving the net-zero targets we have set will 
outweigh the upfront costs of doing so. 

Building resilience into our supply chain by developing deeper 
relationships with key suppliers will help to minimise the potential 
risks posed by climate change in relation to changing markets.

Climate-related risks and opportunities
The climate scenario analysis findings were presented to and 
discussed with the Operations Board during the August 2022 
climate risk management workshop. Our short term (up to 2025) 
assesses the immediate risks and opportunities we may experience 
over a three-year period. 

Our medium term (2025 - 2035) is consistent with The Works’ net-zero 
targets for Scope 2 by 2030 and Scope 1 by 2035.

Our long-term (2035 - 2050) is consistent with the UK Government’s 
net-zero pledge by 2050 and the Works’ long-term goal is to be 
net-zero across Scopes 1, 2 and 3 by 2045.

Taking into consideration the climate scenario analysis results 
along with detail of existing processes and mitigation strategies 
across the business, the climate-related risks and opportunities 
identified were assessed and classified as ‘Low’, ‘Medium’ or 
‘High’ by members of the Operations Board which ascribes a 
financial threshold to each risk category. This is a high level 
financial assessment of each risk and opportunity and will be 
developed further as our process continues to evolve. The risks and 
opportunities marked medium are deemed to be material to our 
operations. All climate-related risks and opportunities identified 
through our scenario analysis are detailed in the tables on pages 
39 to 44. For each risk we have highlighted in which scenario there 
will be the greatest impact, and the measures we are implementing 
to increase our resilience.

38

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Category

Trend and highest impact 

Potential impact

Risk mitigation

•  The Group has committed to 

becoming net-zero for Scope 2 
by 2030 and Scope 1 by 2035. As 
our carbon emissions decrease, 
the potential impact of this risk 
will reduce.

•  Monitor and review our carbon 
emissions each year against 
a carbon pricing model.

•  The Group’s CFO and Company 
Secretary oversee regulatory 
compliance with support from 
external advisers.

•  Senior management team 
is aware of compliance 
requirements under their areas 
of responsibility and liaise with 
the CFO and external advisers 
to identify and manage issues. 

•  Policies and procedures in 

place to ensure the Group has 
capacity to support increased 
reporting and transparency 
(e.g. data collection processes). 

•  Partner with INESG to support 

environmental reporting disclosures. 

• 

Introduced initiatives to reduce 
plastic packaging (see page 31).

Policy and legal

Increase in carbon/GHG pricing.

MEDIUM

Highest impact in the:

•  Medium term

•  2-3°C Scenario

Increase in climate change 
regulation including increased 
emissions-reporting obligations.

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to medium term

•  <2°C and 2-3°C Scenarios

Mandates on and regulation of 
existing products and services. 

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to medium term

•  <2°C Scenario

Potential financial impact 
area: Expenditures — increased 
direct costs.

The UK has committed to a series 
of five-year carbon budgets. If 
carbon emissions do not decrease 
enough to meet targets, a tax 
on carbon emissions may be 
introduced. We estimate that this 
impact could be highest in the 
2-3°C Scenario in the medium 
term, when carbon pricing is 
projected to peak. Based on 
FY22 Scope 1 and 2 emissions 
(3,088 tCO2e), an estimated 
potential tax of approximately 
£0.2m could arise in the medium 
term, assuming no reduction to 
carbon emissions.

LOW

Potential financial impact 
area: Expenditures - Increased 
direct costs.

We are required to comply 
with environmental reporting 
requirements and anticipate that 
additional requirements will be 
introduced over time as the UK 
transitions to a net-zero economy. 
If we do not meet developing 
reporting requirements there is a 
risk of potential sanctions imposed 
by regulatory bodies. 

Costs will increase if additional 
resource is required to meet 
increased reporting requirements. 

LOW

Potential financial impact area: 
Expenditures - Increased direct 
and indirect costs.

We and/or our suppliers may be 
subject to increased regulation in 
relation to plastics and packaging 
(e.g. UK Plastic Tax and Extended 
Producer Responsibility). 
Regulations relating to products 
and packaging are likely to 
intensify over time. This may 
increase the cost of direct taxes 
or increase materials costs. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

39

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportTask Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Strategy continued
Transition risks continued

Category

Trend and highest impact 

Potential impact

Risk mitigation

Policy and 
legal continued

Exposure to litigation. 

LOW

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to medium term

•  2-3°C Scenario

Market

Increased cost of energy 
and raw materials. 

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to medium term

•  <2°C and 2-3°C Scenarios

•  The Group’s CFO and Company 
Secretary oversee regulatory 
compliance with support from 
external advisers.

•  Senior management team is 

made aware of key compliance 
requirements within their 
business areas and liaise with 
the CFO and external advisers 
to identify and manage issues. 

•  Maintain focus on cost control. 

•  Continually review supply base 
and diversify and/or change 
supply options where needed.

• 

Introducing energy efficiency 
technology across the 
store estate.

•  Conduct site surveys to identify 
energy saving opportunities.

Potential financial impact 
area: Expenditures —increased 
direct costs.

Legal standards and reporting 
requirements may become more 
onerous in the short to medium 
term. This could increase the risk 
of lawsuits, compliance issues 
and fines. Any litigation could 
negatively impact our brand 
and reputation.

MEDIUM

Potential financial impact area: 
Expenditures - increased direct 
(operating) costs.

Disruptions in recent years, 
including the period of increased 
ocean freight rates and reduced 
availability of shipping containers, 
have already impacted our 
business, albeit these impacts 
have now abated. Future 
increases in costs could adversely 
impact the Group’s profitability.

This risk is currently heightened, 
due to the generally high levels of 
cost inflation being experienced. 
Climate change is likely to 
exacerbate this, potentially 
increasing costs, creating supply 
disruptions and delays. Energy 
costs, although lower than the 
highest peaks reached following 
Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, are 
nevertheless expected to rise 
over time. 

Changing customer behaviour. 

MEDIUM

Highest impact in the:

•  Medium term

•  <2°C and 2-3°C Scenarios

Potential financial impact area: 
Revenue - decreased revenue 
due to reduced demand for 
products and services.

With ESG growing in importance, 
customers may change their 
shopping preferences, which 
could potentially impact demand 
for the Group’s products. Failure 
to effectively predict and respond 
to any such changes could affect 
the Group’s sales and financial 
performance. 

• 

Implementing a net-zero strategy 
and enhancing our reporting 
to communicate our actions 
to make our proposition more 
sustainable to stakeholders, 
including customers.

40

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Category

Trend and highest impact 

Potential impact

Risk mitigation

• 

Invested in sustainability 
function, recruiting a new 
Sustainability Manager in FY23. 

•  The Group’s CFO and Company 
Secretary oversee regulatory 
compliance, with support from 
external advisers. 

•  Partnered with INESG to 
support us in relation to 
environmental matters.

•  Adopt internationally aligned 
frameworks to ensure our 
ESG strategy develops using 
best practice.

•  Monitor customer trends 

to anticipate changes and 
react accordingly. 

• 

Implementing an ESG 
programme and developing 
our reporting to communicate 
this to stakeholders, 
including customers.

• 

Implementing a 
net-zero strategy.

•  Work with suppliers to 

explore lower-emission 
alternative products.

• 

• 

Installing energy efficient 
technology in stores. 

Implementing a net-zero 
strategy and understanding 
and accounting for the 
additional costs. 

Reputation

Increased stakeholder concern 
regarding environmental issues. 

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to medium term

•  <2°C and 2-3°C Scenarios

MEDIUM

Potential financial impact 
area: Capital and Financing – 
decreased access to capital.

ESG is becoming increasingly 
important to stakeholders. 
Interest in, and scrutiny of, our ESG 
credentials is likely to increase.

Reputational damage could 
affect the financial performance 
of the business.

Stigmatisation of the sector. 

LOW

Highest impact in the:

•  Medium term

•  <2°C and 2-3°C Scenarios

Technology

Substitute existing products 
with lower-emissions alternates. 

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to long term

•  <2°C and 2-3°C Scenarios

Costs to transition to lower- 
emissions technology. 

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to long term

•  <2°C and 2-3°C Scenarios

Potential financial impact area: 
Revenue - Decreased revenue 
due to reduced demand for 
products and services.

If value retail companies are 
unable to demonstrate their 
commitment to environmental 
sustainability and wider ESG 
aspects, customers may reduce 
their purchasing, adversely 
impacting sales.

MEDIUM

Potential financial impact 
area: Expenditures — increased 
capital expenditures.

As customers become more 
environmentally conscious, the 
costs to ensure our products 
are sustainable could increase. 
This reflects costs associated 
with sustainable and recycled 
materials, which are likely to 
increase as demand increases.

MEDIUM

Potential financial impact 
area: Expenditures — increased 
capital expenditures.

To reduce our Scope 1 and Scope 
2 carbon emissions and meet our 
net-zero targets for Scope 2 by 
2030 and Scope 1 by 2035, we will 
need to invest in lower emission 
technology. Decarbonisation 
actions identified to date 
including LED lighting installation, 
Company energy policy 
implementation, installation of 
lighting sensors and a behavioural 
change programme will require an 
estimated £0.7m investment over 
the next six years. 

Cost savings will likely mitigate 
the investment outflow through 
reduced energy costs.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

41

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportTask Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Strategy continued
Physical risks
We have identified several physical risks requiring appropriate levels of management, to ensure that any potential disruption to our 
operations is minimised. These physical risks primarily materialise in the above 3°C scenario in the long term, where numerous climate 
tipping points would be reached due to the unchecked increase in carbon emissions. We anticipate that the likelihood of extreme 
weather events occurring will increase as global temperatures rise, with phenomena such as flooding posing a potential threat to 
several of our sites. We will continually monitor physical risks by running annual climate scenario analysis, and expand the scope of 
this to include our key suppliers and supply routes in subsequent years of reporting.

Category

Trend and highest impact 

Potential impact

Risk mitigation

Acute

Increased severity of flooding. 

MEDIUM

Highest impact in the:

•  Long term

•  >3°C Scenario

Potential financial impact area: 
increased direct and indirect 
costs and decreased revenue.

If flooding in the UK occurs with 
more severity and frequency 
it could impact our sites and 
operations, through direct 
damage to buildings and assets.
Disruptions may impact transport 
networks, which could increase 
costs and cause delays. We may 
experience an increase in property 
insurance premiums.

As a substantial part of the 
Group’s profit is currently 
generated during the Christmas 
peak sales period, extreme 
weather events during this time 
could have an adverse short-term 
effect by disrupting shopping 
behaviour, stock flow, deliveries 
of products to our stores and 
the fulfilment of online orders. 

Heatwaves/Extreme heat.

LOW

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to long term

•  2-3°C and >3°C Scenarios

Potential financial impact area: 
increased direct and indirect 
costs and decreased revenue.

In the event of heatwaves and/or 
periods of extreme heat occurring 
more frequently, there will be an 
increased demand for cooling. 
This will increase energy costs, 
and impact our efforts to reduce 
Scope 2 emissions. There is an 
increased risk of power outages 
becoming more frequent due to 
greater demand on the grid. Staff 
health, wellbeing, comfort and 
productivity may be impacted. 

Extreme weather events could also 
have an adverse short-term effect 
by disrupting shopping behaviour 
as local footfall decreases, stock 
flow, deliveries of products to 
our stores and the fulfilment of 
online orders.

•  Disaster recovery plan 

is in place.

•  Maintain appropriate business 
interruption insurance cover.

•  Scenario analysis of the store 
estate will be undertaken 
annually to monitor high risk sites 
for potential long-term impacts.

•  Online fulfilment capability 

could support some ongoing 
operations, if many sites were 
closed simultaneously due 
to physical damage.

• 

Introducing energy saving 
initiatives and technology to 
reduce the impact of increased 
energy usage. 

•  Develop and implement 

appropriate response strategies 
including supplying plenty 
of drinking water, to keep 
staff hydrated.

•  An emergency generator is 

installed at the support centre/
DC to mitigate the impact of 
power cuts. 

•  Monitor health and wellbeing 

of colleagues. 

42

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Category

Trend and highest impact 

Potential impact

Risk mitigation

Acute continued

Increased frequency of wildfires.

LOW

Highest impact in the:

•  Long term

•  >3°C Scenario

Potential financial impact 
area: increased direct and 
indirect costs.

Even though this is not traditionally 
considered as a material risk for 
UK operations, the frequency and 
severity of wildfires may increase 
over time if extreme weather 
events become more common.

Chronic

Water stress.

LOW

Highest impact in the:

•  Medium to long term

•  >3°C Scenario

Potential financial impact 
area: increased direct and 
indirect costs.

We may be impacted by restricted 
water usage as well as additional 
regulation to report on water 
consumption and usage. Access 
to and use of water supplies 
may become prohibited, as 
demand outweighs the supply 
of freshwater. Water may require 
greater treatment which could 
increase water costs. 

Sea level rise.

LOW

Highest impact in the:

•  Long term

•  >3°C Scenario

Potential financial impact 
area: increased direct and 
indirect costs.

As sea level rises, rates of erosion 
and the likelihood of storm surges 
occurring increase. This can lead 
to sites in coastal zones being 
damaged, eventually leading to 
closures and increased insurance 
premiums. These impacts could 
also manifest themselves in our 
supply chain, if key shipping ports 
are affected. 

•  A disaster recovery plan 

is in place.

•  Maintain appropriate business 
interruption insurance cover.

•  Monitor events which may 

impact the health and safety 
of our employees, customers 
and wider communities. 

•  Developing plan to measure 

water consumption to 
understand usage.

•  Expanding scope of climate 

scenario analysis to understand 
impact of water stress 
on business.

•  Conduct annual scenario 
analysis of store estate, to 
monitor high-risk sites for 
long-term impacts.

•  When leases are up for 

renewal, take climate scenario 
analysis into account and 
consider relocating away 
from high-risk sites. 

Climate-related opportunities

Category

Trend and highest impact 

Potential impact

Opportunity management

Products 
and services

Development of new products. 

MEDIUM

Highest impact in the:

•  Medium term

•  <2°C Scenario

Potential financial impact area: 
Revenue — increased revenue 
from an increased demand 
for sustainable products 
and services.

As customers become more 
concerned about ESG, their 
shopping behaviours may change, 
if they wish to purchase more 
sustainable products. 

We may be able to capitalise on 
this, if it is possible to develop more 
sustainable alternative products 
at prices which customers are 
willing to pay.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

43

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportTask Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Strategy continued
Climate-related opportunities continued

Category

Trend and highest impact 

Potential impact

Opportunity management

Energy resources

Use of lower-emission sources 
of energy.

Highest impact in the:

•  Short to medium term

•  <2°C Scenario

•  Conduct energy site surveys 
to identify energy saving 
opportunities bespoke 
to our operations. 

• 

Implementing net-zero strategy 
and understanding and 
accounting for the additional 
cost to the business. 

MEDIUM

Potential financial impact 
area: Expenditures — reduction 
in operating expenses from 
increased efficiency (for example, 
decreased energy costs).

The introduction of lower-emission 
sources of energy across our estate 
would contribute to reduced energy 
consumption and associated 
costs over time. It would also help 
reduce our carbon emissions and 
contribute to our carbon-reduction 
and net-zero targets. 

The continued rollout of LED 
lighting, Company energy policy 
implementation, installation of 
lighting sensors and a behavioural 
change programme will result in 
an estimated carbon saving of 
686 tCO2e. 

Impact of climate-related risks and opportunities on business, 
strategy and financial planning
We have assessed the impact of climate-related risks and 
opportunities on our business, strategy and financial planning. 
Based on our assessment, our business is more likely to be 
impacted by transition risks. As the global economy begins 
to decarbonise, we anticipate that the potential impacts 
from transition risks will increase as more efforts are made by 
governments and businesses to reduce emissions. We are likely to 
face increased operating costs as we invest in resources required 
to navigate enhanced reporting requirements as well as adapting 
to increased costs of energy and raw materials in our supply chain. 
As outlined in the Viability statement in this Annual Report, the 
Group operates a three-year financial planning cycle. Currently 
identified and quantifiable transition costs (such as the costs of 
retaining expert consultants INESG, and the cost of employing 
the recently appointed Sustainability Manager) have been 
incorporated into the Group’s financial plans. 

Further, as customers and wider stakeholders become more 
interested in our sustainability credentials over time we may see a 
reduced demand for products, as well as a potential decreased 
access to capital. However, the Group has not allowed for any 
of these and other potential costs relating to other transitional 
or physical climate risks in its current planning horizon, as these 
are presently too remote to be included. The process of periodic 
reviews of the risks and the operation of the planning cycle 
will ensure that if it becomes evident that costs (or revenues) 
associated with the climate risks will affect the business, they 
will be reflected in financial plans in due course.

A substantial part of the Group’s profit is currently generated 
during the Christmas peak sales period, therefore extreme weather 
events during this time could have an adverse short-term effect by 
disrupting shopping behaviour, stock flow, deliveries of products 
to our stores and the fulfilment of online orders. We anticipate that 
the likelihood of extreme weather events occurring will increase as 
global temperatures rise, with phenomena such as flooding posing 
a potential threat to several of our sites. Detail of the impact of 
climate-related risks and opportunities facing our business can 
be found in the tables above.

44

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

The Sustainability Manager works closely with the ESG Steering 
Committee, members of the Operations Board and Heads of 
Departments to ensure sustainability and climate change criteria 
are integrated into decision making when fulfilling their roles across 
the business. Focusing on immediate priorities for the business, 
an Environmental Action Group has been established and meets 
monthly to consider plans to operate more sustainably which are 
presented to the Board on an ad hoc basis.

To reduce our Scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions and meet our 
net-zero targets for Scope 2 by 2030 and Scope 1 by 2035, we will 
need to introduce lower emission technology, as well as engage 
additional resources. During the year the Board approved a rollout 
of LED lighting in stores to improve the Group’s energy efficiency, 
and the appointment of a Sustainability Manager to lead the 
development of the Group’s sustainability strategy and support 
its implementation. Moving forward, decarbonisation actions 
such as further LED lighting installation, Company energy policy 
implementation, installation of lighting controls and a behavioural 
change programme will require investment.

Resilience of strategy taking into consideration different climate-
related scenarios, including a 2°C or lower scenario
While climate change does not pose a significant direct threat 
to our business, we have identified a number of risks and 
opportunities that could impact the business over the longer term 
and assessed their impact. 

As described above, we considered climate-related risks and 
opportunities under three different warming scenarios, varying from 
a best-case scenario (below 2°C) to a worst-case scenario (above 
3°C). As the types of risks that present themselves will vary under 
different warming scenarios, to effectively assess the resilience of 
our strategy, analysing climate-related risks and opportunities 
against these different warming scenarios is necessary. Our analysis 
suggests that the transition risks are most significant in the ‘below 
2°C’ scenario and ‘between 2-3°C’ scenario, as more change will be 
required to adapt to increasingly aggressive policies and legislation 
implemented by governments and regulatory authorities. As we 
work to decarbonise our business to be net zero in relation to Scope 
1 and Scope 2 emissions, the risk posed by emerging policy and 

legislation, such as carbon taxing and increases to greenhouse 
gas pricing, will be mitigated and the benefits from achieving our 
net-zero targets will outweigh the upfront costs of doing so. 

Building resilience into our supply chain by developing deeper 
relationships with key suppliers and also diversifying our supplier 
base, will help minimise the potential risks posed by climate 
change in relation to changing markets.

We have identified several physical risks requiring appropriate 
levels of management, to ensure that any potential disruption 
to our operations is minimised. These physical risks primarily 
materialise in the ‘above 3°C’ scenario in the long term, where 
numerous climate tipping points would be reached due to the 
unchecked increase in carbon emissions. We will continue to 
monitor physical risks through our annual climate scenario analysis, 
which we will expand to include further analysis across our key 
suppliers and critical supply chain routes to identify opportunities 
to improve the measures we are implementing to mitigate potential 
climate-related risks within the supply chain.

The information detailed above in relation to transition and 
physical risks also provides an insight into the resilient nature of 
our business model and, in particular, the processes and steps 
we are taking to mitigate the impact of climate-related risks. 

Risk management
We have an established framework used by the Group for 
managing general risks which incorporates processes to make 
decisions to manage or accept those risks, and to monitor steps 
taken to achieve risk mitigation. The management of climate-
related risks falls within this umbrella, and uses an analogous 
framework process. As this is our first climate-related risk and 
opportunity assessment, the initial analysis was limited to our direct 
operations. As we evolve our assessment annually and begin to 
include our suppliers we will get a better understanding of the 
potential size and scope of the identified climate-related risks 
and opportunities over the short, medium and long term. 

The processes for identifying and assessing 
climate-related risks
To support management in its identification and assessment of 
climate-related risks, we conducted climate scenario analysis 
across all our operations in FY22 and FY23 for the first time. 
Alongside this process, we launched an internal due diligence 
process, to review existing business functions through a climate 
lens. In conjunction with mapping of our existing business risks 
and operations against those outlined by the TCFD guidance, 
this informed the identification of the climate-related risks and 
opportunities applicable to our locations and operations. 

We have assessed the impact of each climate-related risk and 
opportunity across all three scenarios (a below 2°C, a 2-3°C and an 
above 3°C scenario), and three time horizons (short, medium and 
long term), to understand the scenario and timeframe within which 
our business is most vulnerable to each risk, or best positioned 
to capitalise on each opportunity. A climate risk management 
workshop was held during FY23 with members of the Operations 
Board, followed by subsequent one-to-one discovery sessions, 
to collect supporting data, to inform the assessment of each risk 
and opportunity, including high-level financial modelling which 
ascribes a financial threshold to each risk category. The risks and 
opportunities marked medium are deemed to be material to our 
operations. All climate-related risks and opportunities identified 
through our scenario analysis are detailed in the tables on pages 
39 to 44. For each risk we have highlighted in which scenario there 
will be the greatest impact, and the measures we are implementing 
to increase resilience.

The process for managing climate-related risks
Through the internal stakeholder engagement process, we 
identified existing mitigation processes, which could be developed 
or adopted to mitigate the impact of climate change. Details of 
existing mitigation actions can be found on page 31. As explained 
on page 37 the Operations Board is responsible for managing the 
Group’s climate-risks and opportunities supported by the ESG 
steering group and the Sustainability Manager. In addition senior 
managers are assigned specific responsibilities to ensure climate-
related risks and opportunities are accurately assessed and 
effectively managed. The climate scenario analysis undertaken in 
FY23 will be repeated annually.

The Sustainability Manager works closely with the ESG Steering 
Committee, members of the Operations Board and Heads of 
Departments to ensure sustainability and climate change criteria is 
integrated into decision making when fulfilling their roles across the 
business. These sessions, along with monthly Environmental Action 
Group meetings, are used to identify opportunities to manage risks.

Integration of processes for identifying, assessing 
and managing climate-related risks into overall 
risk management
Following a detailed operational risk review completed by our 
Head of Finance, an environmental (including climate change) risk 
was highlighted and included in the updated risk register in FY22. 
The review included individual meetings with each Operations 
Board member covering current and emerging risks affecting their 
respective areas of responsibility and broader corporate risks in 
other parts of the business. 

We have considered our existing risk process and structure of 
our risk register, when creating a climate risk register, to ensure 
climate-related risks and opportunities are easily integrated into 
existing business functions, where appropriate. We mapped our 
existing business risks against those outlined by the TCFD guidance 
to identify risk owners. 

Following our FY23 climate risk management workshop, we held 
one-to-one discovery sessions with members of the Operations 
Board to further inform the assessment of climate-related risks 
and opportunities and establish risk mitigation actions across 
the business. This process will be repeated annually. 

The Board and Audit Committee will continue to review the 
business’ principal risks, including climate change risk, twice 
per year. 

With support from the Sustainability Manager, the CFO will be 
responsible for the climate risk register, to ensure climate-related 
risks and opportunities are reported annually. The climate risk 
register contains all transition and physical risks highlighted and 
informs the annual assessment of the environmental (including 
climate change) risk.

Metrics and targets 
Metrics used to assess climate-related risks 
and opportunities in line with strategy and risk 
management processes
We use a range of metrics to assess and manage our climate-
related risks and opportunities, including carbon emissions (see 
pages 45 and 46), energy consumption (see page 47), waste and 
recycling (see page 31) and products and packaging (see page 31). 
We have considered cross-industry metrics including transition and 
physical risks, climate-related opportunities, capital deployment, 
carbon pricing and executive remuneration when reviewing the 
impact of climate change on our business. Reporting against these 
metrics can be found from pages 46 and 47. Each year we aim to 
develop these metrics while enhancing our TCFD reporting. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

45

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportTask Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Metrics and targets continued
Metrics used to assess climate-related risks and 
opportunities in line with strategy and risk management 
processes continued
Every year we will set short-term annual targets which will help us 
achieve our longer term environmental ambitions (see page 30). We 
will also review industry remuneration best practice and guidance 
and consider linking executive remuneration with the delivery and 
performance of our net-zero strategy and related targets.

Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 GHG emissions and 
related risks
We have been calculating our Scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions, 
in line with the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting initiative 
(SECR) since 2019 (page 47). This year, as part of the work we 
undertook to develop our carbon balance sheet, we calculated our 
Scope 3 carbon emissions for the first time. To establish a baseline 
for reporting we have used FY22 financial data to estimate our 
prior year Scope 3 emissions. We will use this baseline to measure 
progress against our emissions reductions targets. In FY24, our 
efforts will focus on aligning our Scope 3 data collection with our 
Scope 1 and 2 collection processes.

Our Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 emissions in relation to FY23 
are set out below.

Carbon emissions (tCO2e) (tonnes) 
Scope 

Scope 1

Scope 2

Scope 3

Total 

FY23

199

2,576

30

2,805

FY22 

219

2,869

19

3,107

Calculations have used the methodology based on the 
Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG Protocol) Corporate Value 
Chain standards. Within Scope 3, there are 15 categories, with 
12 applicable to our operations. Over time we aim to improve our 
data collection processes to increase the accuracy of our Scope 3 
emissions data. 

Targets used to manage climate-related risks and 
opportunities and performance against targets
We are committed to becoming net-zero for Scope 2 emissions by 
2030, Scope 1 emissions by 2035, and Scope 3 emissions by 2045, 
with an ambition to be net-zero in our Scope 3 emissions by 2040. 
Our Scope 1 and 2 targets, with our Scope 3 ambition, align with 
the British Retail Consortium’s Climate Action Roadmap.

We are in the process of developing our transition plan and setting 
near-term targets. More information on how we are reducing 
our environmental impact can be found on pages 30 and 31.

Target

Net-zero Scope 1 
emissions by 2035

Net-zero Scope 2 
emissions by 2030

Progress so far

We continue to build our roadmap for achieving net-zero in Scope 1, and are currently reviewing 
our car fleet options to determine when we will transition to a hybrid and/or electric fleet.

We have installed LED lighting and energy efficient equipment in all new stores to help reduce 
our in-store energy consumption. We are also retrofitting our existing estate with LED lighting 
to continue the decarbonisation of our Scope 1 and 2 emissions. 

We conducted ESOS surveys across a number of our key sites to identify energy-savings 
opportunities. We will utilise the outputs of the surveys to implement energy efficiency measures 
across our estate.

Net-zero Scope 3 
emissions by 20451

We have calculated our Scope 3 emissions for the first time for the FY21/22 reporting period. This 
has provided us with a Scope 3 baseline from which we can understand emissions across our value 
chain, and begin formalising a decarbonisation strategy to meet our net-zero target. A number 
of Scope 3 categories will be targeted for data methodology improvements, where we will look 
to transition from average and spend-based data to activity-based data.

1  With an ambition to achieve net zero by 2040.

46

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR)

In accordance with the SECR requirements the information below 
summarises our energy usage, associated emissions, energy 
efficiency actions and energy performance.

Regional data
Total reportable energy supplies consumption (kWh) 
for UK operations 

This year, for the first time, the disclosure covers all our operations 
including the Republic of Ireland. 

Carbon emissions are categorised as follows:

Utility and scope

Scope 1: Gaseous and other fuels

Scope 1: Transport (company fleet)

FY23 

FY22 

155,792

727,618

185,387

798,916

•  Scope 1: Consumption and emissions related to direct 

Scope 2: Electricity

12,855,807

13,513,022

combustion of natural gas and fuels utilised for transportation 
operations, such as company vehicle fleets. 

•  Scope 2: Consumption and emissions related to indirect 

emissions relating to the consumption of purchased electricity 
in day-to-day business operations. 

•  Scope 3: Consumption and emissions related to emissions resulting 
from sources not directly owned by us. These relate to grey fleet 
(business travel undertaken in employee-owned vehicles) only.

Group data
Total Group reportable energy supplies consumption (kWh): 

Scope 3: Transport (grey fleet)

127,216

81,962

Total

13,866,433

14,579,287

Total emissions (tCO2e) for UK operations
Utility and scope

Scope 1: Gaseous and other fuels

FY23 

28.44

FY22 

33.96

Scope 1: Transport (company fleet)

169.23

185.25

Scope 2: Electricity

2,514.97

2,869.22

Scope 3: Transport (grey fleet)

29.42

19.01

Utility and scope

Scope 1: Gaseous and other fuels

Scope 1: Transport (company fleet)

FY23 

155,792

733,868

FY22 

Total

2,742.06

3,107.44

185,387

798,916

Intensity metric for UK operations 

Scope 2: Electricity

13,040,136

13,513,022

Scope 3: Transport (grey fleet)

129,005

81,962

Intensity metric
tCO2e/£m revenue

FY23

9.79

FY22 

11.75

Total

14,058,801

14,579,287

Total reportable energy supplies consumption (kWh) for Republic 
of Ireland operations1

Total Group emissions (tCO2e) 
Utility and scope

Scope 1: Gaseous and other fuels

Scope 1: Transport (company fleet)

Scope 2: Electricity

Scope 3: Transport (grey fleet)

Total

Utility and scope

FY23 

28.44

170.67

FY22 

Scope 1: Gaseous and other fuels

33.96

185.25

Scope 1: Transport (company fleet)

Scope 2: Electricity

2,575.87

2,869.22

Scope 3: Transport (grey fleet)

29.87

19.01

Total

2,804.85

3,107.44

FY23 

—

6,250

184,328

1,789

192,367

Group intensity metric
An intensity metric of tCO2e per £m revenue has been applied 
to our annual total emissions and is detailed in the table below.

Intensity metric
tCO2e/£m revenue

FY23

10.01

FY22 

11.75

Total emissions (tCO2e) for Republic of Ireland operations
Utility and scope

Scope 1: Gaseous and other fuels

Scope 1: Transport (company fleet)

Scope 2: Electricity

Scope 3: Transport (grey fleet)

Total

Intensity metric for Republic of Ireland operations

Intensity metric
tCO2e/£m revenue

FY23 

—

1.44

60.90

0.41

62.75

FY23

13.36

1 

 As highlighted above this is the first year our Republic of Ireland 
operations have been included in our disclosure; therefore, no prior year 
data is available.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

47

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportStreamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) continued

Energy efficiency improvements 
We are committed to improving energy efficiency across our 
operations, which is paramount if we are to achieve our Scope 
1 and Scope 2 net-zero targets. In FY23, we implemented 
several energy efficiency measures to reduce our overall energy 
consumption including:

•  Continuing the rollout of LED lighting across our store estate. As at 
year end 67% of our store estate now operates with LED lighting.

•  Began undertaking Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme (ESOS) 

surveys to identify energy efficiency opportunities. The findings of 
these surveys have informed our Scope 1 and 2 net-zero roadmaps. 

We are planning further efficiency improvements in the coming 
year including:

•  Continuing to rollout LED lighting across our store estate.

•  Establishing a new and remodelled store energy efficiency policy. 

•  Developing an energy efficiency behaviour change programme 
for our colleagues across our stores, Distribution Centre and 
Support Centre. 

•  Engaging with our landlords to identify and implement energy 

efficiency opportunities across our store estate. 

Reporting methodology
The above information (including the Scope 1, 2 and 3 consumption 
and CO2e emissions data) has been developed and calculated 
using the GHG Protocol – A Corporate Accounting and Reporting 
Standard (World Business Council for Sustainable Development 
and World Resources Institute, 2004); Greenhouse Gas Protocol – 
Scope 2 Guidance (World Resources Institute, 2015); ISO 14064-1 
and ISO 14064-2 (ISO, 2018; ISO, 2019); Environmental Reporting 
Guidelines: Including Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting 
Guidance (HM Government, 2019).

For our UK operations, UK Government Emissions Factor Database 
2022 version 1 has been used, utilising the published kWh gross 
calorific value (CV) and kgCO2e emissions factors relevant for 
reporting period 01/05/2022–30/04/2023. For our Republic of 
Ireland operations, Sustainable Energy Authority of Ireland (SEAI) 
2022 conversion factors have been used, utilising the kgCO2e 
emission factors for relevant reporting period 1 May 2022 to 30 
April 2023.

Estimations were undertaken to cover missing billing periods for 
properties directly invoiced to The Works. These were calculated 
on a kWh/day pro-rata basis at the meter level. 

Intensity metrics have been calculated using total tCO2e figures. 
Total turnover used for the performance indicator for FY23 was 
£280.1m (FY22: £264.6m).

48

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties

Effective risk management helps 
us identify, evaluate and manage 
the risks which could impact 
the business

Risk management framework
The Board is responsible for ensuring that appropriate risk 
management processes and controls are in place. The Board 
has delegated responsibility for overseeing risk management 
processes and controls to the Audit Committee. Day-to-day 
risk management is the responsibility of the senior management 
team. Further details of the governance structure are set out in 
the Corporate governance report on page 62. 

Risks are identified and assessed using a bottom-up review 
process. Senior management determines the potential risks that 
could affect their areas of responsibility and the likelihood and 
impact. This information is used to create the Group’s primary 
risk register and capture principal risks which are subsequently 
considered by the Audit Committee and the Board. 

Risk appetite
The Board determines the Group’s risk appetite. Where a conflict 
exists between risk management and strategic ambitions, the 
Board seeks to achieve a balance which facilitates the long-term 
success of the Group.

Principal and emerging risks and changes in 
principal risks
The Board conducts a robust assessment of the principal risks facing 
the Group and emerging risks, including those that could threaten the 
operation of its business, future performance or solvency. The Board 
formally reviews the Group’s principal risks at least twice a year. 

A detailed operational risk review was undertaken by the Head of 
Finance during November 2022. This review included discussions 
with members of the Operations Board covering current, principal 
and emerging risks affecting their respective areas of responsibility 
and broader corporate risks. Following this review, the Group’s 
primary risk register and its principal risks and mitigation plans were 
updated, and considered by the Audit Committee and the Board in 
January 2023, March 2023 and July 2023. 

A climate risk workshop, facilitated by INESG, the Group’s specialist 
third-party ESG consultancy, was held in August 2022. Members of 
the Operations Board participated in the workshop which covered: 
an introduction to climate change and climate scenarios; risk 
classification; transition and physical risks identified; and how to 
approach climate change as a material risk to the business. Using 
the outputs from the workshop the Group’s first climate risk register 
was developed and subsequently reviewed and approved by 
the Board in January 2023. Further information in relation to the 
Group’s climate risks is included on pages 37 to 46. 

The principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group as at the 
date of this Annual Report are set out in order of priority on pages 
50 to 53, together with details of how these are currently mitigated. 
The adjacent heatmap illustrates the Board’s assessment of the 
likelihood of the principal risks occurring and the resulting impact, 
after taking into account mitigating actions.

During the year the main changes to the principal risks were as follows:

•  Removal of COVID-19 risk: Given the significantly reduced impact 
of risks associated with COVID-19 this risk is no longer considered 
to be a principal risk.

•  Renaming of ‘Market’ risk: The ‘Market’ risk has been renamed 
‘Design and execution of strategy’, and has been refined to 
reflect the importance of the Group’s strategy and the direct 
correlation between successful strategic execution and market 
performance. This risk has also been assessed as having a high 
priority and ranked accordingly. 

During the year a geopolitical emerging risk was identified. 
Approximately two thirds of the Group’s stock is sourced from 
China and if drastic economic sanctions were to be imposed on 
China this could have a material impact on the Group’s ability to 
obtain stock. Moving the product mix away from goods sourced 
from China could mitigate this risk; however, a significant lead time 
would be required to do this. Currently the probability of this risk 
crystallising is considered to be very low. Accordingly this emerging 
risk will be maintained on our secondary risk register and we will 
continue to monitor it. 

The Group may be exposed to other risks and uncertainties 
not presently known to management, or currently deemed 
less material, that may subsequently have an adverse effect 
on the business. Further, the exposure to each risk will evolve 
as mitigating actions are taken or as new risks emerge or the 
nature of risks change.

Risk heatmap

11

9

10

h
g
H

i

t
c
a
p
m

I

w
o
L

1

3

4

2

5

6

7

8

Low

Likelihood

High

Change from prior year

Increased 

  Decreased 

  Unchanged

Principal risks
1 

 Design and execution of 
strategy (previously ‘Market’ risk)
Economy
Supply chain
IT systems and cyber security

2 
3 
4 
5  Brand and reputation
6 

 Seasonality of sales

7 
8 

People
 Environmental (including 
climate change)

9  Regulation/compliance
10 
11  Business continuity

 Liquidity

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

49

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
Risk management and principal risks and uncertainties continued

Principal and emerging risks and changes in principal risks continued

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

Increased strategic focus on developing the brand and 
increasing customer engagement to further differentiate 
the Group from competitors.

•  Emerging trends monitored by a recently strengthened 
trading team that has a track record of responding to 
changing consumer tastes.

•  Monitor competitors’ propositions and discuss key developments 
at weekly trading meetings and at Board level on a regular basis.

•  Monitor and review customer feedback.

•  Use sales data and online feedback channels to inform 

purchasing and marketing decisions.

•  Flexible lease terms allow the Group to adapt its store 

portfolio (which continues to be highly relevant to customers) 
to suit evolving shopping habits.

•  Ongoing investment in the Group’s online capability ensures 
complementary digital and store propositions, as customers 
increasingly engage with both channels. 

•  Significant investments have been made to date and further 

investment is planned in FY24 to drive operational improvements.

•  Take account of expected impact in the strategic planning 

process, budgets and forecasts. 

•  Control costs while making carefully considered investments 

in certain areas to support growth.

• 

Increase direct sourcing to improve gross margin. While this 
initiative was delayed by COVID-19 in China, momentum 
should increase in FY24.

•  Operate stores on flexible short-term leases to benefit from 

reductions in rents through the rolling renegotiation of leases. 
Store estate can be adapted relatively quickly in the event 
of material local changes in demand.

1. Design and execution of strategy (previously ‘Market’ risk)
The Group generates its revenue from the sale of books, toys 
and games, arts and crafts and stationery.

• 

Although it has a track record of understanding customers’ needs 
for these products, the market is competitive. Customers’ tastes 
and shopping habits can change quickly. Failure to effectively 
predict or respond to changes could affect the Group’s sales 
and financial performance.

Failure to effectively execute the ‘better, not just bigger’ strategy (e.g. due 
to insufficient capacity or inadequate capability) would have an adverse 
impact on the Group’s ability to grow, particularly if the envisaged sales 
growth drivers fail to increase sales. Furthermore achieving increased 
sales growth could be more challenging if consumer confidence is 
impacted by deteriorating economic conditions.

Change from prior year
Increased risk level. The Board believes that the previous risk rating 
needs to increase to reflect the significant impact this risk could have 
on the profitability of the Group and therefore increased the risk rating. 

Link to strategy

2. Economy 
A deterioration in macroeconomic conditions or a reduction in 
consumer confidence could impact customer spending and 
reduce the Group’s revenue and profitability. 

Change from prior year
Increased risk level. Inflation remains high and the cost-of-living 
challenge looks likely to persist for some time. Although we have not 
yet observed any quantifiable effect on our business, this could impact 
consumer spending and, as a result, the Group’s sales. The current 
economic environment, including the following issues, is also causing 
costs to be higher which could impact profitability:

•  Raw materials and energy costs. Our energy rates are hedged in the 
short term, but at higher rates than those which prevailed historically.

•  Continued increases in National Living and Minimum Wages affects the 
business because most of the Group’s colleagues are paid the National 
Minimum or Living Wage.

•  Geopolitical issues, including the Russian invasion of Ukraine, which 

has had direct inflationary effects.

•  FX rates. The pound is now stronger compared with the dollar than 

during certain points in FY23. There is reduced risk in FY24 due to the 
Group’s hedging policies, although we remain indirectly exposed to 
FX rates, through indirect sourcing which represents approximately 
60% of purchases for resale.

•  Freight rates, which have significantly affected our costs in recent 

years, are now at pre-COVID levels, and are not expected 
to represent a threat for the foreseeable future.

Link to strategy

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Enhance our  
online proposition

Optimise our  
store estate

Drive operational  
improvements

50

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

3. Supply chain
The Group uses third parties, including many in Asia, for the supply 
of products. Risks include the potential for supplier failures, risks 
associated with manufacturing and importing goods from overseas, 
potential disruption at various stages of the supply chain and suppliers 
failing to act or operate ethically. 

Failure to execute the restructuring of the supply chain team 
successfully to implement necessary changes to the stock process 
could prevent the right stock getting to the right stores at the right time 
and materially impact sales growth.

Supply chain disruption due to COVID-19 restrictions potentially being 
maintained in certain parts of the world, particularly China, could 
cause disruption to stock availability and cost inflation. Any significant 
increase in geopolitical tensions between the West and China could 
affect the ability to purchase stock.

Due to the Group’s low level of exposure to sales outside the UK risks 
connected with Brexit are low.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

•  Strengthened buying and supply chain teams and further 

investment is ongoing in FY24.

•  Ongoing review of supplier base and diversification and 

change implemented as appropriate to provide flexibility 
and reduce reliance on individual suppliers.

• 

• 

• 

Independent monitoring of suppliers undertaken by  
third-party auditors with local country knowledge and 
an understanding of social and ethical requirements. 

In-house product quality assurance team undertakes product 
testing as part of a product surveillance test programme.

Implement policies that reinforce the Group’s values and 
its commitment to conduct business fairly, ethically and 
with respect to human rights which suppliers are required 
to adhere to.

•  Proactive management of supply chain to ensure stock levels 

are appropriate.

•  Continue to review freight costs (including measures 
to mitigate them) and monitor alternative sourcing 
arrangements where practicable.

4. IT systems and cyber security
The Group relies on key IT systems. Failure to develop and maintain 
these, or any prolonged system performance problems or lack of 
service, could affect the Group’s ability to trade and/or could lead 
to significant fines and reputational damage.

Reliable systems and data integrity are key to the execution of the 
strategy. Ensuring systems and processes are fit for purpose will enable 
the delivery of improvements to the proposition.

Change from prior year
Reduced risk. The Group experienced a cyber security incident at the 
end of March 2022. Actions taken in response to the incident have 
significantly reduced the risk of the business suffering major loss or 
disruption in the event of subsequent attacks.

Link to strategy

•  Modern two-factor authentication for access, combined 

with up-to-date end point detection capabilities (to monitor 
devices and assess unexpected/risky activity) and network 
segmentation, lowers the probability of malicious entry 
and speed of movement of malware across the business.

•  24/7/365 Security Operations Centre, established in FY23, 
monitors and responds to any unusual activities in systems 
or networks.

•  Enhanced working from home capabilities established 
in response to the pandemic have reduced the level of 
dependence on a single-site head office.

•  Regular IT investment strategy review undertaken by the 
Operations Board, including security and infrastructure 
investment programmes.

•  Further strengthened in-house IT capabilities during FY23.

5. Brand and reputation
The Group’s brand is vital to its success. Failure to protect the brand, 
in particular product quality and safety, could result in the Group’s 
reputation, sales and future prospects being adversely affected.

•  Communicate to colleagues our clarified purpose and values.

•  Provide intellectual property guidance and education to 

design and sourcing teams.

Diversity and inclusion issues have become more prominent in customer 
preferences; failure to stock a diverse range of products and ensure 
inclusivity could create reputational damage.

•  Monitor customer product reviews and take appropriate 

action to remove products from sale and take other actions 
as appropriate where quality issues are identified.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk. Developing our brand and increasing customer 
engagement is a strategic aim. In autumn 2022 we launched an 
updated brand to ensure that the visual representation and tone 
of voice of The Works aligns with its purpose and reflects the more 
modern, fun and engaging business we are today.

Link to strategy

• 

In-house product quality assurance team works with suppliers 
to ensure product quality, safety and ethical production. 

•  Conduct third-party technical and ethical audits.

•  Monitor the Group’s ESG responsibilities and implement 

processes to ensure the Group operates in a responsible 
way (see pages 29 to 35).

•  Recruiting a D&I manger to lead our D&I strategy including 

reviewing our product range to ensure inclusivity.

•  Operate brand tracking that provides feedback from 

customers and highlights potential brand damaging issues.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

51

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportRisk management and principal risks and uncertainties continued

Principal and emerging risks and changes in principal risks continued

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

6. Seasonality of sales
The Group generally makes substantially all of its profit in the second 
half of the financial year during the peak Christmas trading period. 
Interruptions to supply, adverse weather or a significant downturn in 
consumer confidence or a failure to successfully execute strategy in this 
period could have a significant impact on the short-term profitability of 
the Group.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

•  Continue to develop the year-round appeal of 

the proposition.

•  Hold weekly trading meetings to ensure that immediate 
action is taken to maximise sales based on current and 
expected trading conditions.

•  Plan rigorously for product proposition, supply chain and 

retail operations to ensure the success of the peak Christmas 
trading period.

7. People
The Group’s success is strongly influenced by the quality of the Board, 
senior management team and staff generally. A lack of effective 
succession planning and development of key colleagues could harm 
future prospects.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

8. Environmental (including climate change)
There is an increased focus on sustainable business from consumers 
and regulators. In our business this applies to products and packaging 
in particular. Failure to respond to these demands could affect the 
Group’s reputation, sales and financial performance. 

Supply chain disruptions due to more extreme weather events created 
as a result of global warming could damage operations, in particular 
the flow of stock which could adversely impact sales. 

There are increased reporting and disclosure requirements relating 
to climate change and environmental impact including new taxes, 
regulation and compliance risks as noted in risk 9 below.

Change from prior year
Increased level of risk. Reporting and disclosure requirements are 
continuing to increase and achievement of the Group’s longer-term 
environmental ambitions are dependent on effective implementation 
of the Group’s sustainability strategy and suppliers taking steps to 
reduce their environmental footprint (see pages 30 and 31).

Link to strategy

•  Discuss and review succession plans at Nomination 

Committee meetings.

•  Establish development programmes to support 

future leaders.

•  Operate the ‘Can Do Academy’ to facilitate training 

and development.

•  Launched a new employee communications and 
engagement platform MyWorks (see page 32).

•  Well-managed search and recruitment processes, together 
with appealing proposition and welcoming culture, enables 
recruitment of high-calibre executives.

• 

Implement a Remuneration Policy designed to ensure 
management incentives support the Group’s long-term 
success for the benefit of all stakeholders, including a 
Long-Term Incentive Plan for Executive Directors and 
restricted share awards for Operations Board members. 
For further details see pages 76 to 77.

•  An ESG steering group meets quarterly and reports to the 

Board and the Operations Board on a regular basis.

• 

Implementing initiatives to reduce our impact on the 
environment (see pages 30 and 31). 

•  Retain specialist third-party ESG consultancy, Inspired 

Energy, to assist in the further development of the 
Group’s environmental strategy and ensure compliance 
with TCFD requirements.

•  Appointed a Sustainability Manager in January 2023 
to lead the development and implementation of our 
environmental strategy.

•  Working with third-party logistics providers to explore and 
invest in energy efficient solutions within the supply chain.

•  Developed a climate risk register (see pages 38 to 45). 

Develop our brand and increase 
customer engagement

Enhance our  
online proposition

Optimise our  
store estate

Drive operational  
improvements

52

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Risk, profile change and link to strategy

Mitigation

9. Regulation/compliance
The Group is exposed to an increasing number of legal and regulatory 
compliance requirements including the Bribery Act, the Modern Slavery 
Act, the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and the Listing 
Rules. Failure to comply with these laws and regulations could lead to 
financial claims, penalties, awards of damages, fines or reputational 
damage which could significantly impact the financial performance 
of the business.

There are extensive and increasingly onerous laws and regulations 
(including reporting and disclosure requirements) surrounding 
climate change and environmental reporting. Failure to comply with 
these could result in financial penalties, legal consequences and/or 
reputational damage.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

•  Oversight of regulatory compliance by Group CFO and 
Company Secretary with support from external advisers.

• 

Implement policies and procedures in relation to both 
mandatory requirements and measures the Group has 
adopted voluntarily (e.g. anti-bribery and corruption, 
adherence to National Living Wage requirements).

•  Operate a Whistleblowing Policy and procedure which 

enable colleagues to confidentially report any concerns 
or inappropriate behaviour.

•  Operate a GDPR Policy which is overseen by a suitably 

experienced data supervisor and monitored by members 
of a GDPR governance monitoring group who meet regularly 
and report key issues to the senior management team.

•  Retain experienced advisers where necessary to cover gaps 

in expertise in the in-house team.

10. Liquidity
Insufficient liquidity available and/or insufficient headroom in banking 
facilities. Potential for breach of banking covenants if financial 
performance is significantly worse than forecast.

Availability of credit insurance to suppliers may be reduced or removed 
resulting in an increased cash requirement.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk. 

Link to strategy

•  Financial forecasts and covenant headroom monitored 

and reported to the Board and the bank monthly.

•  Strategy focuses on driving like-for-like sales and improving 
efficiency, rather than previous store rollout plan, which is a 
less capital intensive strategy.

•  The Group’s bank facility at year end FY23 comprised a 

committed RCF of £30m with an expiry date of 30 November 
2025. Since the Period end, the Group has implemented 
a reduction in the size of the facility, which was undrawn 
throughout most of FY23, to £20.0m, and simultaneously 
extended its term such that it now expires on 30 
November 2026.

•  Careful management of banking relationship increases the 

likelihood of a supportive response in the event that it should 
be needed.

11. Business continuity
Significant disruption to the operation, in particular internal IT systems, 
Support Centre or Distribution Centre, could severely impact the 
Group’s ability to supply stores or fulfil online sales resulting in financial 
or reputational damage.

• 

• 

IT recovery plans fully tested in the response to the March 
2022 cyber security incident.

Implemented new cloud back-ups which improve the 
flexibility of any disaster recovery plan response.

Change from prior year
Unchanged level of risk.

Link to strategy

•  Enhanced business continuity plan in place including 

system recovery. 

•  Subscribe to a cloud-based technology recovery centre 

to improve speed and execution of a recovery.

•  Undertake disaster recovery dry run exercises. Emergency 

generator installed at the Group’s Support Centre to insulate 
the business from the impact of power cuts.

•  Maintain appropriate business interruption insurance cover.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

53

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportFinancial position and bank facilities
At the end of FY23 the Group held net cash at bank of £10.2m 
(FY22: of £16.3m).

After the Period end, the Group extended the term of its bank 
facility by one year and it now expires on 30 November 2026, 
thereby covering the entirety of the viability period. At the same 
time, following a review of the historic utilisation of the facility, the 
Group’s anticipated future cash requirements, and the costs of 
maintaining the facility, the Group requested that HSBC reduce the 
size of the facility from £30m to £20m. 

The facility includes two financial covenants which are tested quarterly: 

1. 

2. 

 The ‘Leverage Ratio’ or level of net debt to LTM (last 12 months’) 
EBITDA must not exceed 2.5 times during the life of the facility.

 The ‘Fixed Charge Cover’ or ratio of LTM EBITDA prior to 
deducting rent and interest, to LTM rent and interest. This 
covenant increases in steps to reflect the expectation of 
progressively improving financial performance during the life 
of the facility, as follows: until October 2023, the ratio must 
be at least 1.20 times; for the following 12 months the ratio 
must be at least 1.25 times, and thereafter at least 1.30 times.

The Group expects to be able to operate and have sufficient 
headroom within these covenants.

Potential impact of risks on financial scenarios 
It is considered unlikely that all the risks described in the Strategic 
report would manifest themselves to adversely affect the business 
at the same time. The Base Case scenario/the Group’s three-
year financial plan, implicitly already takes into account the risks 
described, and assumes that they manifest themselves in a way or 
to an extent that might be considered ‘neutral’.

The Downside Case scenario assumes that there are more severely 
negative effects than in the Base Case. In particular, the Downside 
Case assumptions are that macroeconomic conditions are 
significantly worse, resulting in reduced consumer spending and 
lower sales. It should be noted that the Base Case already takes 
into account the current subdued consumer market conditions. 
The Downside Case assumes that conditions become worse 
still from the second half of the FY24 financial year.

Viability statement

In accordance with Provision 31 of the UK Corporate Governance Code 
(the Code), the Directors have assessed the prospects and viability 
of the Group taking into account the Group’s current position and 
the potential impact of the principal risks documented in this report.

The Directors have used a period of three years to make this 
assessment, a period which they consider to be appropriate 
for the following reasons:

•  Retail market trends evolve rapidly, including the way customers 

shop and the impact of new technologies. The potential 
uncertainty as to how the market may have evolved more than 
three years into the future is considered too great to enable 
plans extending beyond this period to be meaningful.

•  Uncertainty exists in relation to the wider economy and its 

potential impact on consumer demand and shopping habits.

•  The average remaining term of the Group’s property portfolio 

leases is approximately three years.

The text which follows closely reflects the text in Note (1) (b) (i) of the 
financial statements, relating to the preparation of the accounts 
on a going concern basis. The accounts have been prepared on 
a going concern basis, but Note (1) (b) (i) refers to the existence 
of a material uncertainty regarding the availability of borrowing 
facilities in the event that they may be needed under a sensitised 
“severe but plausible” downside case.

The Group has prepared cash flow forecasts for FY24 to FY26, 
referred to as its ‘Base Case’ scenario. In addition, a ‘severe but 
plausible’ ‘Downside Case’ sensitivity has been prepared to 
support the Board’s conclusion regarding viability, by stress testing 
the Base Case to indicate the financial headroom resulting from 
applying more pessimistic assumptions.

In assessing the Group’s viability the Directors have considered:

•  The external environment.

•  The Group’s financial position including the quantum and 
expectations regarding the availability of bank facilities.

•  The potential impact on financial performance of the risks 

described in the Strategic report.

•  The output of the Base Case scenario, which represents the Group’s 
view of the most likely financial performance over the viability period.

•  Measures to maintain or increase liquidity in the event of a 

significant downturn in trading.

•  The resilience of the Group to these risks having a more severe 

impact, evaluated via the Downside Case which shows the impact 
on the Group’s cash flows, bank facility headroom and covenants.

These factors are described below.

External environment
The risks which are considered the most significant relate to the 
economy and the market, specifically their effect on the strength of 
trading conditions, and the Group’s ability to successfully execute 
its strategy. The risk of weaker consumer demand is considered to 
be the greater of these risks currently, due to the continued high 
level of inflation and its potential effect on economic growth and 
consumer spending.

An emerging risk has been noted in relation to the possible effects 
of climate change, but this is not expected to have a material 
financial impact on the Group during the viability period. 

54

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Base Case scenario
The Base Case scenario assumptions reflect the following factors:

•  Store sales (which represent over 85% of total sales) during the 
first part of FY24 are above the Base Case requirement but 
online sales are below it. The Group is implementing plans to 
improve its online profitability in the medium term; in the short 
term, costs relating to the online business are being tightly 
controlled to ensure that they reflect the reduced sales level. 

•  The Base Case gross margin percentage reflects the expected 

full year effect in FY24 of targeted price increases applied 
since the beginning of 2023 and also significantly lower ocean 
container freight costs. These favourable factors are partially 
offset by a less favourable hedged FX rate than in FY23. 

•  Anticipated further inflationary effects, in particular the increase 
in the National Living Wage. In respect of other costs, notably 
property occupancy costs, it is not expected that there will be 
further significant inflationary effects during FY24 and FY25, 
following the significant increases (for example in electricity 
costs) already experienced during FY23.

•  Capital expenditure levels are in line with the Group’s strategic 

plan. A significant proportion of the Group’s capital expenditure 
is discretionary, particularly over a short-term time period. As a 
result, if required, it can therefore be reduced substantially, for 
example, in the event the Group needs to preserve cash. 

•  The anticipated costs of the Group’s net zero climate change 
commitments have been incorporated within the Base Case 
model within the next three years. As set out in the climate 
related disclosures on pages 36 to 46, the impact on the Group’s 
financial performance and position is not expected to be 
material in the short term. 

•  The plan makes provision for dividend payments.

Under the Base Case scenario, the Group expects to make routine 
operational use of its bank facility each year as stock levels are 
increased in September-October, prior to peak sales occurring. 
This is consistent with the normal pattern experienced prior to 
COVID-19. 

The output of the Base Case model scenario indicates that the 
Group has sufficient financial resources to remain viable over the 
three-year period. 

Severe but plausible Downside Case scenario
The Downside Case makes the following assumptions to reflect 
more adverse macroeconomic conditions compared to the 
Base Case:

•  Store LFL sales are assumed to be 5% lower than in the Base 

Case from October 2023 until January 2025.

• 

In this scenario online sales are assumed to be lower than in the 
Base Case during FY24 despite the Group’s attempts to increase 
them, but show recovery in FY25. 

•  The product gross margin assumptions are the same as in 

the Base Case other than in January 2024 when it is lower, to 
allow for the clearance of stock which is assumed would have 
accumulated due to the inability to reduce stock purchases 
immediately in response to the lower sales level.

•  Expected FX requirements are hedged until mid-FY25, and 

freight rates are hedged until the end of 2023. Beyond that time, 
it is not anticipated that there will be any interruption to global 
freight systems as was experienced as a result of the COVID-19 
pandemic, which were a consequence of unique circumstances. 
Other gross margin inputs are relatively controllable, including 
via the setting of selling prices to reflect any systematic changes 
in the cost price of goods bought for resale. 

•  Volume related costs in the Downside Case are lowered where 
they logically alter in a direct relationship with sales levels, 
for example, forecast online fulfilment and marketing costs. 
The model also reflects certain steps which could be taken to 
mitigate the effect of lower sales, depending on management’s 
assessment of the situation at the time. These include 
adjustments to stock purchases, reducing capital expenditure, 
reductions in labour usage, a reduction in discounts allowed 
as part of the Group’s loyalty scheme and the suspension of 
dividend payments. 

•  The combined financial effect of the modified assumptions in 

this scenario compared with the Base Case, during the viability 
assessment period FY24 to FY26, including implementing some 
of the mitigating activities available, would result in:

•  A reduction in store net sales of approximately £63m.

•  A reduction in online net sales of approximately £1m.

•  A reduction to EBITDA of approximately £15m. 

Measures to maintain or increase liquidity in 
circumstances such as are described below
If necessary, mitigating actions can and would be taken in 
response to a significant downturn in trading, such as is described 
below, which would increase liquidity. 

Under this scenario the Group will draw on its bank facility prior to 
Christmas 2023 but, as a result of the mitigating actions that would 
be taken in H2 FY24 in response to a downturn in sales, particularly 
in reducing the value of stock bought for resale, it would not make 
subsequent use of the bank facility.

These include, for example, delaying and reducing stock 
purchases, stock liquidation, reductions in capital expenditure, the 
review of payment terms and the review of dividend levels. Some of 
these potential mitigations have been built into the Downside Case 
model, and some are additional measures that would be available 
in the event of that scenario, or worse, actually occurring. 

The bank facility financial covenants are complied with during 
the pre-Christmas 2023 period when the facility is being used, but 
the forecast indicates that the Fixed Charge covenant will not be 
complied with throughout FY25, although at this time the facility is 
not expected to be in use under this scenario. 

On the basis of this Downside Case scenario with the ‘severe but 
plausible’ set of assumptions as described, the business would continue 
to have adequate resources to continue in operation on a viable basis.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

55

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportConclusion regarding viability
Having considered the possibilities modelled under the scenarios 
described above, including the Board’s assessment of the 
likelihood that each scenario transpires, and the likelihood that 
the Group would be able to take actions to successfully mitigate 
the effects should such events occur, the Board is satisfied that 
the Group can maintain its financial commitments. The Directors 
therefore confirm they have a reasonable expectation that the 
Group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities 
as they fall due over the three-year viability assessment period.

Viability statement continued

Severe but plausible Downside Case scenario continued
However, the cash headroom at certain quarterly covenant 
testing points in FY25 and FY26 is limited, and there are reasonably 
plausible scenarios in which this headroom could be eroded and 
create a borrowing requirement. For example, if sales decreased 
by a further 1% during the going concern period (which covers the 
earlier part of the viability assessment period) compared with the 
Downside Case, a small borrowing requirement could arise. 

The Group has a strong relationship with its bank, HSBC, and has 
a recent track record of working collaboratively with the bank 
to resolve potential covenant issues, for example, a waiver was 
agreed by HSBC in 2021 as noted in the Group’s FY21 Annual Report. 
Despite this strong relationship with the bank and the recent evidence 
of successfully managing comparable situations, if a borrowing 
requirement arose when the financial covenants are not complied 
with, there is a risk that the Group would not be able to utilise its 
borrowing facilities if required. 

The Directors believe that, should such a situation arise in practice, 
it would have time before a potential breach to mitigate further, 
and potentially to make arrangements with the bank, as has occurred 
previously, to adjust the covenant levels to prevent a breach. 
Furthermore, the Group has successfully managed through 
challenging conditions during the recent COVID-19 pandemic, 
and the Directors believe it unlikely that comparably challenging 
conditions will be experienced during the forecast period, despite 
the concerns regarding the current macroeconomic conditions. 
Nevertheless, despite the Directors’ confidence in relation to these 
matters, there is no certainty as to whether the mitigating actions 
would provide the level of liquidity required in the time available to 
implement them, nor whether the bank would make adjustments to 
the financial covenants.

56

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Non-financial and sustainability information statement 

In accordance with Sections 414CA and 414CB of the 
Companies Act 2006 the information below is provided to 
help our stakeholders understand our position in relation 
to key non-financial and sustainability matters. The further 
information highlighted below is incorporated by cross-reference. 

Key matter

Policies and standards that govern 
our approach

Further information

Environment and 
climate-related 
financial disclosures

• 

 Sustainability strategy.

Employees

•  Health & Safety Policy.

•  ESG review: pages 29 to 35.

•  TCFD statement: pages 36 to 46.

•  Our stakeholders: page 26.

•  ESG review: pages 32 to 34.

•  Dignity & Respect Policy.

•  Our stakeholders: pages 26 and 27.

•  Equality, Diversity & Inclusion Policy.

•  Remuneration report: pages 73 to 85.

•  Whistleblowing Policy.

•  Colleague handbook.

•  Social Media Policy.

•  Disciplinary & Grievance Policies.

•  Data protection.

•  Corporate governance report: pages 62 to 65.

Respect for 
human rights

•  Modern Slavery Statement.

•  ESG review: page 35.

•  Ethical Trading Code of Conduct.

•  Corporate governance report: pages 62 to 65.

•  Whistleblowing Policy.

Social

•  Sustainability strategy.

•  Data protection.

•  Bribery Policy.

•  Whistleblowing Policy.

Anti-corruption and 
anti-bribery

Additional disclosures

•  ESG review: pages 30 to 34.

•  Our stakeholders: pages 26 and 27.

•  ESG review: page 35.

•  Corporate governance report: page 63.

•  Business model: pages 14 and 15.

•  Key performance indicators: page 18.

•  Principal risks: pages 49 to 53.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

57

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportChair’s governance introduction

The Board is fully committed to 
implementing the highest standards 
of corporate governance. 

Dear shareholder
I am delighted to present our Corporate governance report for 
the year ended 30 April 2023, which sets out how our governance 
framework has operated and developed during the course 
of the year.

The Board remains fully committed to implementing the highest 
standards of corporate governance, and I am pleased to report 
that it has applied the principles of the 2018 UK Corporate 
Governance Code in so far as it applies to smaller listed companies 
(below the FTSE 350).

The Company’s performance in FY23 has continued to be impacted 
by the uncertain economic environment, and in particular concerns 
around the cost of living, as well as ongoing (but reducing) effects 
of supply chain disruption due to the Covid-19 pandemic. The 
lingering effects of the cyber security incident towards the end 
of FY22 also affected the business’ operations.

During the year the Company’s leadership team and structure 
have continued to evolve and we have continued to make 
operational improvements to ensure that the business is run in the 
most efficient and cost-effective way, including through proposed 
changes to the store labour model which were reviewed by the 
Board during the year.

As a Board, we have also devoted time to monitoring initiatives 
to support our people and culture. This has included updates on 
our employee engagement survey, and progress against actions 
arising from it, as well as receiving a detailed talent review covering 
various workstreams to support the development of our colleagues.

Our governance framework has also been further strengthened. 
In particular, in line with our commitment to reduce our impact on 
the environment and implement the TCFD recommendations, we 
have increased our focus on environmental and climate-related 
matters. In setting our emission reduction targets to achieve our 
net-zero ambitions (which are described in more detail on page 
30) the Board has spent a significant amount of time discussing, 
challenging management on, and ultimately approving the 
approach adopted.

58

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

Drive operational  
improvements

Site visit to iForce 
Managing a cost-effective and efficient fulfilment process 
is vital to the delivery of the Group’s ability to maintain a 
competitive value offering online. Given the importance of 
this process, in early October 2022 the Board held its meeting 
at the iForce distribution centre in Rugby (the site from which 
the majority of the Group’s online channel sales are fulfilled). 

The visit included a tour of the iForce operation, and the 
opportunity to see in action the Company’s investment in 
an automated packing machine and robots to improve the 
efficiency of the stock picking operation. Board members 
were also able to engage directly with the Company’s key 
contacts at iForce, enabling them to assess the strength of 
the supplier relationship and understand the challenges and 
improvement opportunities to support the efficient delivery 
of online purchases to customers.

  Read more about our strategy on pages 16 and 17

Image TBC

Our programme of Operations Board member presented ‘deep 
dives’ at our scheduled Board meetings continues to work well 
in both ensuring that the Board is kept well informed of progress 
against key strategic and operational projects, as well as providing 
opportunities to engage directly with senior management and their 
direct reports. During FY23, ‘deep-dives’ have focused in particular 
on IT projects and security (with the Board keen to oversee 
progress to enhance our IT security infrastructure following the 
cyber attack last year), and ESG and net zero (as noted above). We 
have also devoted significant time to projects aimed at improving 
stock management processes, including the review of the Group’s 
operational structure, enhancement of its merchandising functions, 
and proposals to enhance underlying systems. 

I led an internal Board evaluation process during the year which 
is summarised on page 64. I am delighted to report that the 
unanimous conclusion was that the Board dynamics are working 
well, and that the Board, its Committees and individual Directors 
are operating effectively. We have identified some actions to 
take forward in FY24 to ensure that we continue to support 
management and the business in the best way possible. These 
include allocating additional time for store visits and strategy 
review, improving the visibility and understanding of the Board 
across the business, and continuing to review the information 
included in monthly reporting to the Board. 

I have also enjoyed increased levels of direct engagement with 
our shareholders during the year including participating in a 
number of face-to-face meetings. These interactions are extremely 
beneficial; they provide a deeper understanding of what really 
matters to our shareholders, and this invaluable information better 
equips the Board when considering the shareholder context in its 
discussions and debates. 

I look forward to meeting shareholders at our forthcoming Annual 
General Meeting (AGM), which will be held on 4 October 2023. 

Carolyn Bradley 
Chair 
30 August 2023

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

59

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
Board of Directors

An experienced team

N

R

A

N

R

A

N

R

Carolyn Bradley
Chair and Non-Executive Director

Harry Morley
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

Catherine Glickman
Independent Non-Executive Director

Date of appointment
September 2021

Committee membership
Chair of the Nomination Committee and 
member of the Remuneration Committee.

Relevant skills and experience
•  Extensive retail, marketing and 

commercial experience in executive and 
non-executive roles including 25 years at 
Tesco plc where her roles included Group 
Brand Director, UK Marketing Director and 
Chief Operating Officer for Tesco.com.

•  Significant consumer experience 

including leading Tesco’s Clubcard 
loyalty scheme, the ‘Every Little Helps’ 
service campaign and the grocery home 
delivery business. 

Current external appointments
Senior Independent Director and Chair of 
the Remuneration Committee of SSP Group 
plc and Non-Executive Director of Majid 
Al Futtain Retail LLC and The Mentoring 
Foundation. 

Date of appointment
July 2018

Committee membership
Chair of the Audit Committee 
and member of the Nomination 
and Remuneration Committees.

Relevant skills and experience
•  Extensive retail and consumer 

experience, including as co-founder 
of Tragus Holdings Ltd, owner of Café 
Rouge and Bella Italia restaurant 
chains and a Non-Executive Director 
of Bibendum Wine Holdings Ltd.

•  Significant financial and commercial 
expertise as Chief Financial Officer of 
Tragus Holdings Ltd and CEO of Armajaro 
Asset Management LLP. He also held 
senior management roles at P&O.

•  Chartered accountant.

Current external appointments
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Audit Committee at JD Wetherspoon plc, 
a Trustee of the Ascot Authority and from 1 
September 2023, a Non-Executive Director 
of Schroder UK Mid Cap Fund plc. Director 
of Cadogan Group Limited and two related 
subsidiary companies. 

Date of appointment
July 2018

Committee membership
Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee and member of the 
Audit and Nomination Committees.

Relevant skills and experience
•  Significant retail experience as Group HR 
Director of Genus plc, having previously 
held the same role at Tesco plc where she 
led retail management development and 
customer service training during a period 
of significant expansion in the UK and 
overseas. Prior to this she held positions 
at Somerfield and Boots.

•  Extensive people and reward expertise 

having developed reward structures that 
align leadership motivation with strategy 
at both Genus plc and Tesco plc.

Current external appointments
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee at Renishaw plc.

60

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Committee membership
Audit Committee

A

N

R

Nomination Committee

Remuneration Committee

Chair of Committee

Experience

Retail 

Consumer

Finance

PLC

100%

100%

100%

60%

Tenure

  1–3 years 

  3–6 years 

4040+
40%6060+

Gender 

  Female 

  Male  

60%

40%

60%

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer

Date of appointment
January 2020

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer

Date of appointment
May 2021

Committee membership
None

Committee membership
None

Relevant skills and experience
•  Significant financial, retail and 

commercial expertise, including as Chief 
Financial Officer of The Works, and, prior 
to that, as Commercial Director at Card 
Factory plc where he was responsible for 
the commercial function (buying, space 
and merchandising) and leadership of 
the commercial finance team. He played 
a key role in the successful IPO of Card 
Factory in 2014 and its subsequent 
growth and evolution as a listed business.

•  Chartered Accountant, having started 
his career at PwC where he spent eight 
years working in the audit and corporate 
finance departments.

•  Joined The Works as CFO in April 2018, 
overseeing the IPO and serving as an 
Executive Director of TheWorks.co.uk plc 
since the IPO in July 2018.

Current external appointments
None

Relevant skills and experience
•  Significant financial and retail expertise 
having initially joined The Works on an 
interim basis as CFO in June 2020. Prior 
to that, over 20 years’ experience of 
working in retail, most recently as CFO 
of Bonmarché Holdings plc, where he 
led a highly effective finance function, 
and completed several significant 
transactions, including a private equity 
backed management buyout, and 
two stock market listings. Previously he 
worked at Peacocks, the discount retailer, 
and chartered accountants EY.

•  Chartered accountant.

Current external appointments
None

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

61

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report+
60
60
+
+
N
N
+
40
40
+
+
N
N
Corporate governance report

UK Corporate Governance Code – compliance statement
The Company has applied all of the principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) as they apply to it as a ‘smaller company’ 
(below FTSE 350) and has complied with all relevant provisions of the Code during the year. Full details of the Code are available at 
www.frc.org.uk. Details explaining how the Company has applied the principles of the Code can be found throughout this Annual Report.

Governance structure

Board

•  Overall leadership of the Group.

•  Sets strategy, purpose, values and culture.

•  Oversees and embeds sound principles of corporate 

•  Approves major contracts.

governance.

•  Ensures appropriate policies, procedures and controls are in 

place to support effective risk management and performance 
against agreed financial and operational metrics.

•  Approves business plan and budget. 

•  Sets and oversees environment and climate strategy and targets.

Certain matters are reserved to the Board and formally documented in a Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board. 
The Board has delegated a number of its responsibilities to the Audit Committee, Nomination Committee and Remuneration 
Committee. The Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board and each Committee’s terms of reference are available at 
https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/corporate-governance. 

Audit Committee

Nomination Committee

Remuneration Committee

•  Reviews annual and interim financial 

statements.

• 

Identifies and nominates appointments 
to the Board.

•  Reviews accounting policies and 

•  Reviews Non-Executive Directors’ time 

financial reporting and regulatory 
compliance.

•  Reviews internal control system.

commitments.

•  Oversees succession planning.

•  Sets Remuneration Policy.

•  Determines Executive Director and 
senior management remuneration.

•  Approves annual bonus plan and 
Long-Term Incentive Plan targets.

•  Reviews size and composition 

•  Reviews workforce remuneration policies 

•  Monitors processes for internal audit, 
risk management and external audit.

of the Board.

•  Promotes diversity.

•  Monitors independence 

of external auditor.

•  Oversees relationship with 

external auditor.

•  Undertakes annual performance 

evaluation of the Board, its Committees 
and individual Directors.

and practices.

•  Ensures that provisions regarding 

disclosure of remuneration are fulfilled.

  Read more on pages 66 to 69

  Read more on pages 70 to 72

  Read more on pages 73 to 85

•  Reporting to the CEO, responsible for the day-to-day trading activities of the Group and implementing the strategy agreed 

by the Board. 

•  Monitors performance against financial and operational targets and manages risk. 

Information about the Operations Board is available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/our-leadership.

Operations Board

How the Board operates
The Board meets at least ten times per year, and its activity at 
each meeting is planned in accordance with a formal schedule of 
activity which is updated on a rolling basis and is approved by the 
Board. This ensures that it receives appropriate information at the 
appropriate time, and that all key operational, financial reporting 
and governance matters are discussed during the year. In addition 
to standing items, agendas incorporate sufficient flexibility to allow 
specific areas of focus to be considered as and when required, and 
for store or Distribution Centre visits to be incorporated into the 
annual meeting activity. The schedule includes regular ‘deep-dive’ 
presentations from Operations Board members on specific areas 
of their responsibility, which increase the Non-Executive Directors’ 
understanding of key operational initiatives and challenges and 
provide the opportunity for senior executives to meet and discuss 
their areas of responsibility with the Board.

upcoming announcements, share dealing requests and statutory 
or regulatory filings, and regulatory or legislative developments 
which may impact the Company. Separate papers are prepared to 
support any specific matters requiring Board decision or approval, 
or to provide updates on actions raised at previous meetings.

The Non-Executive Directors provide ongoing feedback to the 
CEO and CFO on the content of papers to ensure they continue to 
support effective debate and decision making by the Board.

All Directors have direct access to the Operations Board members 
and other senior managers should they require additional 
information on any of the items to be discussed at Board meetings. 
The Board and the Audit Committee also receive regular and 
specific reports to enable monitoring of the effectiveness of the 
Company’s systems of internal control.

To support consistency of information, a Board pack is circulated 
in advance of each meeting. It includes summary reports from the 
CEO, the CFO and each of the other Operations Board members, 
as well as underlying supporting data and metrics. The Company 
Secretary also prepares a standard format report for each 
meeting to ensure the Board is kept up to date on recent and 

Minutes of all Board and Committee meetings are taken by the 
Company Secretary and circulated to Directors for approval as soon 
as practicable following the meetings. Specific actions arising from 
meetings are recorded both in the minutes and on separate action 
logs, thereby facilitating the effective communication of actions to 
those responsible and allowing the Board to monitor progress.

62

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

Composition, independence and attendance
There were no changes to the Board during FY23, and it therefore 
continues to be comprised of five Directors (including the Chair). 
The Board (on the recommendation of the Nomination Committee) 
continues to determine that both of the Non-Executive Directors 
(Catherine Glickman and Harry Morley) are independent, and 
therefore, excluding the Chair, half of the Board comprises 
independent Directors in compliance with provision 11 of the Code.

Individual Director attendance at scheduled Board and Committee 
meetings (where they are a member) is set out in the table below: 

The key matters the Board focused on during the year are detailed in 
the table below. In addition the standing agenda for each scheduled 
Board meeting includes discussion of the information contained 
within the Board pack circulated in advance of each meeting (see 
previous page).

Topic

Activity

Strategy

•  Mid-year progress review against strategic objectives.

•  Approved investment in stock transformation 
(including review of operational structure and 
enhancement of the merchandising function).

Board
meetings
held/
attended

Audit
Committee
meetings
held/
attended

Remuneration
Committee
meetings
held/
attended

Nomination
Committee
meetings
held/
attended

11/11

11/11

11/11

11/11

11/11

N/A

N/A

N/A

4/4

4/4

4/4

N/A

N/A

4/4

4/4

2/2

N/A 

N/A 

2/2

2/2

Director

Carolyn Bradley 

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge 

Catherine Glickman

Harry Morley

All Directors are expected to attend all meetings of the Board and 
any Committees of which they are members, and to devote sufficient 
time to the Company’s affairs to fulfil their duties as Directors. The 
Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment anticipate that 
each Non-Executive Director will need to commit a minimum of two 
days per month to the Company but clarify that more time may be 
required. In addition, the Non-Executive Directors are expected to 
commit appropriate preparation time ahead of each meeting.

Where Directors are unable to attend a meeting, they are 
encouraged to submit any comments on papers or matters to 
be discussed to the Chair in advance to ensure that their views 
are recorded and taken into account during the meeting.

Roles and division of responsibilities
There have been no changes to the roles and responsibilities of 
the members of the Board during the year. As previously reported, 
there is a clear division of responsibilities between the Chair and 
the CEO (with the Chair’s primary role being to lead the Board and 
ensure its independence and effectiveness, and the CEO’s primary 
role being the day-to-day management and leadership of the 
Company). Harry Morley is the Senior Independent Director, and his 
duties in that role include acting as a sounding board for the Chair, 
being available as an additional point of contact for shareholders, 
and leading the evaluation of the Chair’s performance.

The Company Secretary supports the Board and each of the three 
Board Committees, and attends all meetings. The Company Secretary 
is available to all the Directors to advise on company law, governance 
and best practice, whilst assisting the Board in ensuring that the 
correct policies, processes and information are tabled for discussion, 
noting or approval at the correct point in time throughout the year.

Board activities during the year
The Board met formally on 11 scheduled occasions during the year. It 
also undertook three site visits. In October 2022 the Directors visited 
the Group’s third-party fulfilment partner’s (iForce) distribution centre 
in Rugby (see page 59) and in November 2022 its Watford Atria 
store. In April 2023 the Board also undertook a tour of the Group’s 
Distribution Centre (co-located within its head office at Boldmere 
House) to see the new pick matrix that has been introduced to 
improve the efficiency of the store replenishment process. 

In addition to scheduled meetings, the Board also met on two 
separate occasions by video conference at short notice to review 
trading performance and to deal with final approval of the FY22 
results announcement and Annual Report.

Financial and 
reporting 

•  Reviewed and approved the FY24 budget.

•  Reviewed and approved the half-year and 

full-year financial statements.

•  Approved the Group tax strategy.

People 
and culture 

•  Received an update on Company culture and 
reviewed a summary of key workforce policies 
and procedures.

•  Reviewed employee engagement survey.

•  Received detailed talent review, and update on 
workstreams to support colleague development 
and internal succession.

•  Reviewed proposed changes to store 

labour model.

Shareholder 
engagement

•  Received regular updates from CEO and 
CFO on their engagement with analysts 
and institutional investors.

ESG

Risk  
management

•  Discussed feedback from the Chair’s meeting 

with investors during the year.

•  Approved appointment of Singer Capital 

as corporate broker.

•  Reviewed the Group’s carbon balance sheet 
and approved methodology for assessing 
Scope 3 emissions.

•  Agreed net-zero strategy and targets.

•  Reviewed climate-related risks and opportunities 

facing the business.

•  Received updates on development of the 

diversity and inclusion strategy, and approved 
the updated Board Diversity Policy.

•  Reviewed the Group’s risk register and internal 

controls structure.

•  Received regular updates on internal financial 

control improvements.

•  Reviewed detailed progress reports on steps 

being taken to enhance IT security infrastructure 
following last year’s cyber security incident.

•  Reviewed and proposed amendments to the 

Group’s policy relating to bribery and corruption.

Governance •  Reviewed the results of the Board evaluation, 

and agreed an action plan for FY24.

•  Reviewed various governance policies, including 

the Disclosure Policy, Whistleblowing Policy, 
Share Dealing Code and Board Diversity Policy.

•  Reviewed and approved changes to the 
Board’s Schedule of Matters Reserved 
and its Committees’ terms of reference.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

63

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
Corporate governance report continued

Training and development
The efficient and effective operation of the Board depends on the 
ability of individual Directors (and in particular the Non-Executive 
Directors) to bring the benefit of their own business knowledge 
and experience. Ensuring that all Directors have an in-depth 
understanding of the Company’s own operations is an important 
element in enabling the benefit of that experience, and we seek 
to support this understanding through the detailed materials 
circulated in advance of Board meetings, as well as collective and 
individual Director site visits or days out in stores, which are usually 
accompanied by different members of the Operations Board.

We also expect our Directors to keep themselves up to date in 
relation to developments in regulation and corporate governance 
best practice. As highlighted above the Company Secretary 
ensures that the Board is briefed on forthcoming legal and 
regulatory developments, and Directors are encouraged to attend 
externally facilitated seminars, webinars and workshops to develop 

Process

Discussions and output

their knowledge and experience in particular areas relevant to their 
role with the business.

Evaluation and effectiveness
In accordance with provision 21 of the Code, the Board considered 
whether it would be appropriate to conduct an externally facilitated 
evaluation process during the year. Given the size of the Board, the 
relative cost of an externally facilitated process, and a desire to allow 
the Executive Directors to maintain focus on managing the business in 
a challenging environment without unnecessary distraction, the Board 
agreed that an internal evaluation process would again be the best 
approach. However, to gather more qualitative feedback the Board 
agreed that the process should move away from a questionnaire-
based approach to one led by the Chair and involving face-to-face 
conversations with each member of the Board. Information about 
the FY23 evaluation process, including its findings and key actions, is 
summarised in the table below:

1.   PLC Board 
interviews

Carolyn Bradley met with each member of the Board. Discussions focused on:

•  Board dynamics.

•  Meeting content and process.

•  Governance and activity programme.

•  Committee performance.

• 

Individual Director performance.

2.   Operations 

Gavin Peck led a group discussion with the Operations Board seeking feedback on:

Board 
feedback 
session 

•  Their interactions with Board Directors (through one-to-one meetings or their attendance at PLC Board meetings).

•  Broader business/colleague perception and understanding of the Board’s role.

•  The culture promoted by the Board.

3.  Feedback 

Summary feedback compiled by Carolyn Bradley was discussed at the April 2023 Board meeting. Key findings were:

•  Universal agreement that Board dynamics are good.

•  Meetings are effective, with appropriate content, papers and governance.

•  Appropriate time is spent on strategy.

• 

Interactions with Operations Board are positive and well received.

•  Committees are well chaired and operate effectively.

•  More time could be spent in stores and monitoring trends and developments in the retail sector.

•  Challenge from the Non-Executive Directors is appropriate and well received.

4.  Next steps

The Board agreed the following actions:

•  Hold an extended two-day meeting each year to accommodate store visits alongside a strategy review.

•  Consider the level of detail required in Operations Board reports to the Board, including whether they could 

be more succinct. 

•  Consider ways to deepen broader business understanding/knowledge of the Board and its role.

Progress made in addressing some of the actions identified in the FY22 evaluation process is summarised below:

Key matter

Purpose, values  
and strategy

Actions

Progress in FY23

•  Develop an overall execution plan encompassing 

all elements of the Company’s strategy. 

•  Regular updates provided by the CEO 
on progress against strategic pillars.

•  Create a dashboard to monitor and measure 

progress against relevant KPIs.

Stakeholders 

•  Build on recent good stakeholder engagement 

•  Continued focus on colleague engagement.

with both colleagues and shareholders. 

•  Develop and support the Company’s ESG 
programme, at Board and executive level, 
recognising that the programme requires 
more definition and data provision.

The Board and succession

• 

Increase Nomination Committee focus 
on succession planning at Board and 
executive levels.

•  Create more opportunities for the Board to 

meet rising stars and future executive leaders. 

64

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

•  Chair has met with a number of shareholders 

in the year.

•  Significant focus on ESG (particularly climate 

and net zero) in the year.

•  Additional time devoted to succession planning 

during the year.

•  Operational ‘deep-dive’ presentations to the 
Board expanded to include presentations by 
Operations Board members’ direct reports.

Appointment and election
The Board considers all Directors to be effective and committed 
to their roles and to have sufficient time to perform their duties. 
In accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association 
(articles), all members of the Board will be offering themselves 
for reappointment at the Company’s AGM on 4 October 2023. 

All of the Directors have service agreements or letters of 
appointment and the details of their terms are set out below.

Executive Director service contracts

Name

Position

Date of
service
agreement

Notice 
period by 
Company
(months)

Notice 
period by
 Director
(months)

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

CEO 19 July 2018

CFO 14 May 2021

12

6

12

6

The Non-Executive Directors (including the Chair) do not have 
service contracts, but are instead appointed by letters of 
appointment. Each of the Non-Executive Directors and the Chair 
are appointed for a three-year term, subject to their annual 
reappointment by shareholders at the AGM.

Non-Executive Director appointments

Name

Carolyn Bradley

Date of
appointment

Appointment letter 
commencement 
date

Unexpired
 term as at 4
October 2023

30 September 
2021

30 September 
2021

12 months

Catherine Glickman

19 July 2018

26 July 2022

22 months

Harry Morley

19 July 2018

26 July 2022

22 months

Conflicts of interest and external appointments
In accordance with the Board’s approved procedure relating to 
the disclosure of any conflicts or potential conflicts of interest, all 
Directors have confirmed that they did not have any conflicts of 
interest with the Group during the year. None of the Directors took 
on any new external appointments during FY23.

Whistleblowing
The Company has in place procedures by which colleagues may, 
in confidence, raise concerns relating to possible improprieties 
in matters of financial reporting, financial control or any other 
matter. The Whistleblowing Policy applies to all colleagues across 
the Group, and the Board is responsible for monitoring the policy 
and ensuring that the arrangements are effective. A review of the 
Whistleblowing Policy and arrangements was initiated in the latter 
part of FY23, and while the Board continues to be of the view that 
existing arrangements are appropriate it is anticipated that the 
language of the policy will be updated in FY24 to bring it in line 
with that of other workforce policies. 

Stakeholder engagement
The CEO and Operations Board members are responsible for 
the day-to-day management of stakeholder relationships and 
ensuring that stakeholder issues are appropriately reported to the 
Board. Further information on how we engage with stakeholders 
is set out on pages 26 and 27. The Directors recognise their duty 
under Section 172 of the Companies Act to consider the interests 
of stakeholders, and the nature of our business means that the 
interests of our colleagues, customers and suppliers are at the front 
of mind in the Board’s decision-making process. The Company’s 
Section 172 statement is included on page 28.

Engagement with the workforce
The Board recognises that the Company’s culture underpins its 
long-term success. Accordingly, assessing and monitoring the 
culture that is being fostered across the Group forms part of the 
Board’s activity schedule. This assessment is conducted through 
a combination of reviews of the output of our regular employee 
engagement surveys, updates from the People Director through 
our programme of Operations Board members’ ‘deep-dive’ 
presentations to the Board, formal reporting on people related 
statistics in the monthly Board pack, and Board members’ own 
interactions with colleagues across the Group (including through 
Board or individual Director site visits). The Board also regularly 
reviews workplace policies and practices.

As part of its review of Code compliance during the year, the 
Board again assessed the various methods by which the Directors 
engage with the wider workforce. The Board continues to be of the 
view that the combination of existing engagement mechanisms 
ensures that the Board is appropriately informed about, and 
understands, workforce views, and therefore this approach 
continues to appropriately address the requirement to engage 
with the workforce under provision 5 of the Code. The Board 
does not currently intend to adopt one of the three workforce 
engagement methods suggested in that provision, but will continue 
to monitor its workforce (and wider stakeholder) engagement 
mechanisms to ensure they operate effectively.

Relations with shareholders
The Board recognises the importance of explaining financial 
results and key strategic and operational developments in the 
business to the Company’s shareholders, and of understanding 
any shareholder concerns. 

Ensuring a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders and receiving 
reports on the views of shareholders are matters reserved for the 
Board. Day-to-day responsibility for investor relations is delegated 
to the CEO and the CFO, who are supported by the Company’s 
retained financial PR advisers, and its corporate brokers. As part 
of its investor relations programme, the Group aims to maintain 
a dialogue with its shareholders, including institutional investors, 
to discuss issues relating to the performance of the Group. 
Information and investor news is also made available via the 
Company’s website (https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/investors). 

The Chair has also met with a number of shareholders during FY23.

Investor relations is a standing item on the Board’s agenda. The 
Executive Directors and the Chair provide feedback directly to the 
Board on key matters arising in their meetings with shareholders, 
ensuring that all Directors are aware of shareholder views. These 
matters are discussed and assessed by the Board before deciding 
on whether any further action or engagement is required.

The Company’s AGM provides a further opportunity for 
shareholders to engage directly with the Board. The Company’s 
2023 AGM will take place at 9am on 4 October 2023 at Boldmere 
House, Faraday Avenue, Hams Hall Distribution Park, Coleshill, 
Birmingham B46 1AL. This Annual Report and financial statements 
and Notice of the AGM will be made available to shareholders 
in accordance with the required notice periods.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

65

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportAudit Committee report

Dear shareholder
I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s report for the 
52-week period ended 30 April 2023. The report sets out the 
Committee’s work in relation to financial reporting, internal 
control and audit, risk management and oversight of the 
external audit process.

Timing of the FY23 results
The FY23 results have been published later than originally intended. 
The delay was due to significant additional work being undertaken, 
principally in relation to asset impairment charges and related 
impacts on IFRS 16 calculations. As well as affecting the FY23 result, 
this also entailed the restatement of comparative figures for prior 
periods. Whilst the delay has been frustrating, we highlight that 
the issues in question have not affected the Board’s assessment 
of the underlying performance of the business (for example, 
as represented by the EBITDA) and had no direct cash impact. 
Information regarding the restatements is included in note 14 of the 
financial statements.

Composition of Committee, role and main 
activities in FY23
The Committee’s members, its role and main activities are detailed 
in the adjacent panel. I am a qualified chartered accountant. I 
also have an executive background in finance roles and am an 
experienced audit committee chair. The Board is satisfied that I 
have recent and relevant financial experience as recommended 
under provision 24 of the Code. Both Catherine Glickman and 
I have significant knowledge and experience of the retail and 
leisure sectors; accordingly the Board is also satisfied that the 
Committee has competence relevant to the sector in which the 
Company operates.

Meetings and attendees
The Committee met on four occasions during the year, and has 
met three times since the year end. All meetings were attended by 
all members of the Committee as shown in the table on page 63.

The external auditor has the right to attend meetings, and the 
Board Chair, Executive Directors and Head of Finance typically 
attend each meeting by invitation. Other members of the 
management team may also attend meetings by invitation from 
time to time. 

Outside of the formal meeting programme, the Audit Committee 
Chair maintains a dialogue with key individuals involved in the 
Company’s governance, including the Chair, the CEO, the CFO 
and the external auditor. At least twice per year, the Committee 
also meets the external auditor without members of the 
management team present.

Members
•  Harry Morley (Chair)

•  Catherine Glickman

Number of meetings held in the year:
4

Committee’s role and responsibilities
•  Reviews the annual financial statements, including 

accounting estimates and judgements.

•  Assists the Board with the discharge of its responsibilities 
in relation to the external audit including audit scope, 
external auditor appointment and the extent of non-audit 
work undertaken by the external auditor.

•  Reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control 

and risk management systems.

•  Monitors the Group’s internal audit arrangements. 

Main activities during FY23
•  Assessing the effectiveness of the Group’s internal 

control framework.

•  Monitoring stock control improvements. Reviewing and 

challenging management’s assessment of the Company’s 
principal risks.

•  Consideration of the  viability and going concern 

assessment and store impairment. 

Terms of reference: 

Available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/
corporate-governance

66

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Activity during the year
The Committee’s activities during the year are set out in the table below. In addition to its ongoing oversight of the Company’s external 
financial reporting, the Committee spent time on:

•  Assessing the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control framework and ensuring it continues to develop to meet the evolving needs 

of the business and adapts to align with new systems and processes. 

•  Monitoring stock control improvements.

•  Reviewing and challenging management’s assessment of the Company’s principal risks given continued economic uncertainty and the 

need to assess and manage climate-related risks and opportunities.

Audit Committee activity in FY23
Financial statements and reporting

•  Reviewed significant accounting estimates and 
judgements in connection with full-year and 
half-year financial statements.

•  Reviewed half-year and full-year financial 

statements and associated narrative reporting, 
and recommended approval of them by 
the Board.

•  Reviewed scenario analysis in support of going 
concern and long-term viability assessments.

Risk management and internal control systems

•  Received updates on workstreams to improve stock control systems and processes.

•  Reviewed internal financial controls, and progress against agreed 

improvement plans.

•  Received regular updates on actions to strengthen finance team capability.

•  Reviewed delegated authorities.

•  Reviewed and challenged risk register, principal risks facing the business, 

and process for identifying emerging risks.

External audit relationship

Governance and other matters

•  Received and reviewed FY23 audit plan 

•  Approved FY23 tax strategy.

and strategy.

•  Reviewed payment practices reporting and performance against supplier 

•  Received regular reports from KPMG on audit 

payment terms.

progress and status.

•  Reviewed and recommended minor changes to Audit Committee terms 

•  Reviewed effectiveness of FY22 audit process.

of reference.

•  Reviewed auditor’s independence (including 

non-audit services).

•  Agreed audit fees.

Significant issues considered in relation to the financial statements
Significant issues and accounting judgements are identified by the finance team and through the external audit process and are 
reviewed by the Audit Committee. The significant issues considered by the Committee in respect of the year ended 30 April 2023 
are set out in the table below.

Significant issues and judgements

How the issues were addressed

Going concern

Carrying value of Parent Company investments

Impairment of property, plant and equipment, 
right-of-use assets and intangibles 

Existence, completeness and valuation of inventory

The Committee considered the appropriateness of applying the going concern convention 
in the preparation of the financial statements. The Committee noted that under a “severe 
but plausible” downside scenario model prepared to assess the appropriateness of the 
basis of preparation, the Group could breach its fixed charge bank covenant when the 
bank facility is being drawn upon. Whilst the Directors do not consider this a likely scenario 
in practice, it is nevertheless a plausible one, and to comply with the approach required 
by the relevant accounting standards, a material uncertainty in relation to the basis of 
preparation has been included in Note 1 (b) of the financial statements.

Judgement was required to assess the carrying value of the parent company’s investment 
in its subsidiaries, particularly given the current disparity between the estimated value in 
use derived by management, and the Group’s market capitalisation. The Committee noted 
that a significant impairment charge has been recognised in FY23 although the carrying 
value remains significantly higher than the market capitalisation, even after taking this 
into account. The Committee noted that the market capitalisation appears unusually low 
compared to the Group’s peers, when compared on the basis of, for example, multiples of 
earnings. 

The committee considered the approach taken to calculating the value in use estimate 
used in assessing the impairment of store fixed assets and the IFRS 16 right of use asset. 
It was considered appropriate to allocate a greater proportion of the Group’s central 
overhead costs to cash generating units than in previous years. This judgement resulted 
in a significant impairment charge for the Period, and, the requirement to retrospectively 
adjust impairment charges reported in respect of prior periods. 

As noted in the ‘Risk management and internal control’ section of the committee’s report, 
the committee reviewed the Group’s arrangements for improved stock taking processes. 
The implementation of these reduced the level of judgement required in the valuation of 
inventory compared with FY23. Although a degree of judgement will always be required in 
relation to the valuation of stock, the process is now more mechanistic than previously.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

67

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportAudit Committee report continued

Financial Reporting Council (FRC) letter
In April 2023, the Company receive a query from the FRC following 
a review of our Annual Report and Accounts for the 52-week period 
ended 1 May 2022. The Committee reviewed all correspondence 
between the Group and the FRC, and also discussed the matters 
raised with our auditor. The matters raised by the FRC related to 
the valuation of the Parent Company investment in subsidiaries, 
and the calculation of income tax on gains recognised in other 
comprehensive income. As a result of the review, in the FY23 Annual 
Report and Accounts, the disclosure of the assumptions regarding 
Parent Company investment have been increased. 

The FRC’s enquiries, which were limited to a review of the FY22 
Annual Report and Accounts, are now complete. The FRC does 
not benefit from detailed knowledge of our business or an 
understanding of the underlying transactions entered into, and 
accordingly the review provides no assurance that the FY22 Annual 
Report and Accounts is correct in all material respects. 

Risk management and internal control
The Board has overall responsibility for setting the Group’s risk 
appetite and ensuring that there is an effective risk management 
framework to maintain levels of risk within the risk appetite. 
The Board has delegated responsibility for review of the risk 
management methodology and effectiveness of internal 
control to the Audit Committee. 

During the year the Audit Committee and the Board reviewed 
the Group’s risk register, and challenged management on the 
classification of risks and the mitigations in place. This included 
a consideration of the principal risks and uncertainties facing 
the Group and a discussion of emerging risks and how these are 
identified. This process informed the Committee’s year-end review 
of principal risks and uncertainties and its recommendation to the 
Board. Further details of the Group’s risk management approach, 
structure and principal risks are set out on pages 49 to 53.

The Group’s system of internal control comprises entity-wide high-
level controls, controls over business processes and store-level 
controls. Policies and procedures and defined levels of delegated 
authority have been approved and communicated across the 
Group, and include an Internal Control Framework, corporate risk 
register, business continuity plan and IT system policies. These 
are supplemented by other policies and procedures which are 
communicated to colleagues through the employee handbook.

Management has identified the key operational and financial 
processes which exist and implemented internal controls over these 
processes in addition to the higher level review and authorisation-
based controls. These policies are designed to ensure the accuracy 
and reliability of financial reporting and govern the preparation 
of the financial statements. The Board is ultimately responsible for 
the Group’s system of internal controls and risk management and 
discharges its duties in this area by:

•  Holding regular Board meetings to consider the matters reserved 

for its consideration.

•  Receiving regular management reports which provide 

an assessment of key risks and controls.

•  Scheduling periodic Board reviews of strategy including reviews 

of the material risks and uncertainties facing the business.

•  Ensuring there is an organisational structure with defined 

responsibilities and levels of authority.

•  Ensuring there are documented policies and procedures in place.

•  Regularly reviewing reports containing detailed information 

regarding financial performance, forecasts, actual and forecast 
bank covenant compliance and financial and non-financial KPIs.

In reviewing the effectiveness of the system of internal controls, 
the Audit Committee:

•  Reviews the risk register compiled and maintained by senior 
managers within the Group and questions and challenges 
where necessary.

•  Regularly reviews the system of financial 

and accounting controls.

The Committee’s review of the effectiveness of internal control 
and risk management systems is an ongoing process. The key 
areas of focus during FY23 are detailed below.

•  As reported in the Company’s 2022 Annual Report, a Profit 
Protection Manager (PPM) was appointed in January 2022. 
During FY23, the Committee received and reviewed the PPM’s 
strategy and plan to drive improvements across the Company’s 
operational controls in order to reduce losses. The Committee 
also received updates on the implementation of the plan, 
including the introduction of a new rolling stock count process 
covering the Group’s entire store estate, and discussed KPMG’s 
audit of the FY23 stock position. The Committee also considered 
plans to improve EPOS data analysis to support better detection 
of in-store stock discrepancies.

• 

In September 2022 the finance team presented a detailed 
schedule of internal financial controls and planned 
improvements, and the Committee has regularly reviewed 
this schedule in order to monitor progress and assess the 
effectiveness of the control improvements.

•  Delegated authority limits are subject to regular review by 
the Committee. During the last year, the finance team has 
implemented a new and more sophisticated accounts payable 
(AP) system which has improved the control environment for 
invoice approval and embedded a workflow structure that 
supports more effective controls. An updated delegated 
authority matrix, including the documentation of the 
improvements driven by the new AP system has been developed.

68

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

The Committee is satisfied that the internal controls and risk 
management systems, including processes to identify and 
improve such systems and controls where necessary, continue 
to operate effectively.

Internal audit
In accordance with the Code, the Committee continues to keep 
the need for an internal audit function under review. In making 
that assessment, the Committee takes into account the risk and 
controls environment of the Group, and in particular any areas 
where additional assurance as to the effectiveness of controls 
and processes (over and above assurance provided through the 
Committee’s own reviews and the external audit process) may be 
required. As previously reported, the Group has engaged specialist 
independent advisers to review and make recommendations in 
relation to certain IT matters, and in FY23 dedicated resource within 
its finance team to review systems and processes, oversee and/or 
implement improvements and review internal controls.

When reviewing requests for non-audit services the Audit 
Committee will assess:

•  Whether the provision of such services impairs the auditor’s 
independence or objectivity and any safeguards in place 
to eliminate or reduce such threats.

•  The nature of the non-audit services.

•  Whether the skills and experience make the auditor the most 

suitable supplier of the non-audit service.

•  The fee to be incurred for non-audit services, both for individual 

non-audit services and in aggregate, relative to the Group 
audit fee.

•  The criteria which govern the compensation of the individuals 

performing the audit.

The external auditor may not be engaged to provide non-audit 
services which have been identified as ’prohibited’ in accordance 
with legislative and regulatory requirements.

The Committee is satisfied that the work of the dedicated function 
within the finance team has operated effectively to provide 
appropriate assurance over internal controls during FY23. On this 
basis, and with the option to use specialist independent advisers 
to review any priority areas of focus, the Committee remains of the 
view that there is no current requirement for the establishment of 
a permanent dedicated internal audit function, but will continue 
to keep this under review.

External auditor
The Audit Committee is responsible for overseeing the Group’s 
relationship with its external auditor, KPMG LLP. This includes the 
ongoing assessment of the auditor’s independence and the 
effectiveness of the external audit process, the results of which inform 
the Committee’s recommendation to the Board as to the auditor’s 
appointment (subject to shareholder approval) or otherwise.

Appointment and tenure
KPMG was appointed as the Company’s external auditor in 2018. 
The current lead audit partner, Gordon Docherty, was appointed 
following the conclusion of the FY22 audit. In line with KPMG’s 
internal policy, and subject to there having been no change in 
external auditor, it is anticipated that Gordon Docherty will remain 
as the lead audit partner for five years concluding with the FY27 
audit. In accordance with the Code, the Audit Committee intends 
to put the external audit out to tender at least every ten years.

Non-audit services
The engagement of the external audit firm to provide non-audit 
services to the Group can impact on the independence 
assessment. The Company has therefore adopted a policy which 
requires Audit Committee approval for any permitted non-audit 
services, except for permitted non-audit services with a fee of less 
than £5k on an individual basis or £20k on an aggregated basis 
which the CFO and the Audit Committee have pre-approved.

During the year, the only non-audit services which KPMG was 
engaged to carry out related to the issuance of turnover 
certificates for a small number of stores where the terms of the 
lease require them to be independently verified. The fees paid to 
KPMG LLP in respect of these services totalled £1k, representing less 
than 1% of the total audit fee. Further detail is included in Note 7 to 
the financial statements on page 110.

External audit effectiveness
During the year, the Committee reviewed the effectiveness 
of the FY22 year-end audit process. The format of the review 
included taking into account the views of the internal finance 
team, members of the Committee and others involved in the 
audit process which were discussed at the Committee’s meeting 
in January 2023. In general, all parties had concluded that the 
FY22 audit process had been rigorous, exhaustive and effective, 
and that KPMG had demonstrated independence, objectivity 
and an appropriate level of professional scepticism throughout 
the process.

Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the performance of the Committee was 
conducted as part of the broader Board evaluation process set 
out on page 64 of this Annual Report. I am pleased to report that 
feedback relating to the Committee was positive, indicating that 
the Committee continues to operate effectively.

Harry Morley
Chair of the Audit Committee
30 August 2023

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

69

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportNomination Committee report

Promoting diversity and inclusion will be 
key factors in our succession planning 
and NED appointment processes. 

Dear shareholder
I am pleased to present the Nomination Committee’s report for 
the 52-week period ended 30 April 2023. This report summarises 
the work of the Nomination Committee during the year. 

Composition of Committee, role and main 
activities in FY23
The Committee’s members, its role and main activities are 
detailed in the adjacent panel. During the year there has been 
specific focus on succession planning, both at Board and senior 
management level, and diversity.

Meetings and attendees
The Committee met twice during the year. All meetings were 
attended by all members of the Committee as shown in the 
table on page 63.

Only members of the Committee have the right to attend meetings, 
but the CEO and People Director are typically invited to attend at 
least part of each meeting, particularly when executive succession 
planning and other workforce related matters are being discussed. 
Other Directors, executives or advisers may be invited to attend all 
or part of any meeting as appropriate.

Succession planning
The Committee discussed Board succession planning and in 
particular the need to plan appropriately for the rotation of the 
Non-Executive Directors to support Board stability and avoid 
a situation where both Catherine Glickman and Harry Morley 
(who were appointed on the Company’s IPO in 2018) step down 
at the same time. Although no Board changes are imminent, the 
Committee has agreed in principle that Catherine and Harry will 
step down in a staggered fashion and, given their respective key 
roles as Chairs of the Remuneration and Audit Committees, that 
there may be some overlap between the appointment of their 
replacements and the date that they step down.

The Committee has also agreed that Board diversity (particularly 
gender and ethnicity) will be key factors in any search process for 
new Non-Executive Directors, albeit recognising that appointments 
will always be made on merit and based on objective criteria.

In March 2023 the Committee received an update on Executive 
Director and senior management succession led by the CEO and 
People Director. This included a high-level analysis of potential 
internal successors for Executive Director and Operations Board 
roles. It is intended that more formal internal succession plans will 
be developed, and this topic will continue to be a regular point 
of discussion for the Committee. The Board will also monitor and 
review initiatives to support the identification and development 
of internal talent through its regular updates from the People 
Director, and the action plans arising from our employee 
engagement activity.

In line with our Executive Director succession plans, we were 
delighted to announce that Rosie Fordham will succeed Steve 
Alldridge as CFO following an orderly handover of responsibilities 
and by the end of 2023.

Members
•  Carolyn Bradley (Chair)

•  Catherine Glickman

•  Harry Morley

Number of meetings held in the year:
2

Committee’s role and responsibilities
•  Oversees succession planning.

• 

Identifies and nominates appointments to the Board.

•  Reviews Non-Executive Directors’ time commitments.

•  Reviews size and composition of the Board.

•  Promotes diversity.

Main activities in FY23
•  Succession planning at Board and senior 

management level.

•  Diversity.

Terms of reference: 
Available at https://corporate.theworks.co.uk/who-we-are/ 
corporate-governance

70

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Diversity and inclusion (D&I)
The Committee is responsible for monitoring compliance with the objectives of the Board Diversity Policy (the D&I Policy). During the year, 
the Committee considered and approved an updated D&I Policy to ensure alignment with D&I policies and initiatives across the wider 
business. The updated D&I Policy reflects the Board’s aspiration to achieve the gender and ethnic diversity targets introduced into the 
Listing Rules in 2022, which reflect the recommendations of the FTSE Women Leaders Review and the Parker Review.

The updated D&I Policy also sets out the Company’s commitment to promote equality, diversity and inclusion, and a supportive culture 
that actively values difference. It also recognises:

•  That a key driver in building a workforce that is truly representative of all sections of society and the Group’s customers is a Board 
that has a balance of skills, knowledge, strengths, experience, diversity and independence which enables it to provide a range 
of perspectives, insight and challenge.

•  The expectation that the Board will role model inclusive language, behaviours and practice, and set a clear message about 

the importance of diversity and inclusion across the Company.

The specific objectives and Nomination Committee responsibilities set out in the D&I Policy, together with current status and progress 
against those objectives and responsibilities, is set out below.

Aspirational objective or responsibility

Status and progress

Board to comprise at least 40% women.

Met. Current Board comprises 40% female members.

At least one of Chair, CEO, CFO or SID to be a woman.

Met. Chair is female.

At least one Director from a non-white ethnic minority background. Not met. Aim to address through future Board succession planning.

Regularly review the structure, size and composition of the Board.

Annually recurring item on the Nomination Committee agenda.

Encourage diversity in the recruitment process by:

•  Only engaging search firms that are signatories to the Executive 

Search Firm’s Voluntary Code of Conduct.

•  Ensuring the search firm brief includes appropriate emphasis 

on diversity.

•  Encouraging long lists to include women, people from ethnic 

minority backgrounds and other under-represented groups with 
the skills and experience required.

•  Considering candidates who may not have previous executive/

non-executive directorship roles.

Have regard to the D&I Policy when considering Board 
succession planning.

Review the D&I Policy annually, assessing its effectiveness 
and recommending any changes to the Board.

No external search process has been instructed to date, but any 
future search process will be conducted in line with these points.

D&I Policy is taken into account when discussing Board succession.

The updated D&I Policy was approved in March 2023 and will 
be reviewed annually as part of the Nomination Committee’s 
programme of work.

Currently it is not anticipated that the size of the Board will be increased. Therefore all Non-Executive Directors in post at any one time 
will also be members of each of the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committee, and the D&I Policy does not contain any specific 
diversity objectives relating to the composition of the Board’s Committees.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

71

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportNomination Committee report continued

Diversity and inclusion (D&I) continued
As required under Listing Rule 9.8.6R, the breakdown of the gender identity and ethnic background of the Company’s Directors and 
executive management (the Operations Board) as at 30 April 2023 is set out in the tables below. To compile this data each Board and 
Operations Board member was asked to complete a survey. In the future the Company will seek to gather this data on the appointment 
of any new Board or Operations Board member.

Gender identity

Men

Women

Not specified/prefer not to say

Ethnic background

White British or other White

Mixed/multiple ethnic groups

Asian/Asian British

Black/African/Caribbean/Black British

Other ethnic group, including Arab

Not specified/prefer not to say

Number of 
Board members

Percentage 
of the Board

Number of 
senior positions 
on the Board 1

Number 
in executive 
management

Percentage 
of executive 
management

3

2

—

60%

40%

—

3

1

—

7

2

—

78%

22%

—

Number of 
Board members

Percentage 
of the Board

Number of 
senior positions 
on the Board 1

Number 
in executive
 management

Percentage 
of executive 
management

5

—

—

—

—

—

100%

—

—

—

—

—

4

—

—

—

—

—

8

1

—

—

—

—

89%

11%

—

—

—

—

None of the factors which could impact the independence of Non-
Executive Directors (as set out in provision 10 of the Code) apply to 
our Non-Executive Directors, and the Committee is satisfied that 
both Catherine Glickman and Harry Morley remain independent in 
thought and judgement. Catherine and Harry have both confirmed, 
as have I, that we continue to be able to devote sufficient time to 
fulfil our roles as Directors of the Company. 

Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the Committee’s performance in 2023 was 
conducted as part of the wider Board evaluation process described 
on page 64. The Committee was found to be operating effectively.

Carolyn Bradley
Chair of the Nomination Committee
30 August 2023

1 

Includes CEO, CFO, Chair and Senior Independent Director.

As shown in the tables above, as at 30 April 2023, the Company 
achieved the Listing Rule targets of 40% of its Board of Directors 
being women, and at least one of the senior Board positions 
(in our case, the Chair) being held by a woman. 

The Company has not achieved the target of at least one member 
of the Board being from a minority ethnic background. Given 
the size of our Board, which the Committee continues to believe 
is appropriate, and the tenure of the existing Non-Executive 
Directors, it is unlikely that this target will be achieved until 
at least the first round of Non-Executive Director rotation. 

The Committee will continue to keep the D&I Policy, and 
broader diversity targets, under review and both will continue 
to be important factors in our succession planning discussions 
and any search process for new appointments.

Other matters considered
At its meeting in March 2023 the Committee conducted its annual 
review of the size, structure and composition of the Board, the 
independence of the Non-Executive Directors, and Non-Executive 
Director time commitments. The Committee concluded that the 
size, structure and composition of the Board and its Committees 
remain appropriate taking into account the size and cost 
structure of the business, and that the Board’s balance of skills 
and experience is appropriate and supports effective debate 
and decision making.

72

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Directors’ remuneration report
Chair of the Remuneration Committee’s letter to shareholders

The Committee has continued to ensure that remuneration 
reflects performance, incentivises management and aligns 
with shareholders’ interests. 

Dear shareholder
As Chair of the Remuneration Committee, I present our Directors’ 
remuneration report for the 52-week period ended 30 April 2023.

This year’s report consists of this letter, a summary of our Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy (the Policy) and how we propose to apply the 
Policy in FY24, and the annual report on remuneration which sets out 
payments made to the Directors and demonstrates how Company 
performance and remuneration were aligned during FY23. 

The Policy was approved at the 2022 AGM, with over 99% of votes 
cast in favour of it, reflecting the strong shareholder support for our 
responsible approach to Directors’ remuneration. During FY23, we have 
considered the overall remuneration package for Gavin Peck, our CEO. 
Gavin is an exceptional leader and in order to reward him appropriately, 
we are proposing an amendment to the Policy reflecting our proposal 
to increase Gavin’s maximum LTIP award opportunity to 150% 
of salary. I explain our rationale for the proposal below.

At the 2023 AGM, we will be asking shareholders to vote on three 
resolutions relating to remuneration as follows: 

1. To approve an amendment to the Policy. 

2.  To approve an amendment to the rules of our LTIP to reflect 

the Policy amendment.

3. The advisory vote on the annual report on remuneration. 

FY23 remuneration in the context of our 
business performance
As detailed in the Strategic report, the Group delivered a resilient 
performance in FY23 against a challenging backdrop. In particular:

•  Total sales growth increased 6.1% (with like-for-like sales growth 

of 4.2%). 

•  Further improvements were made to our customer-focused 
proposition, including through the expansion of our front list 
book offer.

•  Continued optimisation of the store estate by opening 14 new 

stores and refitting 34 existing stores.

•  Ended the year in a strong financial position, with net cash of £10.2m.

The FY23 bonus opportunity for Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge 
was up to a maximum of 100% of salary, with 90% of the award 
based on stretching EBITDA targets and the remaining 10% based 
on performance against key strategic objectives (details of the 
measures and targets are set out on page 79). Our Adjusted EBITDA 
result for FY23 was in line with revised market expectations at 
£9.0m, but below our original EBITDA budget and the threshold 
level of post-bonus EBITDA performance for Executive Director 
bonuses. Therefore, not withstanding the Committee’s assessment 
that Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge had made good progress 
against the strategic objectives set (as described on page 79), 
no bonus was payable to the Executive Directors for FY23. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

73

Members
•  Catherine Glickman (Chair)

•  Carolyn Bradley (member since 2021)

•  Harry Morley (member since 2018)

Committee’s role
•  Sets Remuneration Policy.

•  Determines Executive Director and senior 

management remuneration.

•  Approves annual bonus and LTIP targets.

•  Reviews workforce remuneration policies and practices.

Main activities during FY23
•  Finalised Remuneration Policy and recommended its 

approval at the 2023 AGM.

•  Considered proposed increase to CEO maximum LTIP 
opportunity, and amended Policy for approval at 
the 2023 AGM.

•  Approved LTIP awards and targets.

•  Monitored annual bonus targets and outturn.

•  Reviewed Executive Director salaries.

•  Reviewed wider workforce pay and benefits.

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportDirectors’ remuneration report continued

FY23 remuneration in the context of our business 
performance continued
The Committee was impressed by progress, but ultimately 
determined that it would not be appropriate to award any bonus 
in respect of the strategic element based on the broader financial 
performance of the Company and the fact that, in general, bonuses 
were not payable to staff or senior management below Executive 
Director level.

Gavin Peck was granted a Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award 
in February 2021 which was subject to performance conditions 
based on EPS performance over the three financial years ending 
with FY23 and a share price target. Details of the targets are set 
out on page 80. As Adjusted EPS is impacted by the prior year 
restatements described in note 14 to the financial statements, 
the Committee’s assessment of the outturn of the EPS target 
is estimated. This estimate excludes the impact of a £0.6m tax 
credit received during the year. This exclusion results in Adjusted 
EPS (before the impact of prior period restatements) below the 
threshold target and accordingly the Committee’s estimate is 
that the LTIP award will lapse in full. The Committee considers that 
exercise of discretion in this way is appropriate taking into account 
operational performance. The Committee retains discretion to 
make adjustments to formulaic vesting outturns (whether up or 
down) in appropriate circumstances, including to take into account 
changes in tax rates. The final vesting is being reviewed to ensure 
that performance is being assessed on a fair and consistent basis 
and is reflective of wider corporate performance.

The Committee has also considered prior year LTIP outturns for 
FY22 and FY21 in the context of the impact of the prior period 
restatements. The Committee has concluded that the outturns of 
38.4% and 0% of maximum respectively were reflective of underlying 
business performance and that it would not be appropriate to 
make any adjustments that may otherwise increase the level of 
vesting. In order to ensure that the Adjusted EPS performance 
measures that apply to in-flight LTIPs can be assessed on a fair and 
consistent basis (given the impact of prior period restatements), 
the Committee intends to review those targets during FY24. This 
review is intended to ensure that the level of stretch in the targets 
is maintained and the targets are not made materially easier or 
harder to achieve as a result of the restatement.

Remuneration across the business
The Committee continues to make decisions on remuneration for 
the Executive Directors in the context of decisions for colleagues 
across the Group.

For FY24, salaries for colleagues in retail have increased in line 
with the National Living Wage, with further investment in the 
management grades to maintain appropriate differentials. This 
resulted in an average increase of 8.6% for colleagues in retail. 
Salaries for Distribution Centre and Support Centre roles increased 
in line with the National Living Wage where relevant with further 
investment in certain grades to maintain appropriate differentials, 
and outside of that, an average increase of 5% was applied. 
Following a benchmarking exercise we also increased our car 
allowance rates (the first such increase for over six years).

As reported last year, in August 2023, we launched a new 
communications and engagement platform (MyWorks by Reward 
Gateway) across the business. This offers colleagues discounts and 
money saving offers with a number of businesses and services; this 
has been well received. In response to the cost-of-living crisis we also 
launched Wagestream, an app that offers all colleagues a range of 

financial wellbeing tools, including early access to earned wages as 
well as savings account access and financial wellbeing resources. 

Our Operations Board directors continue to be an effective high-
performing team. For FY24, the starting point for Operations Board 
salary increases was 5% (in line with the standard increase for 
Distribution and Support Centre colleagues outside of National 
Minimum Wage (NMW) increases), and we adjusted salaries to 
reflect increased responsibilities for individual roles. Following the 
departure of the Digital and Marketing Director during the year, 
the net impact of the Operations Board salary increases is a circa 
£0.1m saving. As indicated in our FY22 Annual Report, during FY23 
we implemented a hybrid incentive arrangement comprising 
an award of restricted shares (vesting after two years subject 
to continued employment) plus an award of nil-cost options 
subject to performance over a three-year period. For area and 
retail management, we operate a bonus scheme which rewards 
achievement of objectives aligned with our strategy.

Gavin Peck – incentive remuneration
As I mention above, during the year, we have considered Gavin 
Peck’s remuneration. We want to recognise his exceptional 
performance and leadership, providing him with a strong 
incentivisation and retention mechanism, whilst taking into 
account the interests of shareholders. The Committee concluded 
that the correct approach to achieve this would be to align any 
adjustment to reward with the long-term interests of shareholders 
and propose increasing Gavin’s LTIP opportunity to 150% of 
base salary. 

Under the Policy approved at the 2022 AGM, the maximum annual 
Long-Term Incentive Plan award is 100% of base salary, or 200% 
of base salary in exceptional circumstances, with these limits 
reflected in the formal rules of the LTIP. As it is our intention that 
the 150% of salary level will become Gavin’s usual annual grant, 
we have agreed that in the interests of transparency we will seek 
shareholder approval to increase the ‘normal’ limit at the 2023 
AGM. No increase will be made to the ‘exceptional circumstances’ 
limit, which will remain at 200% of base salary, and the CFO’s 
maximum LTIP opportunity will remain at 100% of base salary 
(reflecting our view that it is appropriate to recognise Gavin’s position 
in leading the business by differentiating the level of his LTIP award).

In line with our approach to transparent communications with 
shareholders, I wrote to our largest shareholders following the 
FY23 year end to set out details of our proposed approach to the 
LTIP, and offered the opportunity to discuss our approach. I was 
pleased that a number of shareholders took up the opportunity 
to speak with me directly, and indicated support for our proposals. 
Having regard to feedback received during that engagement, 
we are also proposing an additional minor amendment to the 
Policy to clarify that a share retention requirement, aligned with 
the in-service share ownership guideline, applies also to deferred 
bonus shares in addition to LTIP shares.

Approach to remuneration for FY24
Our approach to Directors’ remuneration in respect of FY24 
is summarised in the table on page 76, which also reflects the 
proposed amendment to the Remuneration Policy.

The Committee approved salary increases of 5% for both Gavin 
and Steve, with such increases being below the average increase 
applied across the wider workforce, which outside of NMW 
increases was an average of 7%.

74

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

For FY24, we will also apply a minor re-weighting of the 
EBITDA and strategic measures which apply to the Executive 
Directors’ annual bonus scheme. The maximum bonus 
opportunity for both Executive Directors will remain at 100% 
of base salary, but with 80% of the maximum opportunity 
subject to EBITDA performance, and the remaining 20% 
subject to strategic measures. This change will strengthen 
the Committee’s ability to reward building the strategic 
capability of the business, including performance against our 
sustainability targets.

As noted in the Chair’s statement on page 7, during FY24 Rosie 
Fordham will succeed Steve Alldridge as CFO. I am pleased 
that we are in a position to make an internal appointment, 
demonstrating our focus on development and succession 
planning. Rosie’s remuneration from her appointment as CFO 
will be in line with the Policy, and is summarised in the Policy 
summary and FY24 intended implementation table on page 
76. As Steve will leave the business during FY24, he will not be 
eligible for a FY24 bonus and will not receive an LTIP award 
during the year.

As reported last year, Harry Morley and I were awarded a 
3% increase in our fees with effect from 1 September 2022. 
Following the annual review, the Non-Executive Director and 
Chair fees will be increased by 5% (in line with the increase for 
the Executive Directors, and below the average increase for 
the wider workforce) with effect from 1 September 2023.

Stakeholder engagement

Given the challenges of FY23, I would like to thank the Executive 
Directors, the Operations Board Directors and all our colleagues 
at The Works for their continued commitment, enthusiasm and 
hard work. 

Our colleagues are a vital part of our customer experience. 
We continue to be a company in which colleagues can develop 
their careers, with the majority of colleagues being internally 
developed and 10% promoted in the last year. We are delighted 
that we continue to be recognised as one of the 25 Best Big 
Companies to Work for. 

The Board continues to receive regular updates on colleague 
wellbeing, morale, retention and health and safety and visits 
stores and engages with colleagues regularly. We review the 
annual Best Companies engagement survey results, in which 
colleagues provide feedback on leadership, personal growth 
and giving something back, as well as pay and benefits, and 
these inform decisions on remuneration.

On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank shareholders for 
their support for our Policy at the 2022 AGM. I remain happy 
to receive any questions or feedback from shareholders at any 
time, and hope that you will be happy to support the resolutions 
proposed at our 2023 AGM.

Catherine Glickman
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
30 August 2023

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

75

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportDirectors’ remuneration report continued

Our Policy – summary and FY24 intended approach
In the interests of transparency, we have included on page 77 the LTIP and “in-service” shareholding guidelines sections of the Policy, 
incorporating the amendments for which shareholder approval is to be sought at the 2023 AGM. Since we are not seeking approval for 
a Directors’ Remuneration Policy at the 2023 AGM, in line with the applicable regulations, we have not included the Policy in this report. 
The Policy is set out in our FY22 Annual Report which is available on our website.

The following table summarises the key aspects of our Policy approved at the 2022 AGM, changes proposed in the Policy and, subject 
to shareholder approval for the amendment to the maximum LTIP opportunity for the CEO as described on page 74, information on 
how we intend to implement the policy in FY24.

Policy summary

Implementation in FY24

Base salary

Ordinarily reviewed annually. In line with typical practice, 
increases are normally within the range of increases 
awarded to other colleagues. Flexibility is retained to 
award higher increases in appropriate circumstances. 

Retirement benefits

Defined contribution pension (or cash equivalent). 
Maximum contribution aligned with the contribution 
available to other employees.

Annual bonus

Maximum opportunity of 100% of salary. 

Full bonus ordinarily paid in cash but with flexibility 
to defer into shares for up to two years. 

Up to 20% of maximum will be earned for threshold 
performance and up to 50% of the maximum will be 
earned for on-target performance.

The Committee has discretion to amend the pay-out 
should any formulaic output not reflect the Committee’s 
assessment of overall business performance. 

At least 50% of the bonus is based on financial measures.

The balance of the bonus opportunity will be based 
on financial measures and/or the delivery of strategic/
individual measures.

Subject to approval by shareholders at the 2023 AGM, 
maximum award of 150% of salary, or 200% of salary in 
exceptional circumstances, with up to 25% vesting for 
threshold performance. 

For at least 75% of an LTIP award, the performance 
measures will be based on financial measures.

LTIP

For FY24, the Executive Directors’ salaries have been 
increased by 5% to:

•  Gavin Peck: £324,450.

•  Steve Alldridge: £227,115.

•  On her appointment to CFO, Rosie Fordham’s salary 

will be £180,000. Subject to her developing in line with 
expectations, it is intended that her salary will increase 
to £200,000 for FY25, and to £220,000 for FY26.

Executive Director pension contributions continue to be 
aligned with the wider workforce at 3% of base salary. 

Rosie Fordham’s pension contribution will be reduced 
to 3% on her appointment as CFO.

For FY24, the maximum bonus opportunity will be 100% 
of salary for each Executive Director.

A minor change to the weightings of the performance 
measures will be applied. Performance will be based 
on EBITDA as regards 80% of the award and strategic 
objectives with clear measurable targets as regards 20% 
of the award. As targets (both financial and strategic) 
under the annual bonus are considered commercially 
sensitive, these will be disclosed retrospectively in the 
FY24 Annual Report.

For Rosie Fordham, any bonus payable under the 
Policy for FY24 will be pro-rata from the date of her 
appointment as CFO.

A minor amendment to the Policy is proposed to increase 
the maximum LTIP award to 150% of salary (from 100% 
of salary). 

For FY24, we propose to grant to our CEO, Gavin Peck, 
at the level of 150% of salary and to our incoming CFO, 
Rosie Fordham, will be granted an LTIP at the level of 
100% of salary. 

It is proposed that the awards will be subject to 
performance conditions based on EPS and share price, 
with an equal weighting. 

The awards will not be granted until after the 2023 AGM. 
Full details of the performance metrics and targets, which 
will be set with a level of stretch commensurate with the 
size of the LTIP awards, will be included in the regulatory 
announcement at the time the awards are granted.

In-service shareholding 
guidelines

Post-employment 
shareholding guidelines

Executive Directors are required to retain half of all shares acquired under the LTIP (after sales to cover tax and any 
exercise price) until such a time as their holding as a value is equal to 200% of salary.

Following employment, an Executive Director must retain for one year such of their relevant shares (shares acquired 
pursuant to LTIP or deferred bonus awards granted after 1 May 2022) as have a value equal to 200% of their salary 
(or, if fewer, all of their relevant shares).

Non-Executive Directors’ 
remuneration

Fees are set taking into account the responsibilities of the 
role and expected time commitment.

Chair and Non-Executive Director fees for FY24 (with 
effect from 1 September 2023) are as follows:

Chair’s fee

Harry Morley

Catherine Glickman

Base fee
£000

105

59

54

76

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

In the interests of transparency, we have set out below the LTIP and “in-service” shareholding guideline sections of the Policy approved at 
the 2022 AGM, in each case updated to reflect the amendments for which shareholder approval is to be sought at the 2023 AGM. 

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Long-Term 
Incentive 
Plan (LTIP)

The LTIP provides a clear link 
between the remuneration 
of the Executive Directors 
and the creation of value for 
shareholders by rewarding 
the Executive Directors for 
the achievement of longer-
term objectives aligned with 
shareholders’ interests.

The maximum award level is 
150% of base salary, or 200% 
of base salary in exceptional 
circumstances.

The market value of shares 
subject to an LTIP award 
will be determined on such 
basis as the Committee 
considers appropriate, which 
will be applied consistently 
where possible.

If a qualifying LTIP is granted, 
the value of shares subject to 
the CSOP option will not count 
towards the limit referred 
to above, reflecting the 
provisions for the scale back 
of the ordinary LTIP award.

For at least 75% of an LTIP 
award, the performance 
measures will be based 
on financial measures 
(which may include, but 
are not limited to, earnings 
per share, relative total 
shareholder return and 
share price). Any balance 
of an LTIP award will be 
subject to performance 
measures based on 
non-financial measures 
aligned with the Company’s 
strategic priorities.

Subject to the Committee’s 
discretion to amend the 
formulaic output, awards 
will vest up to 25% for 
threshold performance, 
rising to 100% for maximum 
performance.

Under the LTIP, the Committee may 
grant awards as conditional shares 
or as nil (or nominal) cost options.

Awards will usually vest following 
the assessment of the applicable 
performance conditions, typically 
following the end of a three-year 
performance period, but will not be 
released (so that the participant is 
entitled to acquire shares) until the 
end of a holding period of two years 
beginning on the vesting date.

Alternatively, awards may be granted 
on the basis that the participant is 
entitled to acquire shares following 
the assessment of the applicable 
performance conditions but that 
(other than as regards sales to cover 
tax liabilities and any exercise price) 
the award is not released (so that 
the participant is able to dispose 
of those shares) until the end of the 
holding period.

The Committee has discretion to amend 
the pay out should any formulaic output 
not reflect the Committee’s assessment 
of overall business performance.

LTIP awards may incorporate the right 
to receive additional shares calculated 
by reference to the value of dividends 
which would have been paid on the 
vested shares subject to the award 
up to the time of release; this amount 
may be calculated assuming that the 
dividends have been reinvested in the 
Company’s shares on such basis as the 
Committee determines.

The Committee may at its discretion 
structure awards as qualifying LTIP 
awards, consisting of a tax qualifying 
Company Share Option Plan (CSOP) 
option with a per share exercise price 
equal to the market value of a share at 
the date of grant and an ordinary nil 
(or nominal) cost LTIP award, with the 
ordinary award scaled back at exercise 
to take account of any gain made on 
exercise of the CSOP option.

Recovery provisions apply and are set 
out in the Policy approved at the 2022 
AGM and included on page 67 of our 
FY22 Annual Report which is available 
on our website.

Shareholding 
guidelines

To align the interests of the Executive Directors with those of shareholders, the Committee has adopted formal shareholding 
guidelines. Executive Directors are required to retain half of all shares acquired under the LTIP and any deferred bonus award 
(after sales to cover tax and exercise price) until such time as their holding as a value is equal to 200% of salary.

Shares subject to LTIP awards which have vested but not been released (that is which are in a holding period), or which have been 
released but have not been exercised, and shares subject to deferred bonus awards, count towards the guidelines on a net of 
assumed tax basis.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

77

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportAnnual report on remuneration

This report has been prepared in accordance with the applicable regulations and the Code.

Composition of the Committee
The members of the Committee are Catherine Glickman (Chair), Carolyn Bradley and Harry Morley.

Duties and responsibilities
The Committee’s key responsibilities are detailed in the panel on page 73.

When determining the application of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy in FY23, the Committee considered the factors of clarity, 
simplicity, risk, predictability, proportionality and alignment to culture as referred to in the Code. As with the approach in FY22, these were 
reflected, in particular, in the Executive Directors’ LTIP awards which are subject to simple and transparent performance measures based 
on our appetite for risk, with specific monetary caps added as a further risk mitigation. 

As part of its work, the Committee reviewed the remuneration for the wider workforce and related policies and takes these into account 
when setting the Policy for Executive Director and senior management remuneration. 

Meetings and attendees
The Committee met a total of four times during the year and has met once since the year end. All members attended those meetings 
as shown in the table on page 63. The Committee receives assistance from the CEO, CFO, People Director and Company Secretary, 
who attend meetings by invitation, except when issues relating to their own remuneration are being discussed.

Performance evaluation
The evaluation of the performance of the Committee was conducted as part of the broader Board evaluation process set out on page 
64. Feedback relating to the Committee indicated that it continues to operate effectively, with all members (and other attendees) 
contributing appropriately to debate and discussion around remuneration matters.

Advisers
Deloitte LLP (Deloitte) is retained to provide independent advice to the Committee as required. Deloitte is a member of the Remuneration 
Consultants Group and, as such, voluntarily operated under that group’s Code of Conduct in relation to executive remuneration 
consulting in the UK. Deloitte’s fees for providing remuneration advice to the Committee were £3,000 for FY23. The Committee assesses 
from time to time whether this appointment remains appropriate or should be put out to tender and takes into account the Remuneration 
Consultants Group Code of Conduct when considering this.

Deloitte was appointed by the Committee and has provided share scheme advice and general remuneration advice to the Company.

Single figure table – audited information
The table below sets out total remuneration in respect of FY23 for each person who served as a Director in that year, along with the 
corresponding remuneration for FY22:

Salary and
fees 1
£000

Benefits 2
£000

Pension 3
£000

Annual
bonus 4
£000

Long-term
incentive 5
£000

Executive Directors

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge 
(appointed 14 May 
2021)

Non-Executive 
Directors

Carolyn Bradley 
(appointed 30 
September 2021)

Harry Morley

Catherine Glickman

2023

2022

2023

2022

2023

2022

2023

2022

2023

2022

309

300

216

203

100

59

57

55

52

50

13

13

12

12

—

—

—

—

—

—

9

9

6

6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

234

—

163

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

—

29

—

—

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Total fixed
 remuneration
£000

Total variable
 remuneration
£000

Total
£000

331

585

234

384

331

322

234

221

100

100

59

57

55

52

50

59

57

55

52

50

—

263

—

163

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1    Salary and fees: The amount of salary/fees earned in respect of the year.

2    Benefits: The taxable value of benefits received in the year: these are principally private medical insurance and car or car allowance. For Gavin Peck the 
2023 (and 2022) benefits figures include his SAYE options granted in November 2022 (and August 2021), valued as the aggregate discount of the exercise 
price from the share price used to determine the exercise price. 

3   Pension: The pension figure represents the cash value of pension contributions for the Executive Director to the defined contribution pension arrangement 

and any cash payments in lieu of pension contributions made in the year.

4    Annual bonus: The cash value of the bonus earned in respect of the financial year. Further information in relation to the FY23 bonuses is set out below; 

no bonuses were earned by the Executive Directors in respect of FY23.

78

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

5   Long-term incentives: Gavin Peck was granted an LTIP award in February 2021 subject to the performance conditions set out below. The estimated 
outturn is that the award will lapse in full. The final vesting is being reviewed to ensure that performance is being assessed on a fair and consistent 
basis taking into account the impact of prior period restatements on the EPS target and to ensure that the final vesting is reflective of wider corporate 
performance. Any change in outturn will be trued up in the FY24 single figure table.

Truing up of FY22 single figure table numbers – audited information
The 2022 LTIP figure was calculated based on the three-month average share price to the end of FY22. The 2022 LTIP figure in the single 
figure table above has therefore been adjusted to reflect the actual share price of £0.29 (being the closing share price on 22 September 
2022, the day before the vesting date of 23 September 2022). The figure also includes the value of dividend equivalents for the period 
from grant to the vesting date.

Annual incentive plan – audited information
Each Executive Director was eligible to earn a bonus in respect of FY23 of up to 100% of salary. 90% of the award was based on EBITDA 
targets (required to be achieved after funding of any bonus payments triggered) which were considered to be suitably stretching, and 
took account of the fact that we would not benefit from £5.6m business rates relief in FY23 as we had done in FY22. The remaining 10% was 
based on performance against key strategic objectives as set out below, with any payout in respect of the strategic objectives element 
being subject to the achievement of a threshold level of EBITDA performance. 

As shown in the table below, actual adjusted EBITDA outperformance above the threshold target was not sufficient to support a threshold 
bonus level and, therefore, no bonus was earned by either Executive Director in respect of this element for the year.

EBITDA element

Threshold

Maximum

Performance
(£m)

Vesting
(% of maximum 
for EBITDA 
element)

Actual 
performance
(£m)

Bonus earned for 
EBITDA element
(% of maximum 
for EBITDA 
element)

Bonus earned 
for EBITDA 
element
(% of salary)

9

13

20%

100%

9 1

0%

0%

1 

 Adjusted EBITDA before funding of any bonus. Outperformance over the threshold target was not sufficient to fund threshold level bonuses, and therefore 
no bonus was earned for the EBITDA element.

Strategic objectives element
Each Executive Director made good progress in the year against the strategic objectives set (as summarised below). However, since the 
adjusted EBITDA performance measure was not met, no bonus was earned by reference to those achievements.

Gavin Peck, CEO
Gavin’s objectives were to develop the brand externally and internally, develop a quantified ESG approach including environmental 
targets, drive the implementation of the strategy and continue to develop both leaders and colleagues. The Board considers that, 
given the challenges during the year, overall Gavin has achieved his objectives (exceeding them in some areas), including: 

•  Roll out of first phase of the evolved brand.

•  Refreshed product offer and loyalty scheme relaunched.

•  Realignment of online operational team and deployment of new analytical tools following completion of website usability studies. 

•  Store estate improved - 17 new stores opened (including 3 relocations), and 34 refits. 

• 

Improved operational efficiency (new store labour model, implementation of improved supply chain systems, automation 
in online fulfilment).

•  Continued investor (including potential investor) engagement, and raised brand awareness.

•  Led development of clear ESG strategy, incorporating strong positions on colleagues, community and environmental commitments 

(base line targets, including Net Zero by 2045, set and agreed by the Board).

•  Delivered MyWorks (colleague engagement platform) and Can Do Academy (learning and development platform). Improved ranking 

from 13th to 12th in ‘Best Big Companies to Work For’ category and maintained 2* accreditation.

Steve Alldridge CFO
Steve’s objectives were to continue the stakeholder engagement with both investors and banks, improve the financial control 
environment, improve the quality of data and performance reporting to enhance business support and strengthen the Finance Team. 
The Board consider that Steve has met his objectives for the year:

•  Successfully negotiated an extension of banking facilities at reduced cost and maintained strong relationships with our 

banking partner.

•  Continued to engage with investors and other stakeholders, changing broker at the end of the year. 

•  Tightened financial controls and disciplines, with better visibility and insight on stock holding.

• 

Improved performance reporting, supported by a strengthened business partnering capability. 

•  Finance function strengthened with talented individuals, raising the future capability of the team.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

79

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportAnnual report on remuneration continued

Long-term incentives
LTIP award vesting
Gavin Peck was granted an LTIP award in the form of nil-cost options over 847,457 shares in February 2021. The award was subject 
to performance conditions set out below, general and windfall-gain underpins, and a two-year post-vesting holding period. 

Measure

Adjusted EPS

Share price1

Weighting

50%

50%

Threshold 
(20% vesting)

3.1 pence

£0.50

Maximum (100% 
vesting)

13.1 pence

£2

Actual performance

N/A

33.85p

1 

 Average share price over the period of four weeks beginning with the announcement by the Company of its Full Year Trading Update for its 2022/23 
financial year.

As described in the Remuneration Committee Chair’s letter on page 74, adjusted EPS is impacted by the prior year restatements 
described in note 14 to the financial statements, as such, the Committee’s assessment of the outturn of the EPS target is estimated. This 
estimate excludes the impact of a £0.6m tax credit received during the year. This exclusion results in adjusted EPS (before the impact of 
prior period restatements) below the threshold target and accordingly the Committee’s estimate is that the LTIP award will lapse in full. 

Long-term incentives – awards granted during FY23 – audited information

LTIP awards were granted to Gavin Peck and Steve Alldridge on 17 November 2022 equal to 100% of salary on the following basis:

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

Type of award

Maximum
opportunity

Number of
shares

Face value at
grant £1

% of award vesting
at threshold

LTIP

LTIP

100% of salary

100% of salary

936,363

655,454

308,999

216,299

20%

20%

Performance period2

See footnote 2

See footnote 2

1 

 For these purposes, the face value of an award is calculated by multiplying the number of shares over which the award was granted by 33 pence, the 
average closing share price for each of the three business days prior to the date of grant (rounded up to the nearest whole pence).

2   Each award is subject to performance conditions assessed over the Company’s FY23, FY24 and FY25 financial years as regards the EPS element of the 

performance condition, with the share price element of the performance condition assessed following the announcement by the Company of its Full Year 
Trading Update for its FY25 financial year (as described further below). To the extent an award vests following the end of the performance period, it is 
subject to a further two-year holding period before the shares are released.

A summary of the performance conditions for these awards (with half of each award based on EPS, and half on share price) is set out on 
page 77. The Committee believes that the Executive Directors have direct influence over both measures, and that targets are stretching 
but achievable.

SAYE Scheme options granted during FY23 – audited information
Gavin Peck was granted a SAYE Scheme option on 4 November 2022 as detailed below as part of the SAYE Scheme offer made to 
all eligible colleagues.

Gavin Peck

Type of award

SAYE option

Number of
shares

31,034

Exercise price1

£0.29

Face value at
grant £2

10,964

1 

 In line with the SAYE Scheme, this is set at a 20% discount to 35.33 pence, the average closing share price on 5, 6 and 7 October 2022, the three business 
days prior to the date of invitation.

2   For these purposes, the face value of the option is calculated by multiplying the number of shares over which the option was granted by 35.33 pence, 

the average closing share price for each of the three business days prior to the date of invitation.

80

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests – audited information
The number of shares of the Company in which the Directors had a beneficial interest, together with details of the Executive Directors’ 
long-term incentive interests, as at 30 April 2023, are set out in the table below.

Outstanding scheme interests 30 April 2023

Beneficially owned shares

Unvested LTIP
interests
subject to
performance
conditions

Scheme
interests not
subject to
performance
measures 1

Vested but
 unexercised 
scheme interests 2

Total shares
subject to
outstanding
scheme
interests 3

1 May 2022

30 April 2023

Total of all 
scheme
 interests and
shareholdings 
at 30 April 2023

Executive Directors

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

2,422,117

1,102,262

47,397

96,151

—

—

2,565,665

1,102,262

554,636

554,636

—

—

3,120,301

1,102,262

1  SAYE awards that have not vested.

2  LTIP awards that have vested but remain unexercised.

3   The tax qualifying CSOP awards granted as part of the 2019 awards are not included in these numbers, reflecting that if they were to be exercised the LTIP 

element of those awards would be reduced to reflect the gain on the CSOP element, as referred to on page 77. 

Non-Executive Directors

Carolyn Bradley

Harry Morley1

Catherine Glickman

Outstanding scheme interests 30 April 2023

Beneficially owned shares

Unvested LTIP
interests
subject to
performance
conditions

Scheme
interests not
subject to
performance
measures

Total shares
subject to
outstanding
scheme
interests

1 May 2022

1 April 2023

Total of all 
scheme
 interests and
shareholdings 
at 30 April 2023

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

105,866

200,000

77,244

179,736

275,000

181,033

179,736

275,000

181,033

1 

Includes interest of Kate Morley (a person closely associated with Harry Morley).

Executive Directors’ interests under share schemes – audited information
The table below sets out the Executive Directors’ interests in the LTIP and SAYE Schemes.

The LTIP awards are subject to performance conditions as set out in the table below.

Award date

Vesting, exercise 
or release date

As at 
1 May
2022

Granted 
during the
year

Exercised 
during the
year

Lapsed 
during the
year

Gavin Peck

LTIP

3 September 20191,2

September 2022

15 February 2021

June 2023

250,617

847,457

30 September 2021

June 2024

638,297 

—

— 

—

17 November 2022

June 2025

—

936,363

SAYE

31 August 2021

1 October 2024

16,363

—

4 November 2022 

1 December 2025

—

31,034

Steve Alldridge

LTIP

30 September 2021

June 2024

446,808

—

17 November 2022

June 2025

—

655,454

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

154,466

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Number of
shares at 
30 April
2023

96,151

847,457

638,297

936,363

16,363 

31,034

446,808

655,454

Exercise
price

N/A

N/A

N/A 

N/A

55p

29p

N/A

N/A

1 

 In addition to his LTIP award, Gavin Peck was also granted a tax qualifying CSOP award over 37,037 shares with an exercise price of £0.81. The CSOP 
award vested at 38.4% (the same level as the LTIP award – see Note 2 below) and lapsed in respect of the balance of the shares subject to it so that it is 
not held over 22,815 shares. To the extent a CSOP award is exercised at a gain, the extent to which the associated LTIP award can be exercised shall be 
reduced by the amount of the gain so that there is no increase in the pre-tax value of the award. 

2   38.4% of Gavin Peck’s LTIP award granted in 2019 vested by reference to EPS performance over the three financial years ending with FY22. The remaining 
portion of the award (154,666) lapsed on the vesting date as shown in the table above. The vested portion of the award will not be released to Gavin so 
that he can exercise it until the end of a further two-year holding period. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

81

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
Annual report on remuneration continued

Executive Directors’ interests under share schemes – audited information continued
The performance condition applying to Gavin Peck’s LTIP award granted in February 2021 is summarised on page 81. The estimated 
outturn is that the award will lapse in full. 

Vesting of the LTIP awards made in September 2021 and November 2022 is based on EPS and share price targets as set out in the 
table below. 

Award date

30 September 2021

17 November 2022

Measure

EPS1

Share price2

EPS3

Share price4

Weighting

Threshold (20% vesting)

Maximum (100% vesting)

50%

50%

50%

50%

5.6 pence

£0.57

5.6 pence

£0.43

15.6 pence

£2.00

15.6 pence

£1.40

1 

 Basic EPS for the Company’s FY24, pre-IFRS 16 and subject to such adjustments as the Remuneration Committee determines to ensure that performance 
is assessed on a fair and consistent basis. 

2   Average share price over the period of four weeks following the announcement by the Company of its Full Year Trading Update for its 2023/24 

financial year.

3   Basic EPS for the Company’s FY25, pre-IFRS 16 and subject to such adjustments as the Remuneration Committee determines to ensure that performance 

is assessed on a fair and consistent basis. 

4   Average share price over the period of four weeks following the announcement by the Company of its Full Year Trading Update for its 2024/25 

financial year.

The awards are subject to a general performance underpin, whereby the Committee shall assess overall financial performance of the 
Group over the performance period in determining the level of vesting and an assessment of whether any of the value of the awards on 
assessment of the performance conditions represents a ‘windfall gain’. The awards are also subject to a cap such that the value of the 
vested shares under an award, determined by reference to the price used to assess the share price element of the performance condition, 
may not exceed £2,500,000 in the case of Gavin Peck’s award and £1,750,000 in the case of Steve Alldridge’s award.

As noted in the Remuneration Committee Chair’s statement on page 74, the EPS targets for in-flight LTIPs will be reviewed in FY24 to 
consider the impact of prior period restatements and to ensure that performance can be assessed on a fair and consistent basis. This 
review is intended to ensure that the level of stretch in the targets is maintained and the targets are not made materially easier or harder 
to achieve as a result of the restatement. 

Directors’ share ownership guidelines – audited information
The Committee has adopted a shareholding guideline for the Executive Directors, which requires the Executive Directors to retain half 
of all shares acquired under the LTIP (after sales to cover tax and any exercise price) until such time as their holding has a value equal to 
200% of salary. Shares subject to LTIP awards which have vested but not been released (i.e. which remain in a holding period), or which 
have been released but have not been exercised, and any shares subject to deferred bonus awards, count towards the guidelines on a 
net of assumed tax basis. 

Executive Director

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge

Number 
of shares
 counting
towards the
guideline at
30 April 2023

Value of 
shares
counting
 towards
the guideline 1

Value of
shares as
a percentage
 of base salary

Shareholding
 guideline met?

605,596

£187,734

45.5%

In progress

—

—

—

In progress 2

1  Based on a share price of 31 pence as at 28 April 2023 (being the last trading day prior to the year end of 30 April 2023).

2   Steve Alldridge has not yet had any LTIP award which has vested. When he does so, he will be required to retain shares in accordance with the Policy 

which will count towards the shareholding guideline.

82

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Performance graph and historical CEO remuneration outcomes
The graph below shows the total shareholder return (TSR) performance for the Company’s shares in comparison to the FTSE SmallCap 
for the period from Main Market Admission on 19 July 2018 to 30 April 2023. The TSR performance of the FTSE SmallCap index has been 
selected as it is considered the most appropriate comparator group. For the purposes of the graph, TSR has been calculated as the 
percentage change in the market price of the shares during the period, assuming that dividends are reinvested. The graph shows the 
value, as at 30 April 2023, of £100 invested in shares in the Company on 19 July 2018 compared with £100 invested in the FTSE SmallCap.

150

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

)

0
0
1
£
o
t
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(

n
r
u
t
e
r

l

r
e
d
o
h
e
r

a
h
s

l

a
t
o
T

YE  
2019

YE  
2020

YE 
2021

YE 
2022

YE 
2023

TheWorks.co.uk plc

FTSE SmallCap

The table below sets out the CEO’s total remuneration over the last five financial years, valued using the methodology applied to the single 
total figure of remuneration. The Committee does not believe that the remuneration paid in earlier years as a private company bears any 
comparative value to that paid in its time as a public company and, therefore, the Committee has chosen to disclose remuneration only 
for the four most recent financial years (with the figures for FY19 being for the period from Admission on 19 July 2018 to 28 April 2019):

Year (CEO)

2023 (Gavin Peck)

2022 (Gavin Peck)

2021 (Gavin Peck)

2020 (Gavin Peck – from 16 January 2020)

2020 (Kevin Keaney – until 16 January 2020)

2019 (Kevin Keaney)

Total single
 figure
 remuneration
£000 1

Annual 
bonus payout 
(% of maximum
 opportunity)

LTIP vesting 
(% of maximum
 number of
 shares)2

331

585

303

85

267

288

0%

78%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

38.4%

0%

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

1 

 The 2022 figure reflects the CEO’s single total figure of remuneration for FY22 as included in this report updated to reflect the ‘truing up’ of the FY22 LTIP 
figure as referred to on page 79. 

2  There was no LTIP capable of vesting in respect of performance ending 2019 and 2020.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

83

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
Annual report on remuneration continued

Change in remuneration of Directors compared to Group employees
The table below sets out the annual change in salary and fees, benefits and bonus paid to each of the Directors from FY20 to FY23. The 
regulations also require a comparison of the change in the remuneration of the employees of TheWorks.co.uk plc. The Company has no 
employees other than the Executive Directors and, accordingly, strictly no disclosure is required. Given the added complexities of the 
impact in FY21 of furlough, the Company has not included the average employee salary changes between FY21 and FY22, but, in the 
interests of transparency, has provided information on the approach to the change in salary of the Group’s UK employees.

Notes to the table provide additional information in relation to the changes. Additional information in relation to the changes in previous 
years is set out in the relevant previous Directors’ remuneration reports.

Salary/fees

FY22–FY23

Taxable benefits

Annual bonus

FY21–FY22

FY20–FY21 

FY22–FY23

FY21–FY22

FY20–FY21

FY22–FY23

FY21–FY22

FY20–FY21

Executive Directors

Non-Executive Directors

UK employees’ average4

Gavin Peck

Steve Alldridge 1

Carolyn Bradley 1

Catherine
 Glickman

Harry Morley

3%

6%

27%

0%

18% 2

0%

N/A 3

N/A

N/A

3%

—

—

0%

—

—

N/A 3

—

—

0%

—

—

N/A

—

—

N/A

—

—

3%

6%

(2%)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

3%

6%

(2%)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

3.46% 5

See note to 
corresponding 
table in FY22 DRR

See note to 
corresponding 
table in FY22 DRR

5.5%6

(17.8%)

23.49%

N/A

See note to
corresponding
table in FY22 DRR

(60.4%)

1 

 Carolyn Bradley and Steve Alldridge were appointed during FY22, and therefore there is no disclosure for the change in their remuneration between 
FY21 and FY22. In the case of Steve Alldridge, the 3% change between FY22 and FY23 reflects the 3% increase to his salary for FY23.

2   Increase reflects increase due to SAYE discount included in taxable benefits.

3   No annual bonus was earned by Gavin Peck or Steve Alldridge in respect of FY23. Therefore, the percentage change between FY22 and FY23 is not 

considered to be a meaningful disclosure.

4   The UK employees’ average changes are calculated comparing the remuneration for the tax year ended 5 April 2022 with the remuneration for the tax 

year ended 5 April 2023 as this data is more readily available than data in respect of financial years. The value of SAYE options granted in November 2022 
has been excluded for consistency with the CEO pay ratio calculation on page 85.

5   In FY22 rates for store and Distribution Centre colleagues were increased in line with increases in the National Living and Minimum Wages, with colleagues 
aged 23 plus receiving an increase of 6.6% in April 2022. We applied an average 3% increase to non-minimum wage colleagues and maintained a wage 
differential in store teams. In FY23 rates for store and Distribution Centre colleagues were increased in line with increases in the National Living and 
Minimum Wages, with colleagues aged 23 plus receiving an increase of 9.7% in April 2023. Outside of all applicable NMW increases, an average of 7.1% 
was given across the business (7% average for store management and 5% average for Store Support and Distribution Centre colleagues).

6   The increase in benefits paid in FY23 is due to a rise in the number of managers in our support centre who receive taxable benefits. The percentage 

change reflects an increase in the average value of benefits provided from c.£119 to c.£126.

Relative importance of spend on pay
The following table sets out the total remuneration for all employees and the total shareholder distributions in FY22 and FY23. All figures 
provided are taken from the relevant Company accounts.

Total remuneration for all employees (including Executive Directors)

Dividends and share buyback

FY22
£000

60,031

–

FY23
£000

62,235

1,492

Percentage
 change

3.7%

N/A

Since there were no dividends or buybacks in FY22, the percentage change between FY22 and FY23 is not considered to be a 
meaningful disclosure.

84

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

CEO pay ratio
The table below shows how the CEO’s remuneration (as taken from the single figure remuneration table and, therefore, taking into 
account the CEO’s voluntary reduction in remuneration in relevant years as disclosed in previous Directors’ remuneration reports) 
compares to equivalent remuneration for full-time equivalent UK employees, ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile.

Method

25th percentile 

Median 

75th percentile 

25th percentile 

Median 

75th percentile 

Pay ratio

Remuneration values (£)

Year

FY23

Option C

FY22

Option C

FY21

Option C

FY20

Option C

17:1

31:1

17:1

21:1

16:1

30:1

16:1

19:1

15:1

27:1

15:1

17:1

Salary only

Total remuneration

Salary only

Total remuneration

Salary only

Total remuneration

Salary only

Total remuneration

19,760

19,773

18,533

18,637

18,138

18,138

17,077

17,077

20,342

20,473

19,115

19,487

18,720

18,720

18,013

18,094

21,674

21,997

20,389

21,591

19,448

19,675

19,925

20,338

The methodology applied to calculate pay ratios was as follows:

•  The regulations set out three methodologies for determining the CEO pay ratio. We have chosen ‘Option C’ consistent with the previous 

years’ calculations.

• 

• 

• 

 As ratios could be unduly impacted by joiners and leavers who may not participate in all remuneration arrangements in the year of joining 
and leaving, the Committee has modified the statutory basis to exclude any employee not employed throughout the financial year.

 The FY22 ratios in this table have been updated to reflect the CEO’s single total figure of remuneration for FY22 as included in this report 
and updated to reflect the ‘truing up’ of the FY22 LTIP figure (referred to on page 79).

 Employee pay data is based on full-time equivalent (FTE) base pay for UK employees as at 31 March of the relevant year (based on 
FTE salary for salaried employees and hourly pay rates for hourly paid employees), to which actual pension contributions, bonus and 
benefits have been added, except that the value of SAYE options has been excluded (for the purposes of the FY20, FY22 and FY23 
calculations) as their value is not considered to have a significant impact on the CEO pay ratios and sourcing the data for each 
employee is administratively burdensome. The employees have then been ranked by FTE pay and benefits calculated on this basis 
and the employees at the 25th percentile, 50th percentile (median) and 75th percentile have been identified. The FTE pay and benefits 
calculated on this basis for those three employees are then compared to the CEO single figure of remuneration to calculate the ratios; 
the calculations do not, therefore, take into account the impact of the identified employees having been furloughed during any year 
in which that was relevant.

• 

 For 2020 the CEO single figure of remuneration used comprises the single total figure for FY20 for Kevin Keaney, plus the single total 
figure for Gavin Peck for the period of the year from his appointment as CEO (16 January 2020) to 26 April 2020.

The CEO pay ratio has the potential to vary considerably year on year due to a significant proportion of the CEO’s remuneration package 
comprising performance related variable pay. Gavin Peck earned a bonus equal to 78% of salary in respect of FY22 and the vesting at 
38.4% of maximum of the LTIP award granted to him in September 2019 was similarly included in his FY22 single total figure of remuneration. 
As reported elsewhere in this Directors’ Remuneration Report, Gavin Peck did not earn a bonus in respect of FY23 and the estimated 
outturn of the LTIP granted to him in February 2021 is that the award will lapse in full.  The variance in incentive outcomes between FY22 
and FY23 is the primary reason for the decrease in the CEO pay ratio between FY22 and FY23.

The Company considers that the median pay ratio is consistent with pay, reward and progression policies for the Company’s employees 
as a whole.

Payments to past Directors and for loss of office – audited information
No payments for loss of office or to past Directors were made during FY23.

Implementation of the Policy 
Information on how the Committee intends to implement the Policy is set out in the Policy summary table on pages 76 and 77.

Shareholder voting at AGM
The following table shows the results of the binding vote on the Policy, and the advisory vote on the Directors’ Remuneration Report, 
at the 2022 AGM.

For (including discretionary)

Against

Withheld

On behalf of the Board.

Catherine Glickman
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
30 August 2023

Approval of the Remuneration Policy

Approval of the Directors’ 
remuneration report

Total number
 of votes

31,925,296

27,758

11,384

% of 
votes cast

99.91

0.09

N/A

Total 
number 
of votes

31,924,870

29,758

9,810

% of 
votes cast

99.91

0.09

N/A

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

85

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportDirectors’ report

The Directors present their report for the financial year ended 30 April 2023. Additional information which is incorporated by reference 
into this Directors’ report, including information required in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 (the Act) and Listing Rule 9.8.4R 
of the UK Financial Conduct Authority’s Listing Rules, can be located as follows:

Disclosure

Future business developments

Environmental policy

Employee engagement

Diversity policy

Viability 

Section 172 statement

Stakeholder engagement in key decisions

Location

Strategic report – pages 1 to 57.

ESG review – pages 29 to 35.

Our stakeholders – pages 26 and 27.
ESG review – pages 29 to 35. 
Corporate governance report – pages 62 to 65.

Nomination Committee report – pages 70 to 72.

Viability statement – pages 54 to 56.

Page 28.

Our stakeholders – pages 26 and 27. 
Section 172 statement – page 28.
Corporate governance report – pages 62 to 65

Corporate governance compliance statement

Corporate governance report – pages 62 to 65.

Financial risk management objectives and policies 
(including hedging policy and use of financial instruments)

Note 25 to the financial statements – pages 127 to 131.

Exposure to price risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and cash flow risk

Note 25 to the financial statements – pages 127 to 131.

Details of long-term incentive schemes

Directors’ remuneration report – pages 73 to 77.

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Page 89.

Directors
The Directors of the Company who held office throughout the period are set out below:

Carolyn Bradley (Chair)

Gavin Peck (CEO) 

Steve Alldridge (CFO)

Harry Morley (Senior Independent Director) 

Catherine Glickman (Non-Executive Director)

Summaries of the current Directors’ key skills and experience are included on pages 60 and 61.

Results and dividend
The results for the year are set out in the consolidated income statement on page 98. The Directors propose the payment of a final 
dividend of 1.6 pence per share on 2 November 2023 (with a record date of 6 October 2023), subject to approval on 4 October 2023.

Articles of Association
The rules governing the appointment and replacement of Directors are set out in the Company’s Articles. The Articles may be amended by 
a special resolution of the Company’s shareholders. The Articles also set out in full the powers of the Directors in relation to issuing shares 
and buying back the Company’s own shares. 

Share capital
Details of the Company’s share capital, including changes during the year, are set out in Note 24 to the financial statements. As at 30 April 
2023, the Company’s issued share capital consisted of 62,500,000 ordinary shares of 1 pence each. There have been no changes to the 
Company’s issued share capital since the financial period end.

Ordinary shareholders are entitled to receive notice of, and to attend and speak at, any general meeting of the Company. On a show of 
hands every shareholder present in person or by proxy (or being a corporation represented by a duly authorised representative) shall have 
one vote, and on a poll every shareholder who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for every share of which he is the holder. 
The Notice of AGM specifies deadlines for exercising voting rights and appointing a proxy or proxies.

Other than the general provisions of the Articles (and prevailing legislation) there are no specific restrictions of the size of a holding or on 
the transfer of the ordinary shares.

The Directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s shares that may result in the restriction of the transfer 
of securities or on voting rights. No shareholder holds securities carrying any special rights or control over the Company’s share capital.

86

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Authority for the Company to purchase its own shares
Subject to authorisation by shareholder resolution, the Company may purchase its own shares in accordance with the Act. Any shares 
which have been bought back may be held as treasury shares or cancelled immediately upon completion of the purchase.

At the Company’s AGM held on 27 October 2022, the Company was generally and unconditionally authorised by its shareholders to make 
market purchases (within the meaning of Section 693 of the Act) of up to a maximum of 6,250,000 of its ordinary shares. The Company 
has not repurchased any of its ordinary shares under this authority, which is due to expire at the AGM to be held on 4 October 2023, and 
accordingly has an unexpired authority to purchase up to 6,250,000 ordinary shares with a nominal value of £62,500.00. A resolution 
to renew the authority for a further year will be proposed at the 2023 AGM.

Directors’ interests
The number of ordinary shares of the Company in which the Directors were beneficially interested as at 30 April 2023 is set out in the 
Directors’ remuneration report on pages 73 to 75.

Directors’ indemnities
The Company’s Articles provide, subject to the provisions of UK legislation, an indemnity for Directors and Officers of the Company 
and the Group in respect of liabilities they may incur in the discharge of their duties or in the exercise of their powers.

Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover is maintained by the Company and is in place in respect of all the Company’s Directors 
at the date of this report. The Company reviews its level of cover on an annual basis.

Compensation for loss of office
The Company does not have any agreements with any Executive Director or employee that would provide compensation for loss of 
office or employment resulting from a takeover except that provisions of the Company’s LTIP and other share schemes may cause 
options and awards outstanding under such schemes to vest on a takeover. Further information is provided in the Directors’ remuneration 
report on pages 76 to 77.

Significant interests
The table below shows the interests in shares notified to the Company in accordance with the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules as at 30 April 2023, and 29 August 2023 (being the latest practicable date prior to publication of this Annual Report).

Name of shareholder

Schroders plc

Jupiter Fund Management plc

Hudson Management Limited

Graeme Coulthard

Downing Strategic Micro-Cap 
Investment Trust

As at 30 April 2023

As at 29 August 2023

Number of ordinary shares 
of 1 pence each held

Percentage of 
total voting rights held

Number of ordinary shares 
of 1 pence each held

Percentage of 
total voting rights held

12,043,141

5,317,667

3,911,000

3,500,000

2,750,000

19.27%

8.50%

6.25%

5.60%

4.40%

12,043,141

2,442,667

5,811,000

4,050,000

2,750,000

19.27%

3.90%

9.30%

6.48%

4.40%

Branches outside the UK
Other than ten stores located in the Republic of Ireland, the Company has no branches outside the UK.

Employee involvement
Information relating to employees of the Group and how the Company engages with its workforce can be found on pages 32 to 34

Disabled employees
It is the policy of the Group to provide equal recruitment and other opportunities for all colleagues regardless of sex, age, religion, 
race, disability or sexual orientation. The Group gives full consideration to applications for employment from disabled people, where 
they adequately fulfil the requirements of the job. Once employed by the Group, we ensure that disabled colleagues have full access 
to training and career development opportunities. Where colleagues become disabled, it is the Group’s policy to provide continuing 
employment and retraining where practicable.

Political donations
The Company did not make any political donations during the year.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

87

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportDirectors’ report continued

Change of control – significant agreements
There are a number of agreements that may take effect after, or terminate upon, a change of control of the Company, such as commercial 
contracts, bank loan agreements and property lease arrangements.

The only significant agreement to which the Company is a party that takes effect, alters or terminates upon a change of control of the Company 
following a takeover bid, and the effect thereof, is the Company’s committed bank facility dated 10 June 2022 which contains a provision such 
that, in the event of a change of control, the facility may be cancelled and all outstanding amounts, together with accrued interest, will become 
repayable on the date falling 30 days following written notice being given by the lenders that the facility has been cancelled.

Audit information
Each of the Directors at the date of the approval of this report confirms that:

•  So far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware.

•  The Director has taken all the reasonable steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of 

any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditor is aware of the information.

The confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the Act.

Auditor
A resolution to reappoint KPMG LLP will be proposed at the forthcoming AGM.

Annual General Meeting
The AGM will be held on 4 October 2023. The Notice of AGM is contained in a separate letter from the Chair accompanying this report.

Post-balance sheet events
Other than as disclosed in the Strategic report, there have been no material post-balance sheet events involving the Company or any 
of the Company’s subsidiaries as at the date of this report.

The Strategic report on pages 1 to 57 and this Directors’ report have been drawn up and presented in accordance with, and in reliance 
upon, applicable English company law and any liability of the Directors in connection with these reports shall be subject to the limitations 
and restrictions provided by such law.

By order of the Board

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
30 August 2023

88

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group and Parent Company financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and Parent Company financial statements for each financial year. Under that law, 
they are required to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with UK adopted International Accounting Standards and 
applicable law and have elected to prepare the Parent Company financial statements in accordance with UK accounting standards 
and applicable law, including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework.

Under company law, the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of the Group’s profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the 
Group and Parent Company financial statements, the Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant, reliable and prudent;

•  for the Group financial statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with UK adopted International 

Accounting Standards;

•  for the Parent Company annual statements, state whether applicable UK accounting standards have been followed, subject 

to any material departures disclosed and explained in the Parent Company financial statements;

•  assess the Group and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going 

concern; and

•  use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease 

operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Parent Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Parent Company and enable them to ensure 
that its financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are responsible for such internal control as they determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, 
and have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to 
prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, the directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance Statement that complies with that law and those regulations. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the company’s 
website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in 
other jurisdictions. 

Responsibility statement of the Directors in respect of the Annual Financial Report
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

•  the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as 
a whole; and

•  the Strategic report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the issuer and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.

We consider that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

By order of the Board

Gavin Peck
Chief Executive Officer
30 August 2023

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

89

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportIndependent auditor’s report
To the members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

1. Our opinion is unmodified
We have audited the financial statements of TheWorks.co.uk plc 
(“the Company”) for the 52 week period ended 30 April 2023 which 
comprise the Consolidated income statement, Consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, Consolidated statement of 
financial position, Consolidated statement of changes in equity, 
Consolidated cash flow statement, Company statement of 
financial position and Company statements of changes in equity 
and the related notes, including the accounting policies in note 1. 

Overview

Materiality: 
group financial 
statements as a whole

Coverage

Key audit matters 

£750k (2022: £750k)

0.27% (2022: 0.28%) of revenue

100% (2022: 100%) of revenue

2023 vs 2022

Recurring risks

Going concern

Existence, completeness 
and accuracy of 
inventory held in stores

Carrying amount of 
Parent Company 
investment in subsidiaries

Impairment of property, 
plant and equipment 
and right of use assets

In our opinion: 

•  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of 
the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 30 April 
2023 and of the Group’s loss for the 52 week period then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in 
accordance UK-adopted international accounting standards;

•  the parent Company financial statements have been properly 

prepared in accordance with UK accounting standards, including 
FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework; and

New risk

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with 

the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International 
Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities are described below. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis 
for our opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent with our report to 
the audit committee.

We were first appointed as auditor by the directors on 11 July 2018. The 
period of total uninterrupted engagement is for the 5 financial years 
ended 30 April 2023. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities 
under, and we remain independent of the Group in accordance 
with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard 
as applied to listed public interest entities. No non-audit services 
prohibited by that standard were provided. 

90

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

           
           
           
           
2. Material uncertainty related to going concern

The risk

Disclosure quality
The financial statements explain how the Board has 
formed a judgement that it is appropriate to adopt the 
going concern basis of preparation for the Group and 
parent Company.

That judgement is based on an evaluation of the inherent 
risks to the Group’s and Company’s business model and 
how those risks might affect the Group’s and Company’s 
financial resources or ability to continue operations over 
a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval 
of the financial statements.

The risk for our audit is whether or not those risks are such 
that they amounted to a material uncertainty that may 
cast significant doubt about the ability to continue as a 
going concern. If so, that fact is required to be disclosed 
(as has been done) and, along with a description of the 
circumstances, is a key financial statement disclosure.

Going concern
We draw 
attention to note 
1 to the financial 
statements which 
indicates that in 
the severe but 
plausible downside 
scenario the 
Group is forecast 
to breach its loan 
covenants during 
the going concern 
assessment period. 
These events and 
conditions, along 
with the other 
matters explained 
in note 1, constitute 
a material 
uncertainty 
that may cast 
significant doubt 
on the Group’s 
and the parent 
company’s ability 
to continue as a 
going concern.

Our opinion is not 
modified in respect 
of this matter.

Our response

Our procedures included: 

•  Funding assessment: Considering the 

availability and sufficiency of the financing 
arrangements in place at the Group, including 
the headroom on financial covenants in place on 
the Group’s renewed revolving credit facility

•  Sensitivity analysis: Challenging the stress 

testing performed by the Directors considering 
the severe but plausible scenarios that 
could arise;

•  Historical comparisons: Assessing historical 

forecasting accuracy, by comparing previous 
forecast results to those actually achieved by 
the Group;

•  Assessing assumptions: Assessing the key 

assumptions (including growth rates in turnover 
and margin expectations) as included in the 
directors’ business plans and approved at 
the period-end date by considering historic 
store performance, recent trading and sector 
knowledge to set our own expectations;

•  Evaluating directors’ intent: Evaluating the 
achievability of the actions the directors 
consider they would take to improve the position 
should the risks materialise, taking into account 
the extent to which the directors can control the 
timing and outcome of these;

•  Comparing assumptions: Considering whether 
the forecasts and assumptions used by the 
Directors are consistent with other forecasts 
used by the Group (including those used to 
assess recoverability of Parent Company 
investments in subsidiaries and recoverability of 
store assets); and

•  Assessing transparency: Considering whether 

the going concern disclosure in the basis 
of preparation of the accounts gives a full 
and accurate description of the Directors’ 
assessment of going concern, including the 
identified risks and corresponding assumptions.

Our results 
We found the going concern disclosure in note 1 with 
a material uncertainty to be acceptable (2022 result 
without any material uncertainty: acceptable).

3. Other key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by us, including those 
which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. Going concern is a significant key audit matter and is described in section 2 of our report. We summarise below 
the other key audit matters in decreasing order of audit significance, in arriving at our audit opinion above, together with our key audit 
procedures to address those matters and, as required for public interest entities, our results from those procedures. These matters were 
addressed, and our results are based on procedures undertaken, in the context of, and solely for the purpose of, our audit of the financial 
statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to that opinion, and we do not provide a 
separate opinion on these matters.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

91

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportIndependent auditor’s report continued
To the members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

3. Other key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement continued

The risk

Our response

Impairment of 
property, plant 
and equipment 
and right-
of-use assets
Carrying amount 
£78.5 million, out 
of the total PPE 
and ROUA of 
£79.2 million (2022: 
carrying amount 
£85.5 million, out 
of the total PPE 
and ROUA of £86.5 
million (restated)). 

Refer to page 67 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 115 
note 14 (financial 
disclosures – PPE 
and ROU assets).

Forecast-based assessment:
The Group has significant property, plant and equipment 
and right-of-use assets held on the consolidated 
balance sheet.

The Group estimates the recoverable amount of property, 
plant and equipment and right of use assets based on 
their value in use, derived from a discounted cash flow 
model prepared by management. The key assumptions 
applied by management are short-term sales growth, 
profit margin and discount rates, which all involve a high 
degree of estimation uncertainty.

The increased economic uncertainty and the cost of 
living crisis in the UK, has increased the risk in relation to 
the recoverability of store assets at the cash generating 
unit (“CGU”) level; each store being a CGU.

In addition as described in the financial statements 
Note 14 the Group have reconsidered the allocation 
of central costs to individual CGUs for the purposes of 
impairment testing.

Subjective estimate
Subjective inputs to the value in use calculation, such as 
the allocation of central overheads, discount rates and 
remaining asset lives require judgement.

Calculation error
The model used to calculate the value in use is complex, 
and so open to the possibility of mathematical error given 
the complexity of the impairment methodology.

Prior year adjustment
The estimates used in, and accuracy of calculation of the 
prior year adjustment could be incorrect. Furthermore, 
the disclosures presented may not adequately address 
the requirements of IAS 8 in relation to the description of 
the adjustment and the impact of the correction.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment for audit planning purposes we determined 
that the degree of estimation uncertainty to be less than 
that materiality, however in conducting our final audit 
work, we reassessed the degree of estimation uncertainty 
in relation to the value in use of store assets and we 
determined that the risk has increased. It has a high 
degree of estimation uncertainty with a potential range 
of reasonable outcomes greater than our materiality 
for the financial statements as a whole. The financial 
statements (note 14) disclose the  range/sensitivity 
estimated by the Group.

We performed the detailed tests below rather 
than seeking to rely on any of the Group’s controls 
because the nature of the balance is such that we 
would expect to obtain audit evidence primarily 
through the detailed procedures described.

Our procedures included:

•  Model design evaluation and re-performance: 
We evaluated the reasonableness of the design 
of VIU models in line with the requirements of 
the accounting standard and re-performed 
the calculations the Directors performed for 
determining the VIU of each cash generating 
unit, including assessing whether the allocation 
of central overhead across each of the CGU is 
appropriate.

•  Benchmarking assumptions: We compared the 
Group’s assumptions, in particular those relating 
to forecast short-term sales growth rates and 
discount rates, to externally derived data and 
industry forecasts.

•  Historical Comparisons: We assessed the 

Group’s performance against budget in the 
current and prior periods to evaluate the 
historical accuracy of the Group’s forecasts 
on a store by store basis and performed a 
retrospective review on any prior year provisions/
impairments.

•  Sensitivity Analysis: We performed sensitivity 

analysis on the assumptions namely the 
budgeted growth rates and discount rate.

•  Assessing transparency: We assessed whether 
the group’s disclosures about the sensitivity of 
the outcome of the impairment assessment to 
changes in key assumptions reflected the risks 
related to the valuation of store assets. We 
assessed if the disclosures in relation to the prior 
year adjustment were in accordance with IAS 8.

Our results 
We found the Group’s property, plant and 
equipment and right-of-use assets balances 
and the related impairment charges to be 
acceptable (2022: acceptable). We found the prior 
year adjustment and related disclosures to be 
acceptable.

92

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

3. Other key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement continued

The risk

Our response

We performed the detailed tests below rather 
than seeking to rely on any of the Group’s controls 
because the our knowledge of the design of these 
controls indicated that we would not be able to 
obtain the required evidence to support reliance 
on controls.

Our procedures included:

•  Test of detail: We counted 640 line items at 25 

stores close to the year end. We reconciled these 
to the year end listings and compared our count 
results with the company inventory records;

•  Assessing methodology: We assessed the 

methodology used by the group to calculate the 
shrinkage provision;

•  Independent reperformance: We performed 
our own evaluation of the shrinkage based 
on our count results, which we compared to 
management’s estimate; and

•  Assessing transparency: We assessed the 

adequacy of the group’s disclosures about the 
degree of estimation uncertainty involved in 
arriving at the shrinkage provision.

Our results 
The results of our testing were satisfactory and we 
found the existence, completeness and accuracy 
of Inventory to be acceptable (2022: acceptable).

Existence, 
completeness 
and accuracy 
of Inventory
Stores Inventory: 
£21.0 million; 
(2022: £20.4 million)

Refer to page 67 
(Audit Committee  
Report), and 
page 123 note 
17 (financial 
disclosures).

Subjective estimation:
Inventory is a significant balance. It is held in stores, at 
the Company warehouse and at a third- party logistics 
provider. The risks described below relate to inventory 
held at the stores.

It is usual in a retail environment for differences to arise 
between the inventory records and physical quantities 
for a variety of reasons, including theft and other losses, 
often referred to as shrinkage.

The existence and completeness of inventory and 
the extent of shrinkage was previously assessed by 
management through sample inventory counts at 
every store throughout the year (“tactical counts”) and 
complete inventory counts at a number of stores (“wall-
to-wall counts”). The inventory records were adjusted 
to reflect the results of management’s count processes 
and a shrinkage provision was established to cater for an 
estimate of the losses incurred between the count dates 
and the year end.

In the prior year, Management’s count processes in the 
stores were disrupted by a cyber incident in March 2022. 
As a result, management were not able to conduct as 
many wall-to-wall counts as planned to confirm the 
existence and completeness of store inventory during the 
course of the year. Therefore, management conducted 
wall-to- wall counts at a sample of stores and estimated 
the level of unrecognised shrinkage across the estate on 
this basis.

Management’s count processes in the stores for FY23 was 
to perform wall-to-wall inventory counts across all stores 
within the final quarter of the year to establish a new 
inventory volume baseline. Management expected that 
the pre-count inventory record contained inaccuracies 
and therefore variances identified in the count were not 
highly scrutinised. Additionally, the count process was 
new for FY23. Based on these factors we considered that 
there was a high risk that the counts would be executed 
incorrectly, or the results recorded incorrectly resulting in 
a material error in the inventory record.

Management still developed an estimate for the level of 
unrecognised shrinkage in the stores inventory balance, 
but this was based on count results from all stores and 
the period between the count date and year-end was 
far shorter for almost all stores. As a result, the provision 
for shrinkage was considered to have a far lower degree 
of estimation uncertainty with a potential range of 
outcomes smaller than our materiality for the financial 
statements as a whole.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

93

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportIndependent auditor’s report continued
To the members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

3. Other key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement continued

The risk

Our response

Carrying 
amount 
of Parent 
Company 
investment in 
subsidiaries
£38.4 million; 
(2022: £57.3 million)

Refer to page 67 
(Audit Committee  
Report), page 136 
note 33  (financial 
disclosures).

Forecast-based assessment:
The carrying amount of the Parent Company’s 
investments in subsidiaries represents 100% (2022: 80.1%) 
of the Parent Company’s total assets. The net assets 
of the subsidiaries are less than the carrying amount 
of the Parent Company’s investment which is therefore 
assessed with reference to their discounted forecast 
future cash flows. This is inherently judgemental due to 
the subjectivity and uncertainty involved in selecting the 
appropriate key assumptions, being long term growth 
rate, discount rate and underlying cashflows, and 
preparing the future discounted cash flow model.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment, we determined that the carrying value of the 
parent company’s investment in subsidiaries has a high 
degree of estimation uncertainty, with a potential range 
of reasonable outcomes greater than our materiality 
for the financial statements as a whole. The financial 
statements (Note  33) disclose the sensitivity estimated by 
the Company.

We performed the tests below rather than seeking 
to rely on any of the Group’s controls because the 
nature of the balance is such that we would expect 
to obtain audit evidence primarily through the 
detailed procedures described.

Our procedures included:

•  Test of Detail: We used our sector 

knowledge and understanding of the 
business and considered whether or not 
they had been appropriately captured in the 
impairment models;

•  Our valuation expertise: We used experts to 
assist us in assessing appropriateness of the 
methodology and assumptions. In addition we 
performed an independent calculation of the 
discount rate based on market data to assist us 
in assessing the discount rate assumptions used 
by the Group;

•  Assessing assumptions: We assessed the key 

assumptions (including growth rates in turnover 
and margin expectations) as included in the 
directors’ business plans and approved at 
the period-end date by considering historic 
performance and industry forecasts to set our 
own expectations;

•  Sensitivity Analysis: We applied sensitivities to 
key assumptions to assess their impact on the 
recoverability of the assets;

•  Historical comparison: We evaluated the 

historical accuracy of the Group’s forecasts by 
comparing previous budget to actual results;

•  Comparing valuations: We compared the results 
of discounted cash flows against the Group’s 
market capitalisation; and

•  Assessing transparency: We also considered 
the adequacy of the Group’s disclosure of the 
key risks and sensitivity around the outcome, 
and whether that disclosure reflected the 
risks inherent in the valuation of investments 
in subsidiaries.

Our results 
The results of our testing were satisfactory and 
we found the impairment of £19.6m recorded and 
the resulting carrying value of the investment in 
subsidiaries to be acceptable (2022: acceptable).

94

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

4. Our application of materiality and an overview of the 
scope of our audit
Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set 
at £750k (2022: £750k), determined with reference to a benchmark 
of revenue of £280m (2022: £265m) as disclosed in note 3, of which it 
represents 0.27% (2022: 0.28%).

Benchmark – Revenue 
£280m (2022: £265m)

Group materiality 
£750k (2022: £750k)

Materiality for the parent Company financial statements as a 
whole was set at £412k (2022: £600k), determined with reference 
to a benchmark of Company net assets, of which it represents 
1.40% (2022: 1.17%).

In line with our audit methodology, our procedures on individual 
account balances and disclosures were performed to a lower 
threshold, performance materiality, so as to reduce to an acceptable 
level the risk that individually immaterial misstatements in individual 
account balances add up to a material amount across the 
financial statements as a whole.

Performance materiality was set at 65% (2022: 65%) of materiality 
for the financial statements as a whole, which equates to £487.5k 
(2022: £487.5k) for the Group and £267k (2022: £390k) for the parent 
Company. We applied this percentage in our determination of 
performance materiality based on the level of misstatements 
and control deficiencies in the control environment during the 
prior period.

9595++55++II

  Revenue

  Group materiality

£750k 
Whole financial statements 
materiality (2022: £750k)

£487.5k 
Whole financial statements 
performance materiality 
(2022: £487.5k)

£37.5k 
Misstatements reported 
to the audit committee 
(2022: £37.5k)

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any corrected 
or uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £37.5k 
(2022: £37.5k), in addition to other identified misstatements that 
warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

The scope of the audit work performed was predominately 
substantive as we placed limited reliance upon the Group’s internal 
control over financial reporting.

The group team performed the audit of the group as if it was a 
single aggregated set of financial information. The audit was 
performed using materiality and performance materiality level 
set out above.

5. Going concern
The directors have prepared the financial statements on the 
going concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the group 
or the company, or to cease their operations, and as they have 
concluded that the group and the company’s financial position 
means that this is realistic for at least 12 months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements (“the going concern period”). 
As stated in section 2 of our report, they have also concluded that 
there is a material uncertainty related to going concern.

An explanation of how we evaluated management’s assessment of 
going concern is set out in section 2 of our report. 

Our conclusions based on this work:

•  we consider that the directors’ use of the going concern basis 
of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements 
is appropriate;

•  we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation 
to the directors’ statement in note 1 to the financial statements 
on the use of the going concern basis of accounting, and 
their identification therein of a material uncertainty over the 
Group and Company’s use of that basis for the going concern 
period; and

•  the related statement under the Listing Rules set out on page 

86 is materially consistent with the financial statements and our 
audit knowledge.

6. Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – 
ability to detect
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement 
due to fraud
To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud risks”) 
we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an incentive 
or pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to commit 
fraud. Our risk assessment procedures included:

•  Enquiring of directors and inspection of policy documentation 
as to the Group’s and the Company’s high-level policies and 
procedures to prevent and detect fraud and the Group’s and the 
Company’s channel for “whistleblowing”, as well as whether they 
have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud.

•  Reading Board minutes.

•  Considering remuneration incentive schemes and performance 
targets for management and directors including the EPS target 
for management remuneration.

•  Held fraud risks discussions with Forensic Specialists.

We communicated identified fraud risks throughout the audit 
team and remained alert to any indications of fraud throughout 
the audit.

As required by auditing standards, and taking into account 
possible pressures to meet profit targets and our overall knowledge 
of the control environment we perform procedures to address the 
risk of management override of controls, in particular the risk that 
Group management may be in a position to make inappropriate 
accounting entries and the risk of bias in accounting estimates 
and judgements such as dilapidations, cashflow and impairment 
assumptions. On this audit we do not believe there is a fraud risk 
related to revenue recognition because transactions are highly 
disaggregated, individually immaterial and quick cash settlement.

We did not identify any additional fraud risks.

We performed procedures including:

• 

Identifying journal entries to test based on risk criteria and 
comparing the identified entries to supporting documentation. 
These included those posted to unusual accounts.

•  Assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting 

estimates are indicative of a potential bias.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

95

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportIndependent auditor’s report continued
To the members of TheWorks.co.uk plc

6. Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability 
to detect continued
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due 
to non-compliance with laws and regulations
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably 
be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements 
from our general commercial and sector experience and through 
discussion with the directors and others management (as required 
by auditing standards) and discussed with the directors (and other 
management) the policies and procedures regarding compliance 
with laws and regulations.

As the Group and Company are regulated, our assessment of risks 
involved gaining an understanding of the control environment including 
the entity’s procedures for complying with regulatory requirements.

We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout our 
team and remained alert to any indications of non- compliance 
throughout the audit.

The potential effect of these laws and regulations on the financial 
statements varies considerably.

Firstly, the Group and Company are subject to laws and regulations 
that directly affect the financial statements including financial 
reporting legislation (including related companies legislation), 
distributable profits legislation and taxation legislation and we 
assessed the extent of compliance with these laws and regulations 
as part of our procedures on the related financial statement items.

Secondly, the Group and Company are subject to many other 
laws and regulations where the consequences of non-compliance 
could have a material effect on amounts or disclosures in the 
financial statements, for instance through the imposition of fines 
or litigation We identified the following areas as those most likely 
to have such an effect: health and safety, data protection laws, 
anti-bribery, employment law, regulatory capital and liquidity, 
recognising the regulated nature of the Group’s and Company’s 
activities. Auditing standards limit the required audit procedures 
to identify non-compliance with these laws and regulations to 
enquiry of the directors and other management and inspection of 
regulatory and legal correspondence, if any. Therefore if a breach 
of operational regulations is not disclosed to us or evident from 
relevant correspondence, an audit will not detect that breach.

Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or breaches of 
law or regulation
Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an unavoidable 
risk that we may not have detected some material misstatements 
in the financial statements, even though we have properly planned 
and performed our audit in accordance with auditing standards. 
For example, the further removed non- compliance with laws 
and regulations is from the events and transactions reflected 
in the financial statements, the less likely the inherently limited 
procedures required by auditing standards would identify it.

In addition, as with any audit, there remained a higher risk of 
non-detection of fraud, as these may involve collusion, forgery, 
intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal 
controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect material 
misstatement. We are not responsible for preventing non-compliance 
or fraud and cannot be expected to detect non- compliance with 
all laws and regulations.

7. We have nothing to report on the other information 
in the Annual Report
The directors are responsible for the other information presented 
in the Annual Report together with the financial statements. 
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other 
information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion 
or, except as explicitly stated below, any form of assurance 
conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether, based on our financial statements audit work, 
the information therein is materially misstated or inconsistent with 
the financial statements or our audit knowledge. Based solely on 
that work we have not identified material misstatements in the 
other information.

Strategic report and directors’ report
Based solely on our work on the other information:

•  we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic 

report and the directors’ report;

• 

• 

in our opinion the information given in those reports for the 
financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and

in our opinion those reports have been prepared in accordance 
with the Companies Act 2006.

Directors’ remuneration report
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to 
be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006.

Disclosures of emerging and principal risks and longer-term viability
We are required to perform procedures to identify whether there 
is a material inconsistency between the directors’ disclosures in 
respect of emerging and principal risks and the viability statement, 
and the financial statements and our audit knowledge.

Based on those procedures, other than the material uncertainty 
related to going concern referred to above, we have nothing 
further material to add or draw attention to in relation to:

•  the directors’ confirmation within the Viability Statement page 54 
that they have carried out a robust assessment of the emerging 
and principal risks facing the Group, including those that would 
threaten its business model, future performance, solvency and liquidity;

•  the Emerging and Principal Risks disclosures describing these 

risks and how emerging risks are identified, and explaining how 
they are being managed and mitigated; and

•  the directors’ explanation in the Viability Statement of how 
they have assessed the prospects of the Group, over what 
period they have done so and why they considered that period 
to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether they 
have a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able 
to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall 
due over the period of their assessment, including any related 
disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications 
or assumptions.

We are also required to review the Viability Statement, set out on 
page 54 under the Listing Rules. Based on the above procedures, 
we have concluded that the above disclosures are materially 
consistent with the financial statements and our audit knowledge.

Our work is limited to assessing these matters in the context of 
only the knowledge acquired during our financial statements 
audit. As we cannot predict all future events or conditions and as 
subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent 
with judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made, 
the absence of anything to report on these statements is not a 
guarantee as to the Group’s and Company’s longer-term viability.

96

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Auditor’s responsibilities
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether 
the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our 
opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high level 
of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit conducted 
in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or 
error and are considered material if, individually or in aggregate, 
they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial statements.

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s 
website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

The Company is required to include these financial statements 
in an annual financial report prepared using the single electronic 
reporting format specified in the TD ESEF Regulation. This auditor’s 
report provides no assurance over whether the annual financial 
report has been prepared in accordance with that format.

10. The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe 
our responsibilities
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in 
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the 
Company’s members those matters we are required to state to 
them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest 
extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility 
to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members, 
as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we 
have formed.

Gordon Docherty
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor
Chartered Accountants
One Snowhill
Snowhill Queensway
Birmingham
B4 6GH
30 August 2023

7. We have nothing to report on the other information 
in the Annual Report continued
Corporate governance disclosures
We are required to perform procedures to identify whether there 
is a material inconsistency between the directors’ corporate 
governance disclosures and the financial statements and our 
audit knowledge.

Based on those procedures, we have concluded that each of the 
following is materially consistent with the financial statements and 
our audit knowledge:

•  the directors’ statement that they consider that the annual 
report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, 
balanced and understandable, and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy;

•  the section of the annual report describing the work of the 

Audit Committee, including the significant issues that the audit 
committee considered in relation to the financial statements, 
and how these issues were addressed; and

•  the section of the annual report that describes the review of 

the effectiveness of the Group’s risk management and internal 
control systems.

We are required to review the part of the Corporate Governance 
Report relating to the Group’s compliance with the provisions of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code specified by the Listing Rules for 
our review. We have nothing to report in this respect.

8. We have nothing to report on the other matters on 
which we are required to report by exception
Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to you if, 
in our opinion:

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent 

Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 
received from branches not visited by us; or

•  the parent Company financial statements and the part of 

the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law 

are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we 

require for our audit.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

9. Respective responsibilities
Directors’ responsibilities
As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 89, 
the directors are responsible for: the preparation of the financial 
statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable 
the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing the Group 
and parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; and 
using the going concern basis of accounting unless they either 
intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

97

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportConsolidated income statement
For the period ended 30 April 2023

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Other operating income/(expense)

Distribution expenses

Administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance income

Finance expenses

Net financing expense

Profit before tax

Taxation

Profit for the period

Alternative performance measure 
Profit before tax and IFRS 16 

Basic earnings per share (pence)

Diluted earnings per share (pence)

52 weeks to 30 April 2023

52 weeks to 1 May 2022 
(Restated – Note 14)

Result before
 Adjusting items
£000

Note

3

6

4

7

9

10

5

12

12

280,102

(231,150)

48,952

8

(10,284)

(24,197)

14,479

227

(4,648)

(4,421)

10,058

265

10,323

3,025

16.5

16.4

Adjusting
items
£000

—

(5,052)

(5,052)

—

—

—

(5,052)

—

—

—

(5,052)

—

(5,052)

Total
£000

280,102

(236,202)

43,900

8

(10,284)

(24,197)

9,427

227

(4,648)

(4,421)

5,006

265

5,271

Result before
 Adjusting items
£000

264,630

(209,598)

55,032

(111)

(9,128)

(24,116)

21,677

16

(5,192)

(5,176)

16,501

(276)

16,225

Adjusting
items
£000

-

(2,262)

(2,262)

—

—

—

(2,262)

—

—

(2,262)

—

(2,262)

(1,488)

1,537

10,980

(2,191)

8.4

8.4

26.0

25.6

Total
£000

264,630

(211,860)

52,770

(111)

(9,128)

(24,116)

19,415

16

(5,192)

(5,176)

14,239

(276)

13,963

8,789

22.3

22.0

Profit for the period is attributable to equity holders of the Parent.

98

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the period ended 30 April 2023

Profit for the year

Items that may be recycled subsequently into profit and loss

Cash flow hedges – changes in fair value

Cash flow hedges – reclassified to profit and loss

Cost of hedging – changes in fair value

Cost of hedging – reclassified to profit and loss

Tax relating to components of other comprehensive income

Other comprehensive (expense)/income for the period, net of income tax

Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to equity shareholders of the Parent

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000

13,963

4,181

(321)

(83)

94

-

3,871

17,834

FY23
£000

5,271

(2,862)

(62)

(162)

91

262

(2,733)

2,538

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

99

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportConsolidated statement of financial position
As at 30 April 2023

Non-current assets

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Deferred tax assets

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Derivative financial asset

Current tax asset

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Derivative financial liability

Current tax liability

Non-current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Provisions

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity holders of the Parent

Share capital

Share premium

Merger reserve

Share based payment reserve

Hedging reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity

Note

13

14

14, 15

16

17

18

25

19

15, 20

21

22

25

15, 20

22

24

24

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000

1,617 

9,896 

76,621 

4,708 

92,842 

29,387 

8,427 

2,393 

— 

16,280 

56,487 

FY23
£000

916

11,733

67,463

4,854

84,966

33,441

7,507

—

1,149

10,196

52,293

137,259

149,329 

23,449

34,479

565

1,048

—

25,434 

35,958 

204 

— 

740 

59,541

62,336 

74,766

1,298

76,064

85,702 

913 

86,615 

135,605

148,951 

1,654

378 

625

28,322

(54)

2,780

(331)

625 

28,322 

(54)

2,252 

2,227 

(29,688)

(32,994)

1,654

378 

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 30 August 2023 and were signed on its behalf by:

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 11325534

100

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Attributable to equity holders of the Company

(441)

651

651

378

5,271

(2,733)

2,538

175

528

(1,492)

(473)

(1,437)

Reported balance at 2 May 2021

Cumulative adjustment to opening balance (Note 14)

Restated balance at 2 May 2021

Total comprehensive income for the period

Profit for the period (Restated – Note 14)

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for the period

Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging transferred 
to the cost of inventory (Note 25)

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charges

Total transactions with owners

Share
capital
£000

625

-

625

Share
premium
£000

28,322

-

28,322

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(54)

-

(54)

—

—

—

—

—

—

Merger
reserve
£000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£000

Hedging
reserve 1
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

1,601

(1,203)

(20,463)

Total
equity
£000

8,828

-

-

(26,494)

(26,494)

1,601

(1,203)

(46,957)

(17,666)

13,963

—

13,963

13,963

3,871

17,834

—

—

—

—

651

651

—

3,871

3,871

(441)

—

—

—

—

—

Balance at 1 May 2022 (Restated – Note 14)

625

28,322

(54)

2,252

2,227

(32,994)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the period

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive expense

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the period

Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging transferred 
to the cost of inventory (Note 25)

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charges

Dividend

Own shares purchased by employee benefit trust

Total transactions with owners

Balance at 30 April 2023

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

528

—

—

528

—

(2,733)

(2,733)

175

—

—

—

—

5,271

—

5,271

—

—

(1,492)

(473)

(1,965)

625

28,322

(54)

2,780

(331)

(29,688)

1,654

1 

 Hedging reserve includes £170k (FY22: £175k) in relation to changes in forward points which are recognised in other comprehensive income and 
accumulated as a cost of hedging within the hedging reserve.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

101

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportConsolidated cash flow statement
For the period ended 30 April 2023

Profit for the year (including Adjusting items)

Adjustments for:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Impairment of property, plant and equipment

Reversal of impairment of property, plant and equipment

Depreciation of right-of-use assets

Impairment of right-of-use assets

Reversal of impairment of right-of-use assets

Amortisation of intangible assets

Impairment of intangible assets

Derivative exchange (gain)/loss

Financial income

Financial expense

Interest on lease liabilities

Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Profit on disposal of right-of-use assets and lease liability

Loss on disposal of intangible assets

Share-based payment charges

Taxation

Operating cash flows before changes in working capital

Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables

Increase in inventories

(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables

Increase in provisions

Cash flows from operating activities

Corporation tax paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment

Capital contributions received from landlords

Acquisition of intangible assets

Interest received

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Payment of lease liabilities (capital)

Payment of lease liabilities (interest)

Payment of RCF fees

Other interest paid

RCF drawdown

Repayment of bank borrowings

Dividend paid

Purchase of treasury shares

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Exchange rate movements

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

102

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

FY23
£000

5,271

4,458

944

(574)

14,840

6,126

(2,562)

878

1,118

(721)

(227)

518

4,130

149

(1,105)

14

528

(265)

33,520

1,033

(3,129)

(1,443)

746

30,727

(1,508)

29,219

(7,296)

1,928

(1,309)

227

(6,450)

(22,672)

(4,130)

(336)

(321)

4,000

(4,000)

(1,492)

(473)

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000

13,963

4,040

1,389

(573)

15,094

6,165

(6,094)

567

1,375

289

(16)

692

4,500

179

(441)

—

651

276

42,056

(1,514)

(892)

9,336

399

49,385

(222)

49,163

(2,818)

882

(1,015)

16

(2,935)

(25,969)

(4,500)

—

(157)

—

(7,500)

—

—

(29,424)

(38,126)

(6,655)

571

16,280

10,196

8,102

(137)

8,315

16,280

Notes to the consolidated financial statements
(Forming part of the financial statements)

1. Accounting policies
Where accounting policies are particular to an individual note, narrative regarding the policy is included with the relevant note; for 
example, the accounting policy in relation to inventory is detailed in Note 17 (Inventories). 

(a) General information
TheWorks.co.uk plc is a leading UK multi-channel value retailer of arts and crafts, stationery, toys, games and books, offering customers a 
differentiated proposition as a value alternative to full price specialist retailers. The Group operates a network of over 500 stores in the UK 
& Ireland and online.

TheWorks.co.uk plc (the ‘Company’) is a UK-based public limited company (11325534) with its registered office at Boldmere House, Faraday 
Avenue, Hams Hall Distribution Park, Coleshill, Birmingham B46 1AL. 

These consolidated financial statements for the 52 weeks ended 30 April 2023 (FY23 or the ‘Period’) comprise the results of the Company 
and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the ‘Group’) and are presented in pounds sterling. All values are rounded to the nearest 
thousand (£000), except when otherwise indicated. 

(b) Basis of preparation
The Group financial statements have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards.

The preparation of the financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect 
the application of policies, and the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and associated 
assumptions are based on historical experience, future budgets and forecasts, and various other factors that are believed to be 
reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and 
liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in 
which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects 
both current and future periods. The Group’s significant judgements and estimates relate to going concern and fixed asset impairment; 
these are described in Note 1(f).

(i) Going concern
The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which the Directors consider appropriate for the reasons set 
out below.

The Directors have assessed the prospects of the Group, taking into account its current position and the potential impact of the principal 
risks documented in the Strategic report on pages 1 to 57. The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which 
the Directors consider appropriate having made this assessment.

The Group has prepared cash flow forecasts for a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of these financial statements 
(the going concern assessment period), based on the Board’s forecast for FY24 and its 3 Year Plan, referred to as the ‘Base Case’ scenario. 
In addition, a ‘severe but plausible’ ‘Downside Case’ sensitivity has been prepared to support the Board’s conclusion regarding going 
concern, by stress testing the Base Case to indicate the financial headroom resulting from applying more pessimistic assumptions.

In assessing the basis of preparation the Directors have considered:

•  the external environment;

•  the Group’s financial position including the quantum and expectations regarding availability of bank facilities;

•  the potential impact on financial performance of the risks described in the Strategic report;

•  the output of the Base Case scenario, which mirrors the Group’s 3 year plan and therefore represents their estimate of the most likely 

financial performance over the forecast period;

•  measures to maintain or increase liquidity in the event of a significant downturn in trading;

•  the resilience of the Group to these risks having a more severe impact, evaluated via the Downside Case which shows the impact on the 

Group’s cash flows, bank facility headroom and covenants.

These factors are described below.

External environment
The risks which are considered the most significant to this evaluation relate to the economy and the market, specifically their effect on 
the strength of trading conditions, and the Group’s ability to successfully execute its strategy. The risk of weaker consumer demand is 
considered to be the greater of these risks, due to the continued high level of inflation and its potential effect on economic growth and 
consumer spending.

An emerging risk has been noted in relation to the possible effects of climate change, but this is not expected to have a material financial 
impact on the Group during the forecast period.  

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

103

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(i) Going concern continued
Financial position and bank facilities
At the end of FY23 the Group held net cash at bank of £10.2m (FY22: net cash at bank of £16.3m).

After the Period end, the Group extended the tenor of its bank facility by one year and it now expires on 30 November 2026. At the 
same time, following a review of the historic utilisation of the facility, the Group’s anticipated future cash requirements, and the costs of 
maintaining the facility, the Group requested that HSBC reduce the size of the facility from £30m to £20m.    

The facility includes two financial covenants which are tested quarterly: 

1. 

the “Leverage Ratio” or level of net debt to LTM (last twelve months’) EBITDA must not exceed 2.5 times during the life of the facility.

2. 

 the “Fixed Charge Cover” or ratio of LTM EBITDA prior to deducting rent and interest, to LTM rent and interest. This covenant increases 
in steps to reflect the expectation of progressively improving financial performance during the life of the facility, as follows: until 
October 2023, the ratio must be at least 1.20 times; for the following 12 months the ratio must be at least 1.25 times, and thereafter at 
least 1.30 times.

The Group expects to be able to operate and have sufficient headroom within these covenants during the forecast period.

Potential impact of risks on financial scenarios 
It is considered unlikely that all the risks described in the Strategic report would manifest themselves to adversely affect the business at 
the same time.  The Base Case scenario/the Group’s 3 year financial plan, implicitly already takes into account the risks described, and 
assumes that they manifest themselves in a way or to an extent that might be considered “neutral”.

The Downside Case scenario assumes that there are more severely negative effects than in the Base Case. In particular, the Downside 
Case assumptions are that macroeconomic conditions are significantly worse, resulting in reduced consumer spending and lower sales. 
It should be noted that the Base Case already takes into account the current subdued consumer market conditions. The Downside Case 
assumes that conditions become worse still from the second half of the FY24 financial year.

Base Case scenario
The Base Case scenario assumptions reflect the following factors:

•  Store sales (which represent over 85% of total sales) during the first part of FY24 are above the Base Case requirement but online sales 
are below it. The Group is implementing plans to improve its online profitability in the medium term; in the short term, costs relating to 
the online business are being tightly controlled to ensure that they reflect the reduced sales level.   

•  The Base Case gross margin percentage reflects the expected full year effect in FY24 of targeted price increases applied since the 
beginning of 2023 and also significantly lower ocean container freight costs. These favourable factors are partially offset by a less 
favourable hedged FX rate than in FY23. 

•  Anticipated further inflationary effects, in particular the increase in the National Living Wage. In respect of other costs, notably property 

occupancy costs, it is not expected that there will be further significant inflationary effects during FY24 and FY25, following the 
significant increases (for example in electricity costs) already experienced during FY23.

•  Capital expenditure levels are in line with the Group’s strategic plan. A significant proportion of the Group’s capital expenditure is 

discretionary, particularly over a short-term time period. As a result, if required, it can therefore be reduced substantially, for example, in 
the event the Group needing to preserve cash. 

•  The anticipated costs of the Group’s net zero climate change commitments have been incorporated within the Base Case model. As set 
out in the climate related disclosures on pages 36 to 44, the impact on the Group’s financial performance and position is not expected 
to be material in the short term.

•  The plan makes provision for dividend payments.

Under the Base Case scenario, the Group expects to make routine operational use of its bank facility each year as stock levels are 
increased in September-October, prior to peak sales occurring. This is consistent with the normal pattern experienced prior to COVID-19.  

The output of the Base Case model scenario indicates that the Group has sufficient financial resources to continue to operate as a going 
concern and for the financial statements to be prepared on this basis. 

Measures to maintain or increase liquidity in circumstances such as are described below
If necessary, mitigating actions can and would be taken in response to a significant downturn in trading such as is described below, which 
would increase liquidity. 

These include, for example, delaying and reducing stock purchases, stock liquidation, reductions in capital expenditure, the review of 
payment terms and the review of dividend levels. Some of these potential mitigations have been built into the Downside Case model, 
and some are additional measures that would be available in the event of that scenario, or worse, actually occurring. 

104104

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(i) Going concern continued
Severe but plausible Downside Case scenario
The Downside Case makes the following assumptions to reflect more adverse macroeconomic conditions compared to the Base Case:

•  Store LFL sales are assumed to be 5% lower than in the Base Case from October 2023 until January 2025.

• 

In this scenario online sales are assumed to be lower than in the Base Case during FY24 despite the Group’s attempts to increase them, 
but show recovery in FY25. 

•  The product gross margin assumptions are the same as in the Base Case other than in January 2024 when it is lower, to allow for the 

clearance of stock which is assumed would have accumulated due to the inability to reduce stock purchases immediately in response 
to the lower sales level. Expected FX requirements are hedged until mid FY25, and freight rates are hedged until the end of 2023. Beyond 
that time, it is not anticipated that there will be any interruption to global freight systems as was experienced as a result of the COVID 
pandemic, which were a consequence of unique circumstances. Other gross margin inputs are relatively controllable, including via the 
setting of selling prices to reflect any systematic changes in the cost price of goods bought for resale.  

•  Volume related costs in the Downside Case are lowered where they logically alter in a direct relationship with sales levels, for example, 

forecast online fulfilment and marketing costs. The model also reflects certain steps which could be taken to mitigate the effect of lower 
sales, depending on management’s assessment of the situation at the time. These include adjustments to stock purchases, reducing 
capital expenditure, reductions in labour usage, a reduction in discounts allowed as part of the Group’s loyalty scheme and the 
suspension of dividend payments. 

•  The combined financial effect of the modified assumptions in this scenario compared with the Base Case, during FY24 and FY25, 

including implementing some of the mitigating activities available, would result in:

•  a reduction in store net sales of approximately £34m.

•  a reduction in online net sales of approximately £1m.

•  a reduction to EBITDA of approximately £9m.  

Under this scenario the Group will draw on its bank facility prior to Christmas 2023 but, as a result of the mitigating actions that would 
be taken in H2 FY24 in response to a downturn in sales, particularly in reducing the value of stock bought for resale, it would not make 
subsequent use of the bank facility.

The bank facility financial covenants are complied with during the pre-Christmas 2023 period when the facility is being used, but the 
forecast indicates that the Fixed Charge covenant will not be complied with throughout FY25, although at this time, the facility is not 
expected to be in use under this scenario.  

On the basis of this Downside Case scenario with the “severe but plausible” set of assumptions as described, the business would continue 
to have adequate resources to continue in operation.

However, the cash headroom at the quarterly covenant testing points in FY25 falling within the going concern period is limited, and there 
are reasonably plausible scenarios in which this headroom could be eroded and create a borrowing requirement. For example, if sales 
decreased by a further 1% during the going concern period compared with the Downside Case, a small borrowing requirement could arise. 
The Group has a strong relationship with its bank, HSBC, and has a recent track record of working collaboratively with the bank to resolve 
potential covenant issues, for example, a waiver was agreed by HSBC in 2021 as noted in the Group’s FY21 Annual Report. Despite this 
strong relationship with the bank and the recent evidence of successfully managing comparable situations, if a borrowing requirement 
arose when the financial covenants are not complied with, there is a risk that the Group would not be able to utilise its borrowing facilities 
if required. 

The Directors believe that, should such a situation arise in practice, it would have time before a potential breach to mitigate further, 
and potentially to make arrangements with the bank, as has occurred previously, to adjust the covenant levels to prevent a breach. 
Furthermore, the Group has successfully managed through challenging conditions during the recent COVID pandemic, and the Directors 
believe it unlikely that comparably challenging conditions will be experienced during the forecast period, despite the concerns regarding 
the current macroeconomic conditions. Nevertheless, despite the Directors’ confidence in relation to these matters, there is no certainty 
as to whether the mitigating actions would provide the level of liquidity required in the time available to implement them, nor whether the 
bank would make adjustments to the financial covenants.

Going concern and basis of preparation conclusion
Based on all of the above considerations the Directors believe that it remains appropriate to prepare the financial statements on a 
going concern basis. However, these circumstances indicate the existence of a material uncertainty related to events or conditions that 
may cast significant doubt on the Group’s and the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern and, therefore, that the Group and 
Company may be unable to realise their assets and discharge their liabilities in the normal course of business. The financial statements do 
not include any adjustments that would result from the basis of preparation being inappropriate.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

105105

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report1. Accounting policies continued
(b) Basis of preparation continued
(ii) New accounting standards
The Group has applied the following new standards and interpretations for the first time for the annual reporting period commencing 
2 May 2022:

•  Annual Improvements to IFRS 2018-2020 (Amendments to IFRS 1, IFRS 9, IFRS 16 and IAS 41)

•  Onerous Contracts – Cost of Fulfilling a Contract (Amendments to IAS 37)

•  Property, Plant and Equipment – Proceeds before Intended Use (Amendments to IAS 16)

•  References to the Conceptual Framework (Amendments to IFRS 3)

•  COVID-19 Related Rent Concessions beyond 30 June 2021 (Amendments to IFRS 16)

The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above has not led to any changes to the Group’s accounting policies or had any 
other material impact on the financial position or performance of the Group.

As at the date of approval of these financial statements, the following standards and interpretations, which have not been applied in 
these financial statements, were in issue, but not yet effective:

• 

• 

Insurance Contracts (IFRS 17)

Initial Application of IFRS 17 and IFRS 9 – Comparative Information (Amendments to IFRS 17)

•  Extension to the Temporary Exemption from Applying IFRS 9 (Amendments to IFRS 4)

•  Disclosure of Accounting Policies (Amendments to IAS 1)

•  Deferred Tax Related to Assets and Liabilities Arising from a Single Transaction (Amendments to IAS 12)

•  Definition of Accounting Estimates (Amendments to IAS 8)

The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above is not expected to have a material impact on the financial position or 
performance of the Group.

(c) Accounting convention
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for certain financial assets and 
financial liabilities (including derivative instruments), which are held at fair value.

(d) Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities controlled by the Company 
(its subsidiaries). Control is achieved when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity 
and has the ability to direct the activities that affect those returns through its power over the entity. Consolidation of a subsidiary begins 
from the date control commences and continues until control ceases. The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee if 
circumstances indicate that there are changes to the elements of control detailed above.

An Employee Benefit Trust operated on the Group’s behalf (EBT) is acting as an agent of the Company, therefore the assets and liabilities 
of the EBT are aggregated into the Company balance sheet and shares held by the EBT in the Company are presented as a deduction 
from equity.

(e) Business combinations
Subject to the transitional relief in IFRS 1, all business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. Business 
combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method as at the acquisition date, which is the date on which control is transferred 
to the Group.

The Group measures goodwill at the acquisition date as the fair value of the consideration transferred, less the fair value of identifiable 
assets acquired and liabilities assumed. Any contingent consideration payable is recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. 
Subsequent changes to the fair value of the contingent consideration are recognised in profit or loss. Costs related to the acquisition are 
expensed to the income statement as incurred.

106106

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)1. Accounting policies continued
(f) Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of consolidated financial statements requires the Group to make estimates and judgements that affect the application 
of policies and reported amounts.

Critical judgements represent key decisions made by management in the application of the Group’s accounting policies. Where a 
significant risk of materially different outcomes exists, this will represent a key source of estimation uncertainty. 

Estimates and judgements are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed 
to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty which are material to the financial statements are described in the context of the matters to which 
they relate, in the following notes:

Description

Going concern

Impairment of intangible assets, property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets

Note

1(b)(i)

13, 14

Page

103 to 105

113 to 118

2. Segmental reporting 
IFRS 8 requires segment information to be presented on the same basis as is used by the Chief Operating Decision Maker for assessing 
performance and allocating resources.

The Group has one operating segment with two revenue streams, bricks and mortar stores and online. This reflects the Group’s 
management and reporting structure as viewed by the Board of Directors, which is considered to be the Group’s Chief Operating Decision 
Maker. Aggregation is deemed appropriate due to both operating segments having similar economic characteristics, similar products on 
offer and a similar customer base.

3. Revenue
Accounting policy
Revenue comprises receipts from the sale of goods, less deductions for actual and expected returns, discounts and vouchers redeemable 
by members of the Group’s loyalty scheme and is stated net of value added tax and other sales taxes. Revenue is recognised at the point 
of completing the physical sale in stores, and when the goods have been delivered to the customer in the case of online sales. These are 
the points when IFRS 15 ‘performance obligations’ are deemed to have been satisfied.

Transactions that result in customers earning points subsequently exchangeable for discounts under the Group’s loyalty scheme are 
accounted for as multiple element revenue transactions. The fair value of the consideration received is allocated between the goods 
supplied and the points granted. The consideration allocated to the points is measured by reference to their fair value – the amount for 
which the points could theoretically be sold separately. The consideration allocated to the points is not recognised as revenue at the time 
of the initial sale transaction, but is deferred, and recognised as revenue when the points are redeemed and the Group’s obligations have 
been fulfilled.

Sale of goods

UK

EU

Total revenues

FY23
£000

FY22
£000

 275,305 

 260,087 

 4,797 

 4,543 

 280,102 

 264,630 

Seasonality of operations
The Group’s revenue is subject to seasonal fluctuations as a result of peaking during the approach to Christmas, from October to 
December. Therefore, the first half of the financial year, from April to October, typically produces lower revenue and profit than the 
second half.

4. Other operating income/(expense)
Accounting policy
The business was classified as a ‘non-essential retailer’ during the COVID-19 pandemic and was therefore required to close its shops 
during periods of lockdown in the FY20 and FY21 financial years. Accordingly, the Group made full use of the support schemes available 
from the Government to partially mitigate the loss of profit caused by the various periods of closure of the retail stores. 

The £119k charge noted in the prior period is to correct an immaterial overstatement of the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) 
income reported in respect of FY21.

The COVID-19 business rates relief received during the year was £227k (FY22: £5,828k), which is included within cost of sales.

COVID-19 furlough scheme grants receivable 

Rent receivable

FY23
£000

—

8

8

FY22
£000

(119)

8

(111)

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

107107

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
5. Alternative performance measures (APMs)
Accounting policy
The Group tracks a number of APMs in managing its business, which are not defined or specified under the requirements of IFRS because 
they exclude amounts that are included in, or include amounts that are excluded from, the most directly comparable measure calculated 
and presented in accordance with IFRS or are calculated using financial measures that are not calculated in accordance with IFRS.

The Group believes that these APMs, which are not considered to be a substitute for or superior to IFRS measures, provide stakeholders 
with additional helpful information on the performance of the business. They are consistent with how the business performance is planned 
and reported internally and are also consistent with how these measures have been reported historically. Some of the APMs are also used 
for the purpose of setting remuneration targets.

The APMs should be viewed as supplemental to, but not as a substitute for, measures presented in the consolidated financial statements 
prepared in accordance with IFRS. The Group believes that the APMs are useful indicators of its performance but they may not be 
comparable with similarly titled measures reported by other companies due to the possibility of differences in the way they are calculated.

Like-for-like (LFL) sales
The FY23 like-for-like (LFL) sales increase has been calculated with reference to the FY22 comparative sales figures. In FY22’s Annual 
Report, two-year comparatives were used because the use of a normal one-year LFL comparative was prevented by the various 
disruptions to store trading brought about by COVID-19 restrictions in the FY21 comparative period. Furthermore, for the last five weeks of 
FY22, it was necessary to calculate the LFL percentages with reference to the corresponding weeks in FY19, because the equivalent weeks 
during FY20 were also affected by enforced store closures. Similar comparison periods were also used for the total sales growth figures.

LFL sales are defined by the Group as the year-on-year growth in gross sales from stores which have been trading for a full financial year 
prior to the current year and have been trading throughout the current financial period being reported on, and from the Company’s online 
store, calculated on a calendar week basis. The measure is used widely in the retail industry as an indicator of sales performance. LFL 
sales are calculated on a gross basis to ensure that fluctuations in the VAT rates of products sold are excluded from the like-for-like sales 
growth percentage figure.

A reconciliation of IFRS revenue to sales on an LFL basis is set out below:

Total LFL sales

Non-LFL store sales

Total gross sales

VAT

Loyalty points

Revenue per consolidated income statement

FY23
£000

297,009

19,621

316,630

(35,144)

(1,384)

FY22
£000

285,012

13,359

298,371

(33,467)

(274)

280,102

264,630

Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA (EBITDA) and Adjusted profit after tax
EBITDA is defined by the Group as pre-IFRS 16 earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and profit/loss on the disposal of 
fixed assets, after adding back or deducting Adjusting items. See Note 6 for a description of Adjusting items. Pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA is used for 
the bank facility LTM EBITDA covenant calculations.

The table provides a reconciliation of pre-IFRS 16 EBITDA to profit/(loss) after tax and the impact of IFRS 16:

Pre-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA1
Income statement rental charges not recognised under IFRS 16
Foreign exchange difference on euro leases

Post-IFRS 16 Adjusted EBITDA1
Profit on disposal of right-of-use assets and lease liability recognised under IFRS 16
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Loss on disposal of intangible assets
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation
Finance expenses
Finance income
Tax credit/(charge)

Adjusted profit after tax
Adjusting items (including impairment charges and reversals)
Tax charge

Profit after tax

FY23
£000
9,000
24,865
(152)

33,713
1,105
(149)
(14)
(4,458)
(14,840)
(878)
(4,648)
227
265

10,323
(5,052)
—

5,271

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000
16,562
24,434
120

41,116
441
(179)
—
(4,040)
(15,094)
(567)
(5,192)
16
(276)

16,225
(2,262)
—

13,963

1  Also adjusted for profit and loss on disposal of right-of-use assets and liabilities, property, plant and equipment and intangible assets.

108108

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
5. Alternative performance measures (APMs) continued
Profit before tax and IFRS 16
The table provides a reconciliation of profit/(loss) before tax and IFRS 16 adjustments to profit/(loss) before tax.

Profit/(loss) before tax and IFRS 16 
adjustments

Remove rental charges not recognised under 
IFRS 16

Remove hire costs from hire of equipment

Remove depreciation charged on the 
existing assets

Remove interest charged on the 
existing liability

Depreciation charge on right-of-use assets

Interest cost on lease liability

Loss on disposal of right-of-use assets

Profit on disposal of lease liability

Foreign exchange difference on euro leases

Additional impairment charge under IAS 36

Net impact on profit/(loss)

Profit/(loss) before tax

FY23

FY22 (Restated — Note 14)

Adjusted
£000

Adjusting items
£000

Total
£000

Adjusted
£000

Adjusting items
£000

Total
£000

3,025

(1,488)

1,537

10,980

(2,191)

8,789

24,737

128

151

34

(14,840)

(4,130)

(297)

1,402

(152)

—

7,033

10,058

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(3,564)

(3,564)

(5,052)

24,737

128

151

34

(14,840)

(4,130)

(297)

1,402

(152)

(3,564)

3,469

5,006

24,308

126

89

31

(15,094)

(4,500)

(1,899)

2,340

120

—

5,521

16,501

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(71)

(71)

(2,262)

24,308

126

89

31

(15,094)

(4,500)

(1,899)

2,340

120

(71)

5,450

14,239

Adjusted profit metrics
Profit measures including operating profit, profit before tax, profit for the period and earnings per share are calculated on an adjusted 
basis by adding back or deducting Adjusting items. These adjusted metrics are included within the consolidated income statement and 
consolidated statement of other comprehensive income, with further details of Adjusting items included in Note 6.

6. Adjusting items
Adjusting items are unusual in nature or incidence and sufficiently material in size that in the judgement of the Directors merit disclosure 
separately on the face of the financial statements to ensure that the reader has a proper understanding of the Group’s financial 
performance and that there is comparability of financial performance between periods.

The Directors believe that the Adjusted profit and earnings per share measures included in this report provide additional useful 
information to users of the accounts. These measures are consistent with how business performance is measured internally. The profit 
before tax and Adjusting items measure is not a recognised profit measure under IFRS and may not be directly comparable with adjusted 
profit measures used by other companies. 

If a transaction or related series of transactions has been treated as an Adjusting item in one accounting period, the same treatment will 
be applied consistently year on year.

In relation to FY23, the items classified as ‘Adjusting’, as shown below, were related to transactions that had been treated as Adjusting in 
prior periods.

Cost of sales

Impairment charges1

Impairment reversals1

Total cost of sales

Total Adjusting items

1  These relate to fixed asset impairment charges and reversals of prior year impairment charges.

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000

8,929

(6,667)

2,262

2,262

FY23
£000

8,188

(3,136)

5,052

5,052

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

109109

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7. Operating profit
Operating profit before Adjusting items is stated after charging/(crediting) the following items:

Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal of intangible assets

Profit on disposal of right-of-use assets and lease liability

Depreciation

Amortisation

Operating lease payments:

– Hire of plant and machinery1

– Other operating leases1

Net foreign exchange loss/(gain)

Cost of inventories recognised as an expense

Staff costs

FY23
£000

149

14

(1,105)

19,298

878

371

2,136

392

119,085

62,235

FY22
(Restated — 
Note 14)
£000

179

—

(441)

19,134

567

389

1,549

(128)

106,954

60,031

1  These balances relate to non-IFRS 16 operating lease rentals during the year; please refer to Note 15 for further details of these balances.

Auditor’s remuneration:

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of the Group’s annual accounts

Amounts payable in respect of other services to the Company and its subsidiaries

Audit of the accounts of subsidiaries

Audit related assurance services (provision of turnover certificates required under certain leases)

Total services

FY23
£000

500

40

1

541

FY22
£000

450

40

1

491

Please refer to the Audit Committee report for details regarding the safeguarding of auditor objectivity and independence. 

8. Staff numbers and costs
The average number of people employed by the Group (including Directors) during the year, analysed by category, was as follows:

Number of employees

Store support centre colleagues 

Store colleagues

Warehouse and distribution colleagues

The corresponding aggregate payroll costs were as follows:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes

Total employee costs

Agency labour costs

Total staff costs

The Directors’ remuneration for the year was as follows:

Directors’ remuneration 

Contributions to defined contribution plans

110110

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

FY23

 243 

 3,564 

 147 

 3,954 

FY23
£000

 57,189 

 4,156 

 890 

 62,235 

 2,035 

 64,270 

FY23
£000

759 

15

774 

FY22

 216 

 3,468 

 140 

 3,824

FY22
£000

 55,600

 3,654

 777 

 60,031 

 1,505 

 61,536 

FY22
£000

1,118 

15

1,133 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8. Staff numbers and costs continued
The following number of Directors were members of:

Company defined contribution scheme

The highest paid Director’s remuneration during the year was as follows:

Directors’ remuneration

FY23

FY22

6

6

FY23
£000

331

331

6

6

FY22
£000

585

585

9. Finance income and expense
Accounting policy
Finance expense comprises interest charges and amortised facility fee costs. Finance income comprises interest income and is 
recognised when it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the Group and the amount of revenue can be measured reliably. 
Interest is recognised in profit as it accrues, using the effective interest method.

Recognised in consolidated statement of comprehensive income

Finance income

Bank interest receivable

Total finance income

Finance expense

Bank interest payable

Other interest payable

Interest on lease liabilities

Total finance expense

Net financing expense

FY23
£000

227

227

(295)

(223)

(4,130)

(4,648)

(4,421)

FY22
£000

16

16

(401) 

(291)

(4,500)

(5,192)

(5,176)

10. Taxation
Accounting policy
The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.

Current tax
The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the income statement 
because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items that are never 
taxable or deductible. The Group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted 
by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax
Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the 
financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit and is accounted for using the balance 
sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred tax assets are 
recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be 
utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the 
initial recognition (other than in a business combination) of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable 
profit nor the accounting profit.

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and associates, and 
interests in joint ventures, except where the Group is able to control the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that 
the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax assets arising from deductible temporary differences 
associated with such investments and interests are only recognised to the extent that it is probable that there will be sufficient taxable 
profits against which to utilise the benefits of the temporary differences and they are expected to reverse in the foreseeable future.

The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised 
based on tax laws and rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged or 
credited in the income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive income, in which case the 
deferred tax is also dealt with in other comprehensive income.

The measurement of deferred tax liabilities and assets reflects the tax consequences that would follow from the manner in which the 
Group expects, at the end of the reporting period, to recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

111111

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
10. Taxation continued
Accounting policy continued
Deferred tax continued
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax 
liabilities and when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax assets 
and liabilities on a net basis.

Current tax and deferred tax for the year
Current and deferred tax are recognised in profit or loss, except when they relate to items that are recognised in other comprehensive 
income or directly in equity, in which case the current and deferred tax are also recognised in other comprehensive income or directly 
in equity, respectively. Where current tax or deferred tax arises from the initial accounting for a business combination, the tax effect is 
included in the accounting for the business combination.

Recognised in consolidated income statement

Current tax expense 

Current year

Adjustments for prior years

Current tax (credit)/expense

Deferred tax credit 

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Increase in tax rate

Adjustments for prior years

Deferred tax credit

Total tax expense

FY23
£000

230

(611)

(381)

(212)

(172)

500

116

(265)

FY22
(Restated1)
£000

1,288

3

1,291

(111)

(1,120)

216

(1,015)

276

1  The FY22 corporation tax charge has been restated to reflect the tax impact of the restatements documented in Note 14.

The UK corporation tax rate for FY23 was 19.5% on average with the UK corporation tax rate changing from 19.0% to 25.0% 11 months into 
the financial year (FY22: 19.0%). Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the respective jurisdictions.

An increase in the UK corporation rate from 19.0% to 25.0% (effective 1 April 2023) was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021. As the 
deferred tax assets and liabilities should be recognised based on the corporation tax rate applicable when they are anticipated to 
unwind, the assets and liabilities on UK operations have been recognised at a rate of 25.0% (FY22: 25.0%). Assets and liabilities arising on 
foreign operations have been recognised at the applicable overseas tax rates.

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit for the year

Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19.5% (FY22: 19.0%)

Non-deductible expenses

Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions

Tax (over)/under provided in prior periods

Utilisation of unrecognised tax losses brought forward

Deferred tax not recognised

Losses carried forwards

Change in tax rate

Total tax (credit)/expense

FY22
(Restated 
– see above)
£000

14,239

2,705

182

(40)

219

FY23
£000

5,006

976

147

(13)

(111)

(1,211)

(1,756)

(18)

137

(172)

(265)

86

—

(1,120)

276

The Group’s total income tax credit in respect of the period was £265k (FY22: expense of £276k). The effective tax rate on the total profit 
before tax was (5.3)% (FY22: 1.9% on the profit before tax) whilst the effective tax rate on the total profit before Adjusted items was (2.6)% 
(FY22: 1.7% on the profit before Adjusted items). The difference between the total effective tax rate and the Adjusted tax rate relates to 
fixed asset impairment charges and reversals within Adjusting items being non-deductible for tax purposes.

The current year tax credit recognised above relates to an adjustment to the prior year corporation tax creditor recognised; this was 
higher than the corporation tax payable when the FY22 corporation tax computations were finalised due to the inclusion of the super 
deduction in the final year-end tax computations.

112112

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
 
 
 
 
11. Dividends
Accounting policy
At the balance sheet date, dividends are only recognised as a liability if they are appropriately authorised and are no longer at the 
discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

Final dividend for the year ended 1 May 2022

Total dividend paid to shareholders during the year

Pence per share

2.4p

FY23
£000

1,492

1,492

FY22
£000

— 

— 

Dividend equivalents totalling £603k (FY22: £375k) were accrued in the year in relation to share-based long-term incentive schemes.

The Board has recommended the payment of a 1.6 pence per share final dividend in respect of FY23 (FY22: 2.4 pence).

12. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit or loss for the period, attributable to ordinary shareholders, by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.

Diluted earnings per share is based on the weighted average number of shares in issue for the period, adjusted for the dilutive effect 
of potential ordinary shares. Potential ordinary shares represent shares that may be issued in connection with employee share 
incentive awards.

The Group has chosen to present an Adjusted earnings per share measure, with profit adjusted for Adjusting items (see Note 6 for further 
details) to reflect the Group’s underlying profit for the year.

Number of shares in issue

Number of dilutive share options

Number of shares for diluted earnings per share

Total profit for the financial period

Adjusting items

Adjusted profit for Adjusted earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Adjusted basic earnings per share

Adjusted diluted earnings per share

FY23
Number

FY22
Number

62,500,000

 62,500,000 

621,130

 940,673 

63,121,130

 63,440,673 

£000

 5,271 

 5,052 

 10,323 

Pence

 8.4 

 8.4 

 16.5 

 16.4 

£000
(Restated – 
Note 14)

 13,963 

 2,262 

 16,225 

Pence
(Restated – 
Note 14)

22.3

22.0

26.0

25.6

13. Intangible assets
Accounting policy 
Goodwill
Goodwill arising on consolidation represents any excess of the consideration paid and the amount of any non-controlling interest in the 
acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities (including intangible assets) of the acquired entity at the date of the 
acquisition. Goodwill is recognised as an asset and assessed for impairment annually or as triggering events occur. Any impairment in 
value is recognised within the income statement. Goodwill was fully impaired in FY20.

Software
Where computer software is not an integral part of a related item of computer hardware, the software is treated as an intangible asset. 
Capitalised software costs include external direct costs of goods and services (such as consultancy), as well as internal payroll related 
costs for employees who are directly working on the project. Internal payroll related costs are capitalised if the recognition criteria of IAS 
38 Intangible Assets are met or are expensed as incurred otherwise.

Capitalised software development costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over their expected economic lives, normally between 
three and seven years. Computer software under development is held at cost less any recognised impairment loss. Any impairment in 
value is recognised within the income statement and treated as an Adjusting item.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

113113

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
13. Intangible assets continued
Accounting policy continued
Software continued

Cost

Balance at 1 May 2022

Additions

Disposals

Balance at 30 April 2023

Amortisation and impairment

Balance at 1 May 2022

Amortisation charge for the year

Impairment charges

Disposals1

Balance at 30 April 2023

Net book value

At 1 May 2022

At 30 April 2023

Goodwill
£000

Software
£000

Total
£000

16,180

—

—

16,180

16,180

—

—

—

16,180

—

—

9,058

1,309

(1,057)

9,310

7,441

878

1,118

(1,043)

8,394

1,617

916

25,238

1,309

(1,057)

25,490

23,621

878

1,118

(1,043)

24,574

1,617

916

1 

 During FY23 the Group reviewed assets on the fixed asset register with a nil net book value. Following this review intangible assets with a cost and 
accumulated depreciation of £1,043k were deemed to no longer be in use by the Group and have therefore been disposed of.  

Cost

Balance at 3 May 2021

Additions

Balance at 1 May 2022

Amortisation and impairment

Balance at 3 May 2021 (Restated2)

Amortisation charge for the year (Restated2)

Impairment charge (Restated2)

Balance at 1 May 2022 (Restated2)

Net book value

At 3 May 2021 (Restated2)

At 1 May 2022 (Restated2)

Goodwill
£000

Software
£000

16,180

—

16,180

16,180

—

—

16,180

—

—

8,043

1,015

9,058

5,499

567

1,375

7,441

2,544

1,617

Total
£000

24,223

1,015

25,238

21,679

567

1,375

23,621

2,544

1,617

2   These balances have been restated to reflect the impact of the prior period restatements in Note 14.

Goodwill impairment testing
Goodwill of £16.2m was impaired to £Nil in FY20; therefore, no further impairment testing is necessary in relation to this.

Impairment of other intangible assets
Please refer to Note 14 for details of impairment of tangible and intangible assets.

114114

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14. Property, plant and equipment
Accounting policy
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at their cost of acquisition or production, less accumulated depreciation and 
accumulated impairment losses.

Depreciation is charged on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives as follows:

•  Leasehold property improvements: over the life of the lease.

•  Fixtures and fittings: 15% per annum straight line or depreciated on a straight-line basis over the remaining life of the lease, whichever 

is shorter.

•  Computer equipment: 25 to 50% per annum straight-line.

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date, with the effect of any 
changes in estimate accounted for on a prospective basis. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable 
amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount.

An item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from 
the continued use of the asset. The gain or loss arising on the disposal or scrappage of an asset is determined as the difference between 
the sale proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is recognised in profit or loss.

IFRS 16
IFRS 16 creates the concept of right-of-use assets. The accounting policy and description of the accounting treatment in respect of IFRS 16 
is included within Note 15.

Impairment of tangible and intangible assets 
The carrying amounts of the Group’s tangible and intangible assets with a measurable useful life are reviewed at each balance sheet 
date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment to their value. If such an indication exists, the asset’s recoverable amount 
is estimated and compared to its carrying value. Where the asset does not generate cash flows that are independent from other assets, 
the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the CGU to which the asset belongs. The Directors consider an individual retail store to be 
a cash generating unit (CGU), as well as the Company’s website. 

The recoverable amount of an asset is the greater of its fair value less disposal cost and its value in use (the present value of the future 
cash flows that the asset is expected to generate). In determining value in use, the present value of future cash flows is discounted using a 
discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money in relation to the period of the investment and the risks 
specific to the asset concerned. 

The carrying value represents each CGU’s specific assets, as well as the IFRS 16 right-of-use asset, plus an allocation of corporate assets 
where these assets can be allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis. 

Where the carrying value exceeds the recoverable amount an impairment loss is established with a charge being made to the income 
statement. When the reasons for a write down no longer exist, the write down is reversed in the income statement up to the net book 
value that the relevant asset would have had if it had not been written down and if it had been depreciated.  

Measuring recoverable amounts 
The Group estimates the recoverable amount of each CGU based on the greater of its fair value less disposal cost and its value in use 
(VIU), derived from a discounted cash flow model which excludes IFRS 16 lease payments. In assessing the fair value less disposal cost 
the ability to sublease each store has been considered and it is concluded that this is not applicable for the majority of the store estate. 
Where it is deemed reasonable to assume the ability to sublet the potential cash inflows generated are insignificant, therefore the VIU 
calculation is used for all stores. A proportion of ‘click and collect’ sales are included in store cash flows to reflect the contribution stores 
make to fulfilling such orders. The key assumptions applied by management in the VIU calculations are those regarding the growth rates 
of sales and gross margins, medium-term growth rates, central overhead allocation and the discount rate used to discount the assumed 
cash flows to present value.  

Projected cash flows for each store are limited to the useful life of each store as determined by its current lease term unless a lease has 
already expired or is due to expire within 12 months of 30 April 2023 where the intention is to remain in the store and renew the lease. For 
these leases, an average lease term is used for cash flow projections.

Projected cash flows for the website are limited to 60 months as this is in line with the average useful economic life of the assets assigned 
to the web CGU.

Impairment triggers
Due to the challenging macroeconomic environment and the existence of a material brought forwards impairment charge, all CGUs other 
than stores which have been open for less than 12 months have been assessed for impairment.  

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

115115

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report14. Property, plant and equipment continued
Key assumptions 
The key financial assumptions used in the estimation of the recoverable amount are set out below. The values assigned to the key 
assumptions represent management’s assessment of current market conditions and future trends and have been based on historic data 
from external and internal sources. Management determined the values assigned to these financial assumptions as follows:

The pre-tax discount rate is derived from the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, which has been estimated using the capital asset 
pricing model, the inputs of which include a company risk-free rate, equity risk premium, Group size premium, a forecasting risk premium 
and a risk adjustment (beta). The discount rate is compared to the published discount rates of comparable businesses and relevant 
industry data prior to being adopted. The FY23 pre-tax discount rate has been calculated on a post-IFRS 16 basis.  FY22’s originally 
reported impairment was calculated on a pre-IFRS 16 basis discounted using a pre-IFRS 16 WACC of 17.9%; however, when the prior year 
restatements documented below were calculated, the cash flows were produced on a post-IFRS 16 basis and discounted using a post 
IFRS 16 WACC to ensure consistency of approach.

Pre-tax discount rate

Medium-term growth rate

FY23

12.78%

1.0%

FY22
(Restated)

11.48%

2.0%

While the online CGU is in a different stage of establishment to that of the store CGUs, the same pre-tax discount rate has been used 
in the impairment assessment. Given that the website is not performing in line with expectations, all assets relating to the web CGU are 
fully impaired, as such an increase in the pre-tax discount rate used for the web assessment would not increase the impairment charge 
recognised.

Cash flow forecasts are derived from the most recent Board-approved corporate plans that form the Base Case on which the VIU 
calculations are based. These are described in Note 1(b)(i) (Going concern). 

The assumptions used in the estimation of future cash flows are: 

•  rates of growth in sales and gross margins, which have been determined on the basis of the factors described in Note 1(b)(i) (Going concern); 

•  central costs are reviewed to identify amounts which are necessarily incurred to generate the CGU cash flows. As a result of the analysis 

performed at the end of FY23, 87% (FY22: 91%) of central costs have been allocated by category using appropriate volumetrics.

Cash flows beyond the corporate plan period (2027 and beyond) have been determined using the medium-term growth rate; this is based 
on management’s future expectations, reflecting, amongst other things, current market conditions and expected future trends and has 
been based on historical data from both external and internal sources. Immediately quantifiable impacts of climate change and costs 
expected to be incurred in connection with our net zero commitments, are included within the cash flows. The useful economic lives of 
store assets are short in the context of climate change scenario models therefore no medium to long-term effects have been considered.

Impairment charge
During FY23, an impairment charge of £7,572k was recognised against 209 stores with a recoverable amount of £24,055k, and an 
impairment charge of £616k was recognised against the website (FY22 restated: an impairment charge of £7,540k was recognised 
against 200 stores with a recoverable amount of £26,528k, and an impairment charge of £1,389k was recognised against the website). 
An impairment reversal of £3,136k has been recognised in FY23 relating to 100 stores with a recoverable amount of £18,090k as at 30 April 
2023 (FY22 restated: an impairment reversal of £6,667k was recognised relating to 108 stores with a recoverable amount of £24,950k).

A net impairment charge of £5,052k (FY22 restated: £2,262k) has therefore been shown on the face of the consolidated income statement. 
In line with the previously adopted treatment, impairment charges and reversals have been shown as Adjusting items.  

Sensitivity analysis
Whilst the Directors believe the assumptions adopted are realistic, reasonably possible changes in key assumptions could still occur, 
which could cause the recoverable amount of certain stores to be lower or higher than the carrying amount. The impact on the net 
impairment charge recognised from reasonably possible changes in assumption are detailed below:

•  a reduction in sales of 5% from the Base Case plan to reflect a potential Downside Scenario would result in an increase in the net 
impairment charge of £8,981k. An increase in sales of 5% from the Base Case plan would decrease the net impairment charge 
by £5,827k; 

•  a reduction in gross margin of 2% would result in an increase in the net impairment charge of £2,320k. An increase in gross margin of 2% 

would decrease the net impairment charge by £2,063k;

•  a 200 basis point increase in the pre-tax discount rate would result in an increase in the net impairment charge of £1,412k, while a 200 

basis point decrease in the pre-tax discount rate would result in a decrease in the net impairment charge of £1,387k;

•  a 100 basis point decrease in the medium-term growth rate would result in an increase in the net impairment charge of £493k, while a 

100 basis point increase in the medium-term growth rate would result in an increase in the net impairment charge of £481k;

• 

increasing the percentage of central costs allocated across CGUs from 87% to 97% would result in an increase in the net impairment 
charge of £2,234k. Decreasing the percentage of central costs allocated across CGUs from 87% to 77% would result in a decrease in the 
net impairment charge of £2,000k.

116116

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
14. Property, plant and equipment continued
Sensitivity analysis continued
Whilst the Directors consider their assumptions to be realistic, should actual results be different from expectations, then it is possible that 
the value of property, plant and equipment included in the balance sheet could become materially different to the estimates used.

RoUA –
property
£000

RoUA –
plant and
equipment
£000

Leasehold
improvements 
£000

Plant and
equipment
£000

Fixtures and
fittings
£000

Total
£000

Cost

Balance at 1 May 2022 (Restated2)

 151,091 

 2,421 

Additions

Disposals1

 9,530 

 (6,570)

 13 

—  

Balance at 30 April 2023

 154,051 

 2,434 

Depreciation and impairment 

Balance at 1 May 2022 (Restated2)

Depreciation charge for the year

Impairment charge

Impairment reversals

Disposals

At 30 April 2023

Net book value

At 1 May 2022 (Restated2)

At 30 April 2023

 75,483 

 14,483 

 6,126 

 (2,562)

 (6,273)

 87,257 

 75,608 

 66,794 

 1,408 

 357 

—   

—   

— 

 1,765 

 1,013 

 669 

 10,729 

 933 

 (4,254)

 7,408 

 8,686 

 1,315 

 9 

 (172)

 (4,190)

 5,648 

 2,043 

 1,760 

 3,818 

 1,109 

 (1,271)

 3,656 

 3,507 

 307 

 388 

—  

 27,259 

 4,772 

 (12,836)

 195,318 

 16,357 

 (24,931)

 19,195 

 186,744 

 19,717 

 2,836 

 547 

 (402)

 108,801 

 19,298 

 7,070 

 (3,136)

 (1,230)

 (12,792)

 (24,485)

 2,972 

 9,906 

 107,548 

 311 

 684 

 7,542 

 9,289 

 86,517 

 79,196 

1 

 During FY23 the Group reviewed assets on the fixed asset register with a nil net book value. Following this review, fixed assets with a cost and accumulated 
depreciation of £17,502k were deemed to no longer be in use by the Group and have therefore been disposed of. The totals disposed of by category were 
as follows: £3,995k leasehold improvements, £1,172k plant and equipment, £12,375k fixtures and fittings.

2  These balances have been restated to reflect the impact of the prior period restatements discussed below.

Cost

Balance at 3 May 2021 (Restated2)

Additions (Restated2)

Disposals

Balance at 1 May 2022 (Restated2)

Depreciation and impairment 

Balance at 3 May 2021 (Restated2)

Depreciation charge for the year (Restated2)

Impairment charge (Restated2)

Impairment reversals (Restated2)

Disposals

Balance at 1 May 2022

Net book value

At 3 May 2021 (Restated2)

At 1 May 2022 (Restated2)

RoUA –
property
£000

154,319

2,540

(5,768)

151,091

64,619

14,662

6,165

(6,094)

(3,869)

75,483

89,700

75,608

RoUA –
plant and
equipment
£000

Leasehold
improvements
£000

Plant and
equipment
£000

Fixtures and
fittings
£000

1,913

508

—

2,421

976

432

—

—

—

1,408

937

1,013

10,410

548

(229)

10,729

7,712

1,268

134

(252)

(176)

8,686

2,698

2,043

Total
£000

196,185

5,571

(6,438)

26,167

1,499

(407)

27,259

195,318

17,049

2,431

844

(313)

(294)

93,140

19,134

7,554

(6,667)

(4,360)

3,376

476

(34)

3,818

2,784

341

411

(8)

(21)

3,507

19,717

108,801

592

311

9,118

7,542

103,045

86,517

2  These balances have been restated to reflect the impact of the prior period restatements discussed below.

Prior period restatements
Leasehold assets useful economic lives
In prior years, leasehold assets were being depreciated over a life longer than the life of the lease they relate to. To correct this, leasehold 
improvements depreciation has been restated. The FY21 closing accumulated depreciation has been increased by £1,768k with a 
corresponding decrease in closing FY21 reserves. 

The FY22 in year depreciation charge has increased by £537k, reducing adjusted profit before tax and closing property, plant and 
equipment net book value. In the consolidated cash flow statement, the FY22 adjustment has increased the ‘depreciation of property, 
plant and equipment’ by £537k, however there is no overall impact on net cash flows from operating, financing and investing activities or 
on ‘net increase in cash and cash equivalents’.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

117117

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14. Property, plant and equipment continued
Prior period restatements continued
Lease incentives received and initial direct costs incurred at the inception of a lease
In prior years, landlord capital contributions, and capitalised legal fees incurred upon negotiation of lease agreements were recorded 
within leasehold improvements rather than included within the initial measurement of the IFRS 16 right-of-use asset. Therefore, the 
costs and accumulated depreciation amounts relating to these assets have been reclassified from ‘leasehold improvements’ into 
‘RoUA property’, resulting in a £344k reduction in the right-of-use asset NBV at 3 May 2021, and a £743k reduction at 1 May 2022, with 
a corresponding increase in the NBV of leasehold assets. This adjustment has no impact on the consolidated income statement or 
consolidated cash flow statement.

Central cost allocation within fixed asset impairment assessment
In prior years, when assessing the impairment of right-of-use assets, property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, central costs 
were not allocated to each cash generating unit (CGU). During the current year, the directors have reconsidered the allocation of central 
costs and based on the existence of a consistent store estate and cost base, concluded that certain costs can be allocated to individual 
CGUs on a reasonable and consistent basis. The directors additionally considered whether a consistent allocation was appropriate in 
earlier periods and concluded that an allocation became appropriate following the change in strategy to “Better not just Bigger”, the 
implementation of which occurred following the appointment of Gavin Peck as CEO in January 2020 over a protracted period as a result 
of COVID-19, that ultimately resulted in a more consistent store estate and cost base. The directors have applied judgement to conclude 
that the effect of the revised allocation of central costs in 2023 should be reflected by restating the impairment opening balances at 2 
May 2021 and 1 May 2022.  

The FY21 closing impairment balance relating to right-of-use assets has increased by £26,681k, the closing impairment balance relating to 
property, plant and equipment has increased by £5,638k, and the closing impairment balance relating to intangible assets has increased 
by £281k. The adjustment to closing FY21 reserves is therefore £32,600k.

The FY22 reassessment resulted in a £173k higher net impairment charge relating to right-of-use assets, a £479k higher net impairment 
charge relating to property, plant and equipment, and a £1,375k higher net impairment charge relating to intangible assets. Therefore, the 
reduction in total profit before tax relating to FY22 impairment charges is £2,027k. These adjustments have resulted in the restatement of a 
number of reconciling items in the consolidated cash flow statement relating to impairment charges, reversal of impairment charges, and 
profit / loss on disposal of fixed assets, however they have no overall impact on net cash flows from operating, financing and investing 
activities or on ‘net increase in cash and cash equivalents’.

Depreciation reduction due to impairment restatement
As a result of the impairment adjustment detailed above the net book value of fixed assets was lower at the start of the FY21 and FY22, 
resulting in the depreciation charge in FY21 and FY22 being overstated. The FY21 closing accumulated depreciation has been reduced by 
£5,120k relating to right-of-use assets, £1,946k relating to property, plant and equipment and £362k relating to intangible assets, with a 
corresponding increase in closing FY21 reserves. 

The FY22 in year depreciation charge has decreased by £4,748k relating to right-of-use assets, £1,658k relating to property, plant and 
equipment, and £239k relating to intangible assets, increasing adjusted profit before tax by £6,645k. These adjustments decrease the 
‘depreciation of property, plant and equipment’, ‘depreciation of right-of-use assets’ and ‘amortisation of intangible assets’ balances in 
the consolidated cash flow statement, however there is no overall impact on ‘net increase in cash and cash equivalents’.

Corporation tax restatement
The above adjustments have resulted in restatements to the corporation tax charges, current tax assets / liabilities and the deferred tax 
asset. Please refer to notes 10 and 16 for restated taxation disclosures.

The following tables summarise the impact of the above restatements on the Group’s consolidated financial statements including the 
impact of current and deferred corporation tax.

Summarised consolidated income statement

Adjustments

Per FY22 
financial 
statements

Leasehold asset 
useful economic 
life reduction

Landlord 
contributions 
and legal fees 
incorporation 
within RoUA

 Impairment 
charge 
increase

Depreciation 
charge 
reduction

Taxation impact
of restatements

FY22 
restated 
balance

264,630

(216,053)

48,577

(111)

(9,128)

(24,004)

15,334

(5,176)

10,158

(1,436)

8,722

—

(425)

(425)

—

—

(112)

(537)

—

(537)

—

(537)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(2,027)

(2,027)

—

—

—

(2,027)

—

(2,027)

—

(2,027)

—

6,645

6,645

—

—

—

6,645

—

6,645

—

6,645

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1,160

1,160

264,630

(211,860)

52,770

(111)

(9,128)

(24,116)

19,415

(5,176)

14,239

(276)

13,963

Income statement

Revenue

Profit before tax

Gross profit

Other operating income

Distribution expenses

Administrative expenses

Operating profit

Net financing expense

Profit before tax

Taxation

Profit after tax

118118

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)14. Property, plant and equipment continued
Summarised consolidated statement of financial position

Adjustments

Non-current assets

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Deferred tax assets

Current assets

Total assets

Liabilities

Tax liability

Other liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity 
holders of the Parent

Retained earnings

Other reserves

Total equity

Per FY22 
financial 
statements

Leasehold asset 
useful economic 
life reduction

2,672

13,970

94,351

3,477

114,470

56,487

170,957

(1,115)

(148,211)

(149,326)

—

(2,304)

—

—

(2,304)

-

(2,304)

—

—

—

21,631

(2,304)

(11,741)

33,372

21,631

(2,304)

—

(2,304)

Per FY21 
financial 
statements

Leasehold asset 
useful economic 
life reduction

Non-current assets

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Deferred tax assets

Current assets

Tax asset

Other current assets

Total assets

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity 
holders of the Parent

Retained earnings

Other reserves

Total equity

2,463

17,524

112,542

2,852

135,381

704

44,360

45,064

180,445

(171,617)

8,828

(20,463)

29,291

8,828

—

(1,768)

—

—

(1,768)

—

—

—

(1,768)

—

(1,768)

(1,768)

—

(1,768)

Landlord 
contributions 
and legal fees 
incorporation 
within RoUA

—

743

(743)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Landlord 
contributions 
and legal fees 
incorporation 
within RoUA

—

344

(344)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

 Impairment 
charge 
increase

Depreciation 
charge 
reduction

Taxation impact
of restatements

FY22 
restated 
balance

(1,657)

(6,117)

(26,853)

—

602

3,604

9,866

—

(34,627)

14,072

-

—

(34,627)

14,072

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1,231

1,231

—

1,231

375

—

375

1,617

9,896

76,621

4,708

92,842

56,487

149,329

(740)

(148,211)

(148,951)

(34,627)

14,072

1,606

378

(34,627)

14,072

—

—

(34,627)

14,072

1,606

—

1,606

(32,994)

33,372

378

Adjustments

 Impairment 
charge 
increase

Depreciation 
charge 
reduction

Taxation impact
of restatements

FY21 
restated 
balance

(281)

(5,638)

(26,681)

—

(32,600)

—

—

—

(32,600)

—

(32,600)

(32,600)

—

(32,600)

362

1,946

5,120

—

7,428

—

—

—

7,428

—

7,428

7,428

—

7,428

—

—

—

842

842

(396)

—

(396)

446

—

446

446

—

446

2,544

12,408

90,637

3,694

109,283

308

44,360

44,668

153,951

(171,617)

(17,666)

(46,957)

29,291

(17,666)

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

119119

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report14. Property, plant and equipment continued
Summarised consolidated statement of changes in equity

Reported balance at 1 May 2022 

Cumulative adjustment

Restated balance at 1 May 2022

Reported balance at 2 May 2021 

Cumulative adjustment

Restated balance at 2 May 2021

Share
capital
£000

625

—

625

Share
capital
£000

625

—

625

Share
premium
£000

28,322

—

28,322

Share
premium
£000

28,322

—

28,322

Attributable to equity holders of the Company

Merger
reserve
£000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£000

Hedging
reserve 1
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
equity
£000

(54)

—

(54)

2,252

2,227

(11,741)

21,631

—

—

(21,253)

(21,253)

2,252

2,227

(32,994)

378

Attributable to equity holders of the Company

Merger
reserve
£000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£000

1,601

—

(54)

—

(54)

Hedging
reserve 1
£000

(1,203)

Retained
earnings
£000

(20,463)

Total
equity
£000

8,828

—

(26,494)

(26,494)

1,601

(1,203)

(46,957)

(17,666)

15. IFRS 16
Accounting policy
IFRS 16 establishes principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases. 

IFRS 16 requires the use of a single definition of leases, which recognises a right-of-use asset (RoUA) and a lease liability for all leases, 
with exceptions only permitted for short-term and low-value leases. Accordingly, the impact of IFRS 16 is to require recognition of a lease 
liability and a corresponding RoUA in relation to leases previously classified as operating leases, which were hitherto accounted for via a 
single charge to the profit and loss account.

The most significant impact is that the Group’s retail store operating leases are recognised on the balance sheet as right-of-use 
assets representing the economic benefits of the Group’s right to use the underlying leased assets, together with the associated future 
lease liabilities. 

Under IFRS 16, the Group recognises right-of-use assets and lease liabilities at the lease commencement date.

Identifying an IFRS 16 lease
At the inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether it is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if it conveys the 
right to control the use of an asset for a period of time, in exchange for consideration. Control is conveyed where the Group has both the 
right to direct the asset’s use and to obtain substantially all the economic benefits from that use. For each lease or lease component, the 
Group follows the lease accounting model as per IFRS 16, unless the permitted recognition exceptions can be used.

Recognition exceptions
The Group leases many assets, including properties, IT equipment and warehouse equipment. 

The Group has elected to account for lease payments as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term or another systematic 
basis for the following types of leases:

(i)  Leases with a term of 12 months or less.

(ii)  Leases where the underlying asset has a low value.

(iii)  Concession leases where the landlord has substantial substitution rights.

For leases where the Group has taken the short-term lease recognition exemption and there are any changes to the lease term or the 
lease is modified, the Group accounts for the lease as a new lease.

For leases where the Group has taken a recognition exemption as detailed above, rentals payable under these leases are charged to 
income on a straight-line basis over the term of the relevant lease except, where another more systematic basis is more representative of 
the time pattern in which economic benefits from the lease asset are consumed.

Lessee accounting under IFRS 16
Upon lease commencement, the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability.

Initial measurement
The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease 
payments made at or before the commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to dismantle and 
remove the underlying asset, or to restore the underlying asset or the site on which it is located at the end of the lease, less any lease 
incentives received.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments payable over the lease term, discounted at the 
incremental borrowing rate as the rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily determined. 

120120

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)15. IFRS 16 continued
Lessee accounting under IFRS 16 continued
Variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate are included in the initial measurement of the lease liability and are initially 
measured using the index or rate as at the commencement date. Amounts expected to be payable by the Group under residual value 
guarantees are also included. Variable lease payments that are not included in the measurement of the lease liability are recognised 
in profit or loss in the period in which the event or condition that triggers payment occurs unless the costs are included in the carrying 
amount of another asset under another accounting standard.

The Group has applied judgement to determine the lease term for some lease contracts that include renewal options. The assessment 
of whether the Group is reasonably certain to exercise such options impacts the lease term, which significantly affects the value of lease 
liabilities and right-of-use assets recognised.

The payments related to leases are presented under cash flows from financing activities and cash flows from operating activities in the 
cash flow statement.

Subsequent measurement
After lease commencement, the Group values right-of-use assets using a cost model. Under the cost model, a right-of-use asset is 
measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment.

The lease liability is subsequently increased by the interest cost on the lease liability and decreased by lease payments made. It is 
re-measured to reflect changes in: the lease term (using a revised discount rate); the assessment of a purchase option (using a revised 
discount rate); the amounts expected to be payable under residual value guarantees (using an unchanged discount rate); and future 
lease payments resulting from a change in an index or a rate used to determine those payments (using an unchanged discount rate).

The re-measurements are matched by adjustments to the right-of-use asset. Lease modifications may also prompt re-measurement of 
the lease liability unless they are determined to be separate leases.

Depreciation of right-of-use assets
The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method, from the commencement date to the earlier of either 
the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. The estimated useful lives of right-of-use assets are 
determined on the same basis as those of property, plant and equipment. In addition, the right-of-use asset is reduced by impairment 
losses, if any, and adjusted for certain re-measurements of the lease liability.

Determining the lease term
Termination options are included in a number of property leases across the Group. These terms are used to maximise operational 
flexibility. At the commencement date of property leases, the Group determines the lease term to be the full term of the lease, assuming 
that any option to break or extend the lease is unlikely to be exercised. Leases will be revalued if it becomes likely that a break clause is 
to be exercised. In determining the likelihood of the exercise of a break option, management considers all facts and circumstances that 
create an economic incentive to exercise the termination option. For property leases, the following factors are the most relevant:

•  The profitability of the leased store and future plans for the business.

• 

If there are any significant penalties to terminate (or not extend), the Group is typically reasonably certain to extend.

COVID-19 concessions
The Group elected to account for qualifying COVID-19 related rent concessions as variable lease payments, recognising the concession 
in the period in which the event or condition that triggers the payments occurs. Rent concessions are qualifying if the following 
conditions are met:

(i)  The concession is a direct consequence of the COVID-19 pandemic.

(ii) 

 The change in lease payments resulted in revised consideration for the lease that is substantially the same as, or less than, the 
consideration for the lease immediately preceding the change.

(iii)  The reduction in lease payments only affects payments due on or before 30 June 2022.

(iv)  There is no substantive change to other terms and conditions of the lease.

The Group has applied this practical expedient consistently to all lease contracts with similar characteristics and in similar circumstances.

Amounts recognised in the statement of financial position
Right-of-use assets

Land and buildings

Plant and equipment

Total right-of-use assets

Additions to the right-of-use assets during FY23 were £9,543k (FY22: £3,048k).

FY23
£000

 66,794 

 669 

 67,463 

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000

 75,608 

 1,013 

 76,621 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

121121

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
15. IFRS 16 continued
Amounts recognised in the statement of financial position continued
Lease liabilities
Lease liabilities included in the statement of financial position as at the financial year end:

Current

Non-current

Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted cash flows:

Less than one year

One to two years

Two to three years

Three to four years

Four to five years

More than five years

FY23
£000

 23,449 

 74,766 

 98,215 

FY23
£000

 27,163 

 22,926 

 18,039 

 12,944 

 9,185 

 21,718 

FY22
£000

 25,434 

 85,702 

 111,136 

FY22
£000

 31,592 

 27,283 

 23,655 

 18,977 

 13,102 

 21,862 

Total undiscounted lease liabilities

 111,975 

 136,471 

Amounts recognised in the statement of profit and loss

FY23
£000

 14,840 

 4,130 

 (1,105)

 (152)

 3,564 

 371 

 371 

 877 

 977 

 13 

 53 

 397 

 (181)

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000

 15,094 

 4,500 

 (441)

 120 

 71 

 389 

 389 

 454 

 943 

 (11)

 87 

 484 

 (408)

 2,136 

 1,549 

FY23
£000

 14,483 

 357 

 14,840 

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 14)
£000

 14,662 

 432 

 15,094 

Depreciation charge on right-of-use assets (RoUA)

Interest cost on lease liability

Profit on disposal of RoUA / lease liability

Foreign exchange difference on euro leases

Additional impairment charge under IAS 36

Operating lease rentals – hire of plant, equipment and motor vehicles

– Low-value leases

Total plant, equipment and motor vehicle operating lease rentals

Operating lease rentals – store leases

– Stores with variable lease rentals

– Concession leases (the landlord has substantial substitution rights)

– Low-value leases

– Lease is expiring within 12 months or has rolling break clauses

– Lease has expired

– Variable lease payments as a result of COVID-19 concessions

Total store operating lease rentals

Depreciation of right-of-use asset by class:

Land and buildings

Plant and equipment

Total right-of-use asset depreciation

122122

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
 
 
 
16. Deferred tax assets
Recognised deferred tax assets
Deferred tax assets are attributable to the following:

Property, plant and equipment

Leases

Temporary timing differences

Financial assets/liabilities

Tax assets

Movement in deferred tax during the year

At 1 May 2022 (Restated1)

Adjustment in respect of prior years

Deferred tax (charge)/credit to profit and loss

Deferred tax credit in equity profit and loss

At 30 April 2023

Assets

Liabilities

FY23
£000

2,876

1,362

354

262

4,854

Fixed assets
£000

2,868

(499)

507

—

2,876

Leases
£000

1,645

—

(283)

1,362

FY22
(Restated1)
£000

2,868

1,645

195

—  

4,708

Temporary
timing
differences 
£000

195

—

159

—

354

FY23
£000

—

—

—

—

—

Financial
assets/
liabilities
£000

—

(598)

—

860

262

Financial
assets/
liabilities
£000

328

—

(328)

—

—

FY22
(Restated1)
£000

—

—

—

—

—

Total
£000

4,708

(1,097)

383

860

4,854

Total
£000

3,694

(216)

1,230

—

4,708

1  The FY22 deferred tax asset has been restated to reflect the tax impact of the restatements documented in Note 14.

Movement in deferred tax during the year

At 1 May 2022 (Restated1)

Adjustment in respect of prior years

Deferred tax (charge)/credit to profit and loss (Restated1)

Deferred tax credit in equity profit and loss

At 1 May 2022 (Restated1)

Fixed assets
£000

1,574

—

1,294

—

2,868

Temporary
timing
differences 
£000

372

(216)

39

—

195

Leases
£000

1,420

—

225

—

1,645

1  The FY22 deferred tax asset has been restated to reflect the tax impact of the restatements documented in Note 14.

Tax losses carried forward for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised total £9,273k (FY22: £14,288k) with an expiry date of 
April 2024.

17. Inventories
Accounting policy
Inventories comprise stocks of finished goods for resale and are valued on a weighted average cost basis and carried at the lower of cost 
and net realisable value. ‘Cost’ includes all direct expenditure and other attributable costs incurred in bringing inventories to their present 
location and condition.

The process of purchasing inventories may include the use of cash flow hedges to manage foreign exchange risk. Where hedge 
accounting applies, an adjustment is applied such that the cost of stock reflects the hedged exchange rate.

Inventory summary

Gross stock value

Less: stock provisions for shrinkage and obsolescence

Goods for resale net of provisions

Stock in transit

Inventory

FY23
£000

31,278 

(1,037)

30,241 

3,200 

33,441 

FY22
£000

29,817 

(3,252)

26,565 

2,822 

29,387 

The cost of inventories recognised as an expense during the period was £119.1m (FY22: £107.7m).

Stock provisions
The Group makes provisions in relation to stock quantities, due to potential stock losses not yet reflected in the accounting records, 
commonly referred to as unrecognised shrinkage and, in relation to stock value, where the net realisable value of an item is expected to 
be lower than its cost, due to obsolescence. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

123123

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17. Inventories continued
Stock provisions continued
Shrinkage provision
During the prior financial year, the Group carried out ‘tactical’ (perpetual inventory basis) stock counts in its retail stores on a regular basis, such 
that at the end of the financial year a significant proportion of stock in stores had been counted and stock file adjustments made to correct 
errors indicated by the counts. In addition, full four wall counts (i.e. a controlled count of all stock in a store) had been performed in 71 stores 
during the last 6 weeks of the financial year, with an additional 53 four wall counts performed in the month following the financial year end. 

During FY23, full four wall counts were performed in 524 stores during the last 13 weeks of the financial year. Through these counts, the 
Group established that its accounting records reflected the actual quantities of stock in stores. This process also provides the Group with 
an indication of the typical percentage of stock loss, which is used to calculate, by extrapolation, unrecognised shrinkage at the balance 
sheet date. The stock records were updated to reflect the results of the stock counts, which occurred nearer to the end of the financial 
year than the counts undertaken in FY22, as a result of which, the provision required for unrecognised shrinkage materially decreased 
compared with the value at the end of FY22, by £1.4m to £0.4m.

The unrecognised shrinkage provision was £0.4m at the Period end (FY22: £1.9m), representing 1.9% of gross store stock (FY22: 8.6%). The 
provision relates to store stock with a value of £20.9m (FY22: £22.2m). This represents management’s best estimate of the likely level of 
stock losses experienced. 

Obsolescence provision
Generally, the Group’s inventory does not comprise a large proportion of stock with a ‘shelf life’. Stock lines which are slow selling because they 
have been less successful than planned or which have sold successfully and become fragmented as they reach the natural end of their planned 
selling period, are usually discounted and sold during ‘sale’ events, for example the January sale. This stock is referred to as terminal stock.

During FY23, a high degree of focus has been placed on clearing terminal stock and at the period end the Group held significantly less 
terminal stock than the prior year. Consequently, the obsolescence provision has reduced by £0.7m to £0.6m.

The Group has considered the impact of customer preferences and ESG considerations on potential stock obsolescence, and these 
factors are not deemed to have a material impact on the level of provision required.

18. Trade and other receivables

Current

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Prepayments

Trade and other receivables

FY23
£000

2,864 

359 

4,284 

 7,507 

FY22
£000

 2,606 

 1,793 

 4,028 

 8,427 

Trade receivables are attributable to sales which are paid for by credit card and are classified as finance assets at amortised cost; they 
are all current. No credit is provided to customers. The value and nature of trade receivables is such that no material credit losses occur; 
therefore, no loss allowance has been recorded at the period end (FY22: £Nil). 

Other receivables relate to stock on water deposits paid, and other accounts payable debit balances. Prepayments relate to prepaid 
property costs and other expenses. 

19. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents per balance sheet 

Net cash and cash equivalents

The Group’s cash and cash equivalents are denominated in the following currencies:

Sterling

Euro

US dollar

Net cash and cash equivalents

FY23
£000

10,196

10,196

FY23
£000

8,208

1,949

39

10,196

FY22
£000

16,280

16,280

FY22
£000

12,198

3,102

980

16,280

At 30 April 2023, the Group held net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £10.2m (FY22: net cash (excluding lease liabilities) of £16.3m). This 
comprised cash of £10.2m (FY22: cash of £16.3m).

For the year ended 30 April 2023, the Group’s bank facilities comprise an RCF of £30.0m expiring 30 November 2025. Since the Period end, 
the facility was extended by a year and reduced in size by £10.0m.

The facility includes financial covenants in relation to the level of net debt to LTM EBITDA and ‘Fixed Charge Cover’ or ratio of LTM EBITDA 
prior to deducting rent and interest, to LTM rent and interest. 

None of the Group’s cash and cash equivalents (FY22: £Nil) is held by the trustee of the Group’s employee benefit trust in relation to the 
share schemes for employees.

124124

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
 
 
 
20. Borrowings
Accounting policy
Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts, loan notes and other loans are recognised in the balance sheet at amortised cost. Finance 
charges associated with arranging non-equity funding are recognised in the income statement over the life of the facility. All other 
borrowing costs are recognised in the income statement in accordance with the effective interest rate method. A summary of the Group’s 
objectives, policies, procedures and strategies with regard to financial instruments and capital management can be found in Note 25. At 
30 April 2023, all borrowings were denominated in sterling (FY22: sterling).

Non-current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Current liabilities

Reconciliation of borrowings to cash flows arising from financing activities

Borrowings at start of year (excluding overdrafts)

Changes from financing cash flows

Payment of lease liabilities (capital)

Payment of lease liabilities (interest)

Proceeds from loans and borrowings1

Repayment of bank borrowings1

Total changes from financing cash flows

Other changes

Lease liability additions

Disposal of lease liabilities

The effect of changes in foreign exchange rates

Interest expense

Total other changes

Borrowings at end of year (excluding overdrafts)

1  £4.0m was drawn under the Group’s RCF from 29 September 2022 until 31 October 2022.

Net debt reconciliation

Net debt (excluding unamortised debt costs)

Cash and cash equivalents

Net bank cash

Non-IFRS 16 lease liabilities

Non-IFRS 16 net cash

IFRS 16 lease liabilities

Net debt including IFRS 16 lease liabilities

21. Trade and other payables

Current

Trade payables

Other tax and social security

Accrued expenses

Trade and other payables

FY23
£000

74,766

74,766

23,449

23,449

FY22
£000

85,702

85,702

25,434

25,434

FY23
£000

FY22
£000

111,136

 143,009 

 (22,672)

 (4,130)

 4,000 

 (4,000)

 (25,969)

 (4,500)

—

 (7,500)

 (26,802)

 (37,969)

 10,991 

 (1,402)

 152 

 4,140 

 13,881 

 3,634 

 (2,340)

 (120)

 4,922 

 6,096 

98,215

 111,136 

FY23
£000

FY22
£000

(10,196)

(10,196)

268

(9,928)

97,946

88,018

(16,280)

(16,280)

485

(15,795)

110,651

94,856

FY23
£000

FY22
£000

22,960 

2,610 

8,909 

34,479 

20,091 

2,792 

13,075 

35,958 

Trade payables and accruals principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and operating costs. The Group has financial 
risk management policies in place to ensure that all payables are paid within agreed credit terms. 

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

125125

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
21. Trade and other payables continued
The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their fair value.

Accrued expenses comprise various accrued property costs, payroll costs and other expenses, including £484k (FY22: £453k) of deferred 
income in relation to the customer loyalty scheme. The decrease in the balance from FY22 is due to a decrease in the bonus accrual held 
at year end.

The Group has net US dollar denominated trade and other payables of £6.6m (FY22: £4.9m).

22. Provisions and contingent liabilities
Accounting policy
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that the Group will be 
required to settle that obligation. Provisions are the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at the end of the 
reporting period and are discounted to present value where the effect is material.

Balance as at 3 May 2021

Provisions made during the year

Balance as at 1 May 2022

Provisions made during the year

Provisions used during the year

Balance as at 30 April 2023

Maturity analysis of cash flows:

Due in less than one year

Due between one and five years

Due in more than five years

HMRC VAT
£000

Property
£000

—

—

—

514

—

514

718

399

1,117

450

(218)

1,349

HMRC VAT
£000

Property
£000

 514 

 —   

 —   

 51 

 760 

 538 

Total
£000

718

399

1,117

964

(218)

1,863

Total
£000

 565 

 760 

 538 

 514 

 1,349 

 1,863 

Property provision
In accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, the Group recognises provisions for the cost of reinstating certain Group properties at the end of their 
lease term, based on the conditions set out in the terms of the individual leases. The timing of the outflows will match the ends of the relevant 
leases, which range from 1 to 10 years for stores and 13.2 years for the head office. The average remaining term of the store estate is 4.8 years.

HMRC VAT provision
HMRC initiated a VAT review in August 2022 in respect of FY19 to FY22 and have reviewed 4 years of sales data. In the initial output of their 
review, HMRC have identified a number of areas where they disagree with the VAT treatment applied by the business. 

Management accepts that there is a possibility that the VAT rate charged is incorrect for some SKUs under review, predominantly activity 
sets that include books and activity resources, and that the rate may be concluded to be mixed or standard rate. HMRCs view is that 
these rates are not zero, and therefore we believe it appropriate to recognise a provision for a potential liability for £514k on the basis that 
50% of the SKUs under review are concluded to be standard rated, and the 50% mixed rated. 

23. Defined contribution pension plans
Accounting policy
A defined contribution pension plan is a post-employment benefit plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate 
entity and will have no obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans are 
recognised as an expense in the profit and loss account in the periods during which services are rendered by employees.

The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme. The pension cost charge for the period represents contributions payable by 
the Group to the scheme and amounted to £890k (FY22: £777k).

At the end of the year contributions of £243k (FY22: £155k) were outstanding.

24. Share capital and share premium
Accounting policy
The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:

•  Share premium account: Proceeds received in excess of the nominal value of shares issued, net of any transaction costs.

•  Hedging reserve: Cumulative gains and losses on hedging instruments deemed effective in cash flow hedges.

•  Merger reserve: Created in 2018 on the formation of TheWorks.co.uk plc, it represents the difference between the cost of the investment 
in The Works Investment Limited (and its subsidiaries, The Works Stores Limited and The Works Online Limited) of £51,499,891 and the 
nominal value of the ordinary shares issued in exchange of £109.

•  Share based payment reserve: Represents the cumulative charges to income under IFRS 2 Share-based Payments on all share options 

and schemes granted, net of share option exercises.

•  Retained earnings: All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised elsewhere.

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

126126

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
24. Share capital and share premium continued
Accounting policy continued

Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 1p:

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share capital

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share premium

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

FY23
Number
000

FY22
Number
000

62,500

—

62,500

FY23
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

62,500

—

62,500

FY22
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

During the year, the Employee Benefit Trust purchased £473k (FY22: £Nil) of the Company’s shares for the purpose of satisfying future 
employee share-based payment awards.

Investment in own shares
At 30 April 2023, the Employee Benefit Trust held 1,240,577 (FY22: Nil) of the Company’s shares.

The Trust has waived any entitlement to the receipt of dividends in respect of its holding of the Company’s ordinary shares. The market 
value of these shares at 30 April 2023 was £390,161 (FY22: £Nil). In the current period, 1,408,086 (FY22: Nil) were repurchased and transferred 
into the Trust, with 167,491 (FY22: Nil) reissued on exercise of share options.

25. Financial instruments
Accounting policy 
Non-derivative financial assets
Non-derivative financial assets comprise trade and other receivables and cash and cash equivalents. The Group classifies all its non-
derivative financial assets as financial assets at amortised cost. Financial assets at amortised cost are initially measured at fair value plus 
directly attributable transaction costs, except for trade and other receivables without a significant financing component that are initially 
measured at transaction price. Subsequent to initial recognition, non-derivative financial assets are carried at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method, subject to impairment.

At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost are credit impaired. A financial asset is 
‘credit impaired’ when one or more events that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset have 
occurred. The Group measures loss allowances at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit loss.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand, at bank and on short-term deposit for less than three months. Bank overdrafts, within 
borrowings, that are repayable on demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash management are included as a component of 
cash and cash equivalents for the purposes of the cash flow statement.

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Non-derivative financial liabilities comprise bank borrowings and trade and other payables. Non-derivative financial liabilities are initially 
recognised at fair value, less any directly attributable transaction costs, and subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

Derivative financial instruments
Derivative financial instruments are mandatorily categorised as fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL), except to the extent they are 
part of a designated hedging relationship and classified as cash flow hedging instruments. The Group utilises foreign currency derivative 
contracts to manage the foreign exchange risk on future US dollar denominated purchases. 

Gains and losses in respect of foreign exchange derivative financial instruments that are not part of an effective hedging relationship are 
recognised within cost of sales and net finance expense.

Cash flow hedges
When a derivative is designated as a cash flow hedging instrument, the effective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative 
is recognised in other comprehensive income (OCI) and accumulated in the hedging reserve. The effective portion of changes in the 
fair value of the derivative that is recognised in OCI is limited to the cumulative change in fair value of the hedged item, determined on 
a present value basis, from inception of the hedge. Any ineffective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is recognised 
immediately in profit or loss.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

127127

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
25. Financial instruments continued
Accounting policy continued
The Group designates only the change in fair value of the spot element of forward exchange contracts as the hedging instrument in cash 
flow hedging relationships and applies a hedge ratio of 1:1. The change in fair value of the forward element of forward exchange contracts 
(forward points) is separately accounted for as a cost of hedging and recognised in the hedging reserve separately as costs of hedging.

When foreign exchange hedged forecast transactions subsequently result in the recognition of inventory, the amount accumulated in the 
hedging reserve and the cost of hedging reserve is included directly in the initial cost of the inventory.

Hedging gains and losses and costs of hedging transferred to the cost of inventory in the year were £175k (FY22: (£441k).

If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting or the hedging instrument is sold, expires, is terminated or is exercised, 
then hedge accounting is discontinued prospectively. When hedge accounting for cash flow hedges is discontinued, the amount that has 
been accumulated in the hedging reserve remains in equity until it is included in the cost of inventory on its initial recognition.

If the hedged future cash flows are no longer expected to occur, then the amounts that have been accumulated in the hedging reserve 
and the cost of hedging reserve are immediately reclassified to profit or loss.

Fair value estimation
The techniques applied in determining the fair values of financial assets and liabilities are disclosed below.

Foreign currency
The consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the functional currency of the Group.

Transactions in currencies other than the entity’s functional currency (foreign currencies) are recognised at the rates of exchange 
prevailing on the dates of the transactions. The majority of currency transactions that are not in the functional currency of the trading 
entity relate to inventory purchases. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the 
translation at year-end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income 
statement within cost of sales, except when deferred in other comprehensive income as qualifying cash flow hedges. Foreign currency 
gains and losses are reported on a net basis.

The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk, most significantly to the US dollar as a result of sourcing certain products which are paid 
for predominantly in US dollars. The Group hedges these exposures using forward foreign exchange contracts and hedge accounting 
is applied when the requirements of IFRS 9 are met, which include that a forecast transaction must be ‘highly probable’. The Group has 
applied judgement in assessing whether the forecast purchases remain ‘highly probable’.

The Group’s policy is that approximately 50% of the forecast purchase requirements are initially hedged, approximately 12 months prior, 
with incremental hedges taken out over time, as the buying period approaches and therefore as certainty increases over the forecast 
purchases. As a result of this progressive strategy, reducing the supply pipeline of inventory, should this occur, does not immediately 
lead to over-hedging and the disqualification of ‘highly probable’. If the forecast transactions were no longer expected to occur, any 
accumulated gain or loss on the hedging instruments would be immediately reclassified to profit or loss.

Financial risk management
The Board has overall responsibility for managing risks and uncertainties and these are reviewed on an ongoing basis. The principal 
financial risks faced by the Group include market risk, currency risk, cash flow interest rate risk, credit risk and liquidity risk.

In order to manage the Group’s exposure to these risks, in particular the Group’s exposure to currency risk, the Group enters into forward 
foreign currency contracts. No transactions in derivatives are undertaken for speculative purposes.

Further details of the Group’s approach to managing risk are included in the ‘Principal Risks and Uncertainties’ section of the Strategic 
report and in the Corporate governance report.

(a) Market risk
The Group’s activities expose it to two types of market risk, being currency risk and cash flow interest rate risk. The Group’s policies for 
managing currency risk and interest rate risk are set out below.

(i) Currency risk
The Group is exposed to transactional foreign currency risk to the extent that there is a mismatch between the currencies in which sales, 
purchases, receivables and borrowings are denominated. A significant proportion of the Group’s retail products are procured from 
overseas suppliers in transactions denominated in US dollars.

The Group uses foreign currency derivative contracts and US dollar denominated cash balances to manage the foreign exchange risk on 
US dollar denominated inventory purchases.

As described above, the Group takes a prudent, but flexible, approach to hedging the risk of exchange rate fluctuations. At 30 April 2023, 
the Group held forward contracts with a nominal value of $40.0m (FY22: $30.0m), all with maturity dates of less than one year. These 
contracts have an average forward rate of $1.2183 (FY22: $1.3964).

128128

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements)25. Financial instruments continued
Financial risk management continued
Exposure to currency risk
The carrying amounts of the Group’s foreign currency denominated monetary assets and monetary liabilities at the reporting date are 
as follows:

US dollar

Euro

Liabilities

Assets

FY23
£000

6,552 

352 

FY22
£000

4,905 

454 

FY23
£000

39 

1,958 

FY22
£000

980 

3,092 

Currency sensitivity analysis
The Group is exposed to the US dollar and, to a significantly lesser extent, the euro.

The following table details the Group’s sensitivity to a 10% increase or decrease in sterling against the relevant foreign currencies. 10% 
represents management’s assessment of the reasonably possible change in foreign exchange rates. The sensitivity analysis includes 
only outstanding foreign currency denominated monetary items and adjusts their translation at the year end for a 10% change in foreign 
currency rates. A positive number below indicates an increase in profit and other equity where sterling strengthens 10% against the 
relevant currency. For a 10% weakening of sterling against the relevant currency, there would be a comparable impact on the profit and 
other equity, and the balances below would be negative. 

Profit/(loss) for the period

USD impact

Euro impact

FY23
£000

592

FY22
£000

357

FY23
£000

(146)

FY22
£000

(240)

This is mainly attributable to the exposure outstanding on US dollar and euro cash balances held, trade payables and other accruals at 
the reporting date.

The sensitivity analysis above represents the inherent foreign exchange risk as at the year end, but is not reflective of the exposure, and 
therefore the profit impact, to foreign currency exchange movements during the year.

(ii) Interest rate risk
The Group is also exposed to the effects of fluctuations in the interest rate on its banking facility. The sensitivity analysis below has been 
determined based on an increase in the interest rate of 1.0% on the average cash balances throughout the year.

Variable rate instruments (100 bp increase)

Variable rate instruments (100 bp decrease)

FY23
£000

132

(132)

FY22
£000

123

(123)

(b) Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual 
obligations. The Group does not offer any credit to customers; therefore, the credit risk with respect to exposure to customers is low.

The Group does not have any significant credit risk exposure to any single counterparty or any group of counterparties having similar 
characteristics. The Group defines counterparties as having similar characteristics if they are related entities.

The credit risk on liquid funds and derivative financial instruments is limited because the counterparties are banks with high credit ratings 
assigned by international credit rating agencies.

The carrying amount of the financial assets recorded in the financial statements represents the Group’s and the Company’s exposure to 
credit risk.

(c) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting the obligations associated with its financial liabilities that are 
settled by delivering cash or another financial asset.

The Group manages liquidity risk by maintaining adequate reserves, banking facilities and reserve borrowing facilities, by continuously 
monitoring forecast and actual cash flows, and by matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities.

The following tables detail the Group’s remaining contractual maturity for its financial assets and liabilities with agreed repayment 
periods. The tables have been drawn up based on the undiscounted cash flows, excluding interest, based on the earliest date on which 
the Group can be required to pay.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

129129

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
25. Financial instruments continued
Contractual maturity of financial liabilities

30 April 2023

Interest bearing

Non-interest bearing

Finance lease liability (undiscounted cash flows)

Derivative

Forward currency contracts

1 May 2022

Interest bearing

Non-interest bearing

Finance lease liability (undiscounted cash flows)

Derivative

Forward currency contracts

Within 1 year
£000

1-5 years
£000

5+ years
£000

Total
£000

— 

31,950 

27,163 

1,048 

60,161 

— 

32,917 

31,592 

— 

760 

— 

538 

63,094 

21,718 

— 

33,248 

111,975 

—  

—  

1,048 

63,854 

22,256 

146,271 

— 

913 

— 

— 

83,017 

21,862 

— 

33,830 

136,471 

— 

— 

— 

— 

64,509 

83,930 

21,862 

170,301 

Hedge accounting 
IFRS 9 requires the Group to ensure that hedge accounting relationships are aligned with the Group’s risk management objectives and 
strategy and to apply a qualitative and forward-looking approach to assessing hedge effectiveness.

The Group determines the existence of an economic relationship between the hedging instrument and the hedged item based 
on the currency, amount and timing of their respective cash flows. The Group assesses whether the derivative designated in each 
hedging relationship is expected to be, and has been, effective in offsetting cash flows of the hedged item using the hypothetical 
derivative method.

In these hedge relationships, the main sources of ineffectiveness are:

•  The effect of counterparties and the Group’s own credit risk on the fair value of the forward foreign exchange contracts, which is not 

reflected in the change in the fair value of the hedged cash flows attributable to the change in exchange rates.

•  Changes in the timing of the hedged transactions.

Fair value measurements
Financial instruments carried at fair value are measured by reference to the following fair value hierarchy, based on the degree to which 
the fair value is observable:

•  Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

•  Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for 

the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices).

•  Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not 

based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

Derivative financial instruments are carried at fair value under a Level 2 valuation method. All other financial instruments carried at fair 
value are measured using the Level 1 valuation method.

There were no transfers between the levels during the current or prior year.

Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of derivative financial instruments at the balance sheet date is as follows:

Net derivative financial instruments

Foreign exchange contracts

Classification of financial instruments
The table below shows the classification of financial assets and liabilities as at 30 April 2023.

The fair value of financial instruments has been assessed as approximating to their carrying value.

FY23
£000

FY22
£000

(1,048)

2,393 

130130

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
25. Financial instruments continued
Classification of financial instruments continued

As at 30 April 2023

Financial assets measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial assets not measured at fair value

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Financial liabilities measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value

Unsecured bank loans

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

As at 30 April 2023

As at 1 May 2022

Financial assets measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial assets not measured at fair value

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Financial liabilities measured at fair value

Derivative financial instruments

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value

Unsecured bank loans

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

As at 1 May 2022

Mandatorily
at FVTPL
£000

Cash flow 
hedging
 instruments
£000

Financial 
assets at
 amortised 
cost
£000

Other 
financial
 liabilities
£000

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(1,048)

—

—

—

—

7,507

10,196

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(98,215)

(34,479)

(1,048)

17,703

(132,694)

Mandatorily
at FVTPL
£000

Cash flow 
hedging
 instruments
£000

Financial 
assets at
 amortised 
cost
£000

Other 
financial
 liabilities
£000

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

2,393

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

8,427

16,280

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(111,136)

(35,958)

2,393

24,707

(147,094)

26. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements 
Accounting policy
The Group operates an equity-settled share-based compensation plan.

The cost of the awards to employees is expensed to the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity, on a 
straight-line basis over the vesting period of the award. The total income statement charge is based on the Company’s estimate of the 
number of share awards that will eventually vest in accordance with the vesting conditions. The awards granted during FY23 include 
market-based vesting conditions. At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimate of the number of awards that are 
expected to vest. Any revision to estimates is recognised in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

During FY23, the Group had three (FY22: three) share-based payment schemes, which are described below.

TheWorks.co.uk Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
Further details of the Group’s LTIP arrangements are included in the Directors’ remuneration report. The LTIP rules provide for the grant of 
performance related and restricted awards. 

The LTIP awards are subject to a three-year vesting period and will usually only vest following the satisfaction of performance conditions. 
Vested shares will not be released until the end of an additional holding period of two years beginning on the vesting date. Performance 
measures under the LTIP are based on financial measures. For FY23, the vesting conditions require three years’ service from the grant 
date and the achievement of an EPS target, and a share price target (FY22 awards: three years’ service from the grant date and the 
achievement of an EPS target, and a share price target).

Restricted stock awards (RSA)
Restricted stock awards have previously been granted to certain employees, with a three-year vesting period. Restricted share awards 
are not subject to performance conditions.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

131131

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
26. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements continued
Save As You Earn Scheme (SAYE)
A Save As You Earn Scheme is established which is a UK tax-qualified scheme under which eligible employees (including Directors) may 
save up to a maximum monthly limit of £250 (as determined by the Remuneration Committee) over a period of three years. Participants 
are granted an option to acquire shares at up to a 20% discount to the price as at the date of grant. The number of shares under option is 
that which can be acquired at that price using savings made.

Number of share options

Outstanding at 1 May 2022

Granted

Forfeited

Lapsed

Exercised

Outstanding at 30 April 2023

Weighted average exercise price (£)

Outstanding at 1 May 2022

Granted

Forfeited

Lapsed

Exercised

Outstanding at 30 April 2023

LTIP

RSA

SAYE

 2,720,807 

 1,525,242 

 2,064,003 

 2,682,726 

 1,097,879 

 2,349,307 

 (181,818)

 (485,828)

 (206,266)

 (192,598)

 (1,641,100)

 —   

 (1,009,860)

 (66,773)

 —   

 4,529,621 

 2,363,750 

 1,762,350 

LTIP

RSA

SAYE

—

—

—

 — 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

 0.56 

 0.36 

 0.41 

 0.58 

—

 0.43 

 2.13 

FY22
£000

 486 

 98 

 67 

 651 

Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)

 3.85 

 2.48 

The exercise prices of outstanding share options as at 30 April 2023 range from £0.21 to £0.81.

Expense recognised in the income statement

LTIP – share-based payment expense

RSA – share based payment expense

SAYE – share-based payment expense

Total IFRS 2 charges

FY23
£000

 275 

199

 54 

 528 

27. Capital commitments
At 30 April 2023 the Group had capital commitments of £368k (FY22: £139k).

28. Related party transactions
Identity of related parties with which the Group has transacted
Balances and transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation 
and are not disclosed in this note. Transactions between the Group and its associates are disclosed below.

Transactions with key management personnel
The compensation of key management personnel (including the Directors) is as follows:

Key management remuneration - including social security costs

Pension contributions

Long-Term Incentive Plan - including social security costs

Total transactions with key management personnel

FY23
£000

 3,132 

 184 

 313 

 3,629 

FY22
£000

 2,077 

 134 

 621 

2,832 

Further details on the compensation of key management personnel who are Directors are provided in the Group’s Directors’ 
remuneration report.

29. Subsidiary undertakings
The results of all subsidiary undertakings are included in the consolidated financial statements. The principal place of business and the 
registered office addresses for the subsidiaries are the same as for the Company.

Company

The Works Investments Limited

The Works Stores Limited

The Works Online Limited

132132

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

Active/
dormant

Direct/
indirect control

Registered
number

Active

Active

Dormant

Direct

09073458

Indirect

Indirect

06557400

08040244

Class of
shares held

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ownership

100%

100%

100%

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued(Forming part of the financial statements) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of financial position
As at 30 April 2023

Fixed assets

Investment

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Total liabilities

Net assets

Share capital

Share premium

Share-based payment reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity

Note

33

34

35

36

36

FY22 
(Restated – 
Note 35)
£000

FY23
£000

 38,377 

 38,377 

57,537 

57,537 

 7 

 7 

 20 

20 

 38,384 

57,557 

 8,986 

 8,986 

 29,398 

 625 

 28,322 

 2,780 

 (2,329)

 29,398 

6,465 

6,465 

51,092 

625 

28,322 

2,252 

19,893 

51,092 

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 30 August 2023 and were signed on its behalf by:

Steve Alldridge
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 11325534

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

133

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity

Share capital
£000

Share premium
£000

Share based 
payment reserve
£000

Reported balance at 2 May 2021 

Cumulative adjustment to opening balance (Note 35)

Restated balance at 2 May 2021

Total comprehensive expense for the period

Loss for the period

Total comprehensive expense for the period

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charge

Transactions with owners of the Company

 625 

—

 625 

—

—

—

—

 28,322 

 1,546 

—

—

Retained 
Earnings
£000

 40,529 

(5,549)

Total equity
£000

 71,022 

(5,549)

 28,322 

 1,546 

 34,980 

 65,473 

—

—

—

—

—

—

706

706

(15,087)

(15,087)

(15,087)

(15,087)

—

—

706

706

Balance at 1 May 2022 (Restated - Note 35)

 625 

 28,322 

 2,252 

 19,893 

 51,092 

Total comprehensive expense for the period

Loss for the period

Total comprehensive expense for the period

Transactions with owners of the Company

Share-based payment charge

Dividend

Own shares purchased by employee benefit trust 

Transactions with owners of the Company

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

 —   

Balance at 30 April 2023

 625 

 28,322 

 —   

 —   

 (20,257)

 (20,257)

 (20,257)

 (20,257)

 528 

 —   

 —   

 528 

 2,780 

 —   

 (1,492)

 (473)

 (1,965)

 (2,329)

 528 

 (1,492)

 (473)

 (1,437)

 29,398 

134

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

 
Notes to the Company financial statements

30. Accounting policies
(a) Basis of preparation
The Company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (FRS 101). In preparing these financial statements, the Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure 
requirements of UK-adopted International Accounting Standards (Adopted IFRSs) but makes amendments where necessary in order to 
comply with Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 disclosure exemptions has been taken. The 
financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention.

An Employee Benefit Trust operated on the Company’s behalf (‘EBT’) is acting as an agent of the Company, therefore the assets and 
liabilities of the EBT are aggregated into the Company balance sheet and shares held by the EBT in the Company are presented as a 
deduction from equity.

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for at least 
12 months from the date of issue of these financial statements. Accordingly, the financial statements have been prepared on a going 
concern basis. Refer to Note 1(b)(i) for further information regarding the basis of preparation.

Principal accounting policies
The principal accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these financial statements.

New accounting standards
The Company has applied the following new standards and interpretations for the first time for the annual reporting period commencing 
2 May 2022:

•  Annual Improvements to IFRS 2018-2020 (Amendments to IFRS 1, IFRS 9, IFRS 16 and IAS 41)

•  Onerous Contracts – Cost of Fulfilling a Contract (Amendments to IAS 37)

•  Property, Plant and Equipment – Proceeds before Intended Use (Amendments to IAS 16)

•  References to the Conceptual Framework (Amendments to IFRS 3)

•  COVID-19 Related Rent Concessions beyond 30 June 2021 (Amendments to IFRS 16)

The adoption of the standards and interpretations listed above has not led to any changes to the Company’s accounting policies or had 
any other material impact on the financial position or performance of the Company.

(b) Income statement
The Company made a loss after tax of £20.1m for the period relating to the impairment of the investment balance (FY22: loss of £15.1m). 
As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the income statement of the Company is not presented as part of the financial 
statements.

In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures:

•  Cash flow statement and related notes.

•  Comparative period reconciliations for share capital.

•  Transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries.

•  Capital management.

•  The effects of new but not yet effective IFRS.

•  The compensation of key management personnel.

As the consolidated financial statements include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has also taken the exemptions under FRS 101 
available in respect of the following disclosures:

• 

IFRS 2 share-based payments in respect of Group-settled share-based payments.

(c) Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of financial statements requires the Company to make estimates and judgements that affect the application of policies 
and reported amounts.

Critical judgements represent key decisions made by management in the application of the Company accounting policies. Where a 
significant risk of materially different outcomes exists due to the requirement to make assumptions in arriving at a figure, this will represent 
a key source of estimation uncertainty.

Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of 
future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The estimates which have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities within the next 
12 months are discussed below.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty which are material to the financial statements are described in the context of the matters to which 
they relate, in the following note:

Description

Impairment of investments in subsidiaries

Note

33

Page

136

31. Employee costs
The Company has no employees other than the Board of Directors. Full details of Directors’ remuneration are set out in the Directors’ 
remuneration report.

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

135

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic reportNotes to the Company financial statements continued

32. Dividends
Accounting policy
At the balance sheet date, dividends are only recognised as a liability if they are appropriately authorised and are no longer at the 
discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

Final dividend for the year ended 1 May 2022

Total dividend paid to shareholders during the year

Pence per share

2.4p

2.4p

FY23
£000

1,492

1,492

FY22
£000

— 

— 

Dividend equivalents totalling £603k (FY22: £375k) were accrued in the year in relation to share-based long-term incentive schemes.

The Board has recommended the payment of a 1.6 pence per share final dividend in respect of FY23 (FY22: 2.4 pence).

33. Investments in subsidiaries
Key source of estimation uncertainty 
The carrying value of the investment in subsidiary undertakings is reviewed for impairment on an annual basis. The recoverable amount 
is determined based on value in use. The value in use method requires the Group to determine appropriate assumptions (which are key 
sources of estimation uncertainty) in relation to the growth rates of sales and gross margins, operating costs, future capital maintenance 
expenditure, long-term growth rates and the pre-tax discount rate used to discount the assumed cash flows to present value. Estimation 
uncertainty arises due to changing economic and market factors.

At 2 May 2021
Additions
Impairment charge
At 1 May 2022
Additions
Impairment charge

At 30 April 2023

FY23
£000

57,279
14,105
(13,847)
57,537
386 
(19,546)

38,377

Investments in subsidiaries represent the Company’s investment in its subsidiary, The Works Investments Limited.

Impairment of investments in subsidiaries
The Company evaluates its investments in subsidiaries annually for any indicators of impairment. The Company considers the relationship 
between its market capitalisation and the carrying value of its investments, among other factors, when reviewing for indicators of impairment. 

As described above, key assumptions for the value in use calculation include those regarding the pre-tax discount rate, long-term growth 
rates, and expected trading performance (sales, gross margin and operating costs). 

The recoverable amount of the investment in The Works Investments Limited has been re-evaluated based on the Group’s latest forecast 
post-tax cash flows included in its Base Case plan (see Note 1(b)(i)) which have regard to historical performance and knowledge of the 
current market, together with the Group’s views on the future achievable growth and the impact of committed cash flows. The cash flows 
include estimates of ongoing capital expenditure required to maintain the store network, but exclude any significant growth capital 
initiatives. The immediately quantifiable costs of short term climate change risks and our net zero commitments have been included 
in the cashflows. Increased capital expenditure has been included in the medium term cashflows to reflect anticipated technological 
investment that is likely to be required either due to climate risk or in meeting our net zero commitments. 

Management estimates pre-tax discount rates that reflect the current market assessment of the time value of money and the risks 
specific to the Group. The pre-tax discount rate is derived from the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, which has been estimated 
using the capital asset pricing model, the inputs of which include a company risk-free rate, equity risk premium, Group size premium, 
a forecasting risk premium and a risk adjustment (beta). The FY23 pre-tax discount rate has been calculated on a pre-IFRS 16 basis, 
therefore the cashflows used in the value in use calculation include IFRS-16 lease payments. 

Pre-tax discount rate
Long-term growth rate

FY23

17.19%
1.0%

FY22

17.88%
2.0%

As a result of this analysis, an impairment charge of £19.5m has been recognised during FY23. 

Sensitivity analysis
As disclosed in the accounting policies note, the cash flows used within the impairment model, the long-term growth rate and the pre-tax 
discount rate are sources of estimation uncertainty and changes in these assumptions could lead to further impairment.

Management has performed sensitivity analysis on the assumptions in the impairment model using reasonably possible changes in these 
key assumptions:

•  a 10 basis point reduction in the long-term growth rate would result in an increase in impairment of £1.3m;

•  a 10% reduction in cash flows from the Base Case plan would result in an increase in the impairment of £2.8m; and

•  a 20 basis point increase in the pre-tax discount rate would result in an increase in impairment of £3.3m.

In the event that all three were to occur simultaneously, there would be an increase in impairment of £6.7m.

136

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

 
34. Trade receivables

Prepayments and accrued income

Trade and other receivables

35. Trade payables

Non-trade payables and accrued expenses

Accruals

Amounts owed to Group undertakings

Trade and other payables

FY23
£000

7

7

FY23
£000

208 

86 

8,692 

8,986 

FY22
£000

20

20

FY22
(Restated1)
£000

208 

92 

6,165 

6,465 

1  These balances have been restated to reflect the impact of the prior period restatements discussed below.

Amounts owed to Group undertakings are non-interest bearing and repayable on demand. The increase in the balance relates to the 
FY22 final dividend and Plc related payroll costs being paid by The Works Stores Limited during the year as the Company does not have a 
bank account.

Prior Period Restatements
The FY21 fixed asset impairment restatement detailed in Note 14 retrospectively reduces the distributable reserves in The Works Stores 
Limited at the end of FY21. This prior year restatement affects an intercompany loan waiver which occurred in FY21, of a £5.5m payable 
which had been due to The Works Stores Limited from TheWorks.co.uk plc. As this is a waiver from a subsidiary to the parent company, 
the waiver is a deemed distribution of profits. Following the prior year restatement, The Works Stores Limited had negative distributable 
reserves as at the time of the waiver, as such the distribution was unlawful. Therefore, as at the date of the waiver the Company is liable 
to repay an amount equal to the original amount subject to the waiver, and an intercompany payable of £5.5m was created at this date. 
This results in a £5.5m increase to amounts owed to group undertakings as at the end of FY21, with a corresponding reduction in profit 
after tax. In the FY22 financial statements, the amounts owed to group undertakings is increased by £5.5m compared with the amount 
previously stated, and the brought forward retained earnings balance has been reduced by £5.5m.

The following tables summarise the impact of the above restatements on the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

Summarised consolidated statement of financial position

Total assets

Liabilities

Trade and other payables

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity holders of the Parent

Retained earnings

Other reserves

Total equity

Total assets

Liabilities

Trade and other payables

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity holders of the Parent

Retained earnings

Other reserves

Total equity

Per FY22
 financial
statements

57,557

Adjustment

—

(916)

(916)

56,641

25,442

31,199

56,641

(5,549)

(5,549)

(5,549)

(5,549)

—

(5,549)

Per FY21
 financial
statements

71,477

Adjustment

—

(455)

(455)

71,022

40,529

30,493

71,022

(5,549)

(5,549)

(5,549)

(5,549)

—

(5,549)

FY22 
restated 
balance

57,557

(6,465)

(6,465)

51,092

19,893

31,199

51,092

FY21 
restated 
balance

71,477

(6,004)

(6,004)

65,473

34,980

30,493

65,473

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

137

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements continued

35. Trade payables continued
Prior Period Restatements continued
Summarised consolidated statement of changes in equity

Reported balance at 1 May 2022 

Cumulative adjustment

Restated balance at 1 May 2022

Reported balance at 2 May 2021 

Cumulative adjustment

Restated balance at 2 May 2021

Attributable to equity holders of the Company

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
equity
£000

 625 

 28,322 

 2,252 

 25,442 

 56,641 

—

—

—

(5,549)

(5,549)

 625 

 28,322 

 2,252 

 19,893 

 51,092

Attributable to equity holders of the Company

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
equity
£000

 625 

 28,322 

 1,546 

 40,529 

 71,022 

—

—

—

(5,549)

(5,549)

 625 

 28,322 

 1,546 

 34,980 

 65,473 

36. Share capital and share premium
Accounting policy
The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:

•  Share premium account: Proceeds received in excess of the nominal value of shares issued, net of any transaction costs.

•  Share based payment reserve: Represents the cumulative charges to income under IFRS 2 Share-based Payments on all share options 

and schemes granted, net of share option exercises.

•  Retained earnings: All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised elsewhere.

Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 1p: 

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share capital

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

Share premium

At the start of the period

Issued in the period

At the end of the period

FY23
Number
000

FY22
Number
000

62,500

—

62,500

FY23
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

62,500

—

62,500

FY22
£000

625

—

625

28,322

—

28,322

During the year, the Employee Benefit Trust purchased £473k (FY22: £Nil) of the Company’s shares for the purpose of satisfying future 
employee share-based payment awards.

Investment in own shares
At 30 April 2023, the Employee Benefit Trust held 1,240,577 (FY22: Nil) of the Company’s shares.

The Trust has waived any entitlement to the receipt of dividends in respect of its holding of the Company’s ordinary shares. The market 
value of these shares at 30 April 2023 was £390,161 (FY22: £Nil). In the current period, 1,408,086 (FY22: Nil) were repurchased and transferred 
into the Trust, with 167,491 (FY22: Nil) reissued on exercise of share options.

138

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
37. Equity-settled share-based payment arrangements
Accounting policy
The Group operates an equity-settled share-based compensation plan.

The cost of the awards to employees is expensed to the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity, on a 
straight-line basis over the vesting period of the award. The cost of awards to employees of subsidiary undertakings is recognised as an 
increase in the investment in the subsidiary. The total income statement charge is based on the Company’s estimate of the number of 
share awards that will eventually vest in accordance with the vesting conditions. The awards granted during FY23 include market-based 
vesting conditions. At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimate of the number of awards that are expected to vest. 
Any revision to estimates is recognised in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

During FY23, the Group had three (FY22: three) share-based payment schemes, which are described below.

TheWorks.co.uk Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
Further details of the Group’s LTIP arrangements are included in the Directors’ remuneration report. The LTIP rules provide for the grant of 
performance related and restricted awards. 

The LTIP awards are subject to a three-year vesting period and will usually only vest following the satisfaction of performance  conditions. 
Vested shares will not be released until the end of an additional holding period of two years beginning on the vesting date. Performance 
measures under the LTIP are based on financial measures. For FY23, the vesting conditions require three years’ service from the grant 
date and the achievement of an EPS target, and a share price target (FY22 awards: three years’ service from the grant date and the 
achievement of an EPS target, and a share price target).

Restricted stock awards (RSA)
Restricted stock awards have previously been granted to certain employees, with a three-year vesting period. Restricted share awards 
are not subject to performance conditions.

Save As You Earn Scheme (SAYE)
A Save As You Earn Scheme is established which is a UK tax-qualified scheme under which eligible employees (including Directors) may 
save up to a maximum monthly limit of £250 (as determined by the Remuneration Committee) over a period of three years. Participants 
are granted an option to acquire shares at up to a 20% discount to the price as at the date of grant. The number of shares under option is 
that which can be acquired at that price using savings made.

For more information, refer to Note 26.

Expense recognised in the Company income statement

Share-based payment expenses

Expense recognised in the Company income statement

Expense recognised in the subsidiary income statement

Total IFRS 2 charges recognised in the Group income statement

FY22
(Restated – 
Note 35)
£000

396

 310

706 

FY23
£000

143

385

528

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

139139

Financial statementsCorporate governanceStrategic report 
 
 
Advisers and contacts

Corporate Brokers
Singer Capital Markets Advisory LLP  
One Bartholomew Lane 
London 
EC2N 2AX

Legal Advisers 
Squire Patton Boggs (UK) LLP  
6 Wellington Place 
Leeds  
LS1 4AP 
Tel: 0113 284 7000

Auditor
KPMG LLP 
One Snowhill  
Snowhill Queensway  
Birmingham 
B4 6GH 
Tel: 0121 740 3516

Principal Bankers
HSBC Bank Plc 
Birmingham Corporate Centre 
6th Floor, 120 Edmund Street 
Birmingham 
B3 2QZ 
Tel: 03455 852 569

Registrars
Equiniti Limited 
Aspect House, Spencer Road  
Lancing 
West Sussex 
BN99 6DA

Financial Public Relations and Investor Relations
Sanctuary Counsel  
5-8 The Sanctuary 
Westminster 
London 
SW1P 3JS 
Tel: 0207 340 0395

Registered Office
Boldmere House, Faraday Avenue 
Hams Hall Distribution Park  
Coleshill 
Birmingham 
B46 1AL 
Tel: 0121 313 6050

140

TheWorks.co.uk plc  Annual Report and Accounts 2023

CBP020499

TheWorks.co.uk plc’s commitment to environmental issues 
is reflected in this Annual Report, which has been printed 
on Symbol Freelife Satin, an FSC® certified material.

This document was printed by L&S using its environmental 
print technology, which minimises the impact of printing on the 
environment, with 99% of dry waste diverted from landfill. Both 
the printer and the paper mill are registered to ISO 14001.

T

h

e

W

o

r

k

s

.

c

o

.

u

k

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

3

Boldmere House 
Faraday Avenue 
Hams Hall Distribution Park 
Coleshill 
Birmingham B46 1AL